EZMotion-NC E60 ALARM/PARAMETER MANUAL BNP-B2345A(ENG) This page is a temporary cover. It does not contain in the formal delivery version. EZMotion is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company. PREFACE This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the EZMotion-NC E60. This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the EZMotion-NC E60 functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer. Notes on Reading This Manual (1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC. For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine manufacturer. If the descriptions relating to вЂњrestrictionsвЂќ and вЂњallowable conditionsвЂќ conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturer's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former. (2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations. The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible. Caution If the descriptions relating to the вЂњrestrictionsвЂќ and вЂњallowable conditionsвЂќ conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturerвЂ™s instruction manualвЂљ the latter has priority over the former. The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible. This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer. In some NC system versionsвЂљ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screenвЂљ the machine operates in a different way or some function is not activated. Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION". DANGER WARNING CAUTION When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken. When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken. When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if handling is mistaken. Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any case, important information that must always be observed is described. DANGER Not applicable in this manual. WARNING Not applicable in this manual. CAUTION 1. Items related to product and manual If the descriptions relating to the вЂњrestrictionsвЂќ and вЂњallowable conditionsвЂќ conflict between this manual and the machine manufacturerвЂ™s instruction manualвЂљ the latter has priority over the former. The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible. This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer. In some NC system versionsвЂљ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screenвЂљ the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated. 2. Items related to faults and abnormalities If the BATTERY LOW alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an input/output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each data item. [Continued on next page] CAUTION [Continued] 3. Items related to maintenance Do not replace the battery while the power is ON. Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery. Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws. 4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable. In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to вЂњ0вЂќ. CONTENS I EXPLANATION OF ALARMS 1. LIST OF ALARMS......................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 OPERATION ALARMS ..........................................................................................................1 1.2 STOP CODES ........................................................................................................................ 5 1.3 SERVO ALARMS .................................................................................................................10 1.4 SPINDLE ALARMS ..............................................................................................................20 1.5 MCP ALARM ........................................................................................................................25 1.6 SYSTEM ALARMS ...............................................................................................................28 1.7 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS..................................................32 1.8 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP ......................................................................35 1.9 AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS..................................................................................................36 1.10 USER PLC ALARMS..........................................................................................................43 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT...............................................44 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS........................................................................................................44 2.2 OPERATOR MESSAGES ....................................................................................................52 2.2.1 SEARCH AND OPERATION RELATED......................................................................52 2.2.2 MDI/EDITING RELATED..............................................................................................53 2.2.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT RELATED ..............................................................................54 2.2.4 S-ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT RELATED........................................................55 2.2.5 AUXILIARY AXIS..........................................................................................................55 2.2.6 PARAMETER BACKUP RELATED .............................................................................55 2.2.7 OTHERS .......................................................................................................................56 3. PROGRAM ERROR....................................................................................................................57 II EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS 1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS.......................................................................................... 1 2. MACHINING PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................... 3 2.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS.................................................................................................... 3 2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS.................................................................................................... 8 2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS............................................................................................................10 2.4 BARRIER DATA ...................................................................................................................11 2.5 TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS ............................................................................13 3. I/O PARAMETERS......................................................................................................................14 3.1 BASE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................................................14 3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS ................................................................................................15 3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS......................................................................................17 4. SETUP PARAMETERS ..............................................................................................................18 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS.................................................................................19 6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ..................................................................................68 6.1 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ............................................................................68 6.2 ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS .............................................................................74 6.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS..............................................................................77 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 .........................................................................79 -i- 7. SERVO PARAMETERS..............................................................................................................83 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 ........................................................................................................................83 7.2 SUPPLEMENT ...................................................................................................................102 7.2.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................102 7.2.2 ELECTRONIC GEARS...............................................................................................105 7.2.3 LOST MOTION COMPENSATION ............................................................................106 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS.........................................................................................................107 8.1 SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS........................................................107 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 ......................................................................................................................114 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH ...................................................................................134 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM .....................................................................................................................165 8.5 SUPPLEMENT ...................................................................................................................194 8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................................194 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION......................................................................................197 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE .........................................................................................................197 9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA....................................................................................201 9.3 EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS .............................................203 9.4 EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS .......................................207 10. PLC CONSTANTS...................................................................................................................208 10.1 PLC TIMER........................................................................................................................208 10.2 PLC COUNTER.................................................................................................................208 10.3 PLC CONSTANTS ............................................................................................................209 10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT ...............................................................................................209 11. MACRO LIST ...........................................................................................................................212 12. POSITION SWITCH .................................................................................................................214 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION .................................................................................................214 12.2 CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH ...........................................................................216 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN ...........................................................................217 - ii - I EXPLANATION OF ALARMS 1. 1.1 1. LIST OF ALARMS OPERATION ALARMS LIST OF ALARMS 1.1 OPERATION ALARMS (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) M01 OPERATION ERROR Error No. Alarms occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and those by machine trouble are displayed. Details Remedy 0001 DOG OVERRUN (Dog overrun) When returning to the reference pointвЂљ the near-point detection limit switch did not stop over the dogвЂљ but overran the dog. вЂў Increase the length of the near-point dog. вЂў Reduce the reference point return speed. 0002 Z-AX NO CRSS One of the axes did not pass the Z-phase during the initial reference point return after the power was turned ON. вЂў Move the detector one rotation or more in the opposite direction of the reference pointвЂљ and repeat reference point return. 0003 INVALID RET (Invalid return) When manually returning to the reference pointвЂљ the return direction differs from the axis movement direction selected with the AXIS SELECTION key. вЂў The selection of the AXIS SELECTION keyвЂ™s +/вЂ“ direction is incorrect. The error is canceled by feeding the axis in the correct direction. 0004 EXT INTRLK (External interlock) The external interlock function has activated (the input signal is вЂњOFFвЂќ) and one of the axes has entered the interlock state. вЂў As the interlock function has activatedвЂљ release it before resuming operation. вЂў Check the sequence on the machine side. вЂў Check for broken wires in the interlock signal line. 0005 INTRL INTRLK (Internal interlock) The internal interlock state has been entered. The absolute position detector axis has been removed. A command for the manual/automatic simultaneous valid axis was issued from the automatic mode. вЂў The servo OFF function is validвЂљ so release it first. вЂў An axis that can be removed has been issuedвЂљ so perform the correct operations. вЂў The command is issued in the same direction as the direction where manual skip turned ONвЂљ so perform the correct operations. вЂў During the manual/automatic simultaneous modeвЂљ the axis commanded in the automatic mode became the manual operation axis. Turn OFF the manual/ automatic valid signal for the commanded axis. вЂў Turn ON the power againвЂљ and perform absolute position initialization. I-1 1. 1.1 Error No. LIST OF ALARMS OPERATION ALARMS Details Remedy 0006 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end) The stroke end function has activated (the input signal is вЂњOFFвЂќ) and one of the axes is in the stroke end status. вЂў Move the machine manually. вЂў Check for broken wires in the stroke end signal wire. вЂў Check for trouble in the limit switch. 0007 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end) The stored stroke limit IвЂљ II function has activated. вЂў Move it manually. вЂў If the stored stroke limit in the parameter is incorrectly setвЂљ correct it. 0008 Chuck/tail-stock barrier stroke end axis found The chuck/tail-stock barrier function turned ONвЂљ and an axis entered the stroke end state. вЂў Reset the alarm with resetвЂљ and move the machine in the reverse direction. 0009 Reference point return number illegal Return to the No. 2 reference point was performed before return to the No. 1 reference point was completed. вЂў Execute No. 1 reference point return. 0019 Sensor signal illegal ON The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated. вЂў Turn the tool measurement mode signal input OFF, and move the axis in a safe direction. вЂў The operation alarm will turn OFF even when the sensor signal is turned OFF. The sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement after the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated. The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100Вµm from the final entry start position. Note) When the tool measurement mode signal input is turned OFF, the axis can be moved in either direction. Pay attention to the movement direction. 0020 Reference point return illegal Return to the reference point was performed before the coordinates had not been established. вЂў Execute reference point return 0024 Zero point return disabled during absolute position detection alarm A zero point return signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm. вЂў Reset the absolute position detection alarmвЂљ and then perform zero point return. 0025 Zero point return disabled during zero point initialization A zero point return signal was input during zero point initialization of the absolute position detection system. вЂў Complete zero point initializationвЂљ and then perform zero point return. I-2 1. 1.1 Error No. LIST OF ALARMS OPERATION ALARMS Details Remedy 0101 NOT OP MODE (Not operation mode) вЂў Check for a broken wire in the input mode signal wire. вЂў Check for trouble in the mode selector switch. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0102 OVERRIDE ZERO (Override zero) The cutting feed override switch on the machine operation panel is set to zero. вЂў Set the switch to a value other than zero to release the error. вЂў If the switch is set to a value other than zeroвЂљ check for a short circuit in the signal wire. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0103 EX F SPD ZRO (External feed speed zero) The manual feed speed switch on the machine operation panel is set to zero when the machine is in the jog mode or automatic dry run mode. вЂў Set the switch to a value other than zero to release the error. вЂў If the switch is set to a value other than zeroвЂљ check for a short circuit in the signal wire. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0104 F1 SPD ZRO (F1-digit speed zero) The F1-digit feedrate is set to zero when the F1-digit feed command is being executed. вЂў Set the F1-digit feedrate on the setup parameter screen. 0105 SPINDLE STP (Spindle stop) The spindle stopped during the synchronous feed command. вЂў Rotate the spindle. вЂў If the workpiece is not being cutвЂљ start dry run. вЂў Check for a broken wire in the spindle encoder cable. вЂў Check the connections for the spindle encoder connectors. вЂў Check the spindle encoder pulse. 0106 HNDL FD NOW (Handle feed axis No. illegal) An axis not found in the specifications was designated for handle feed or the handle feed axis was not selected. вЂў Check for broken wires in the handle feed axis selection signal wire. вЂў Check the sequence program. вЂў Check the No. of axes listed in the specifications. 0107 SPDL RPM EXS (Spindle rotation speed excessive) The spindle rotation speed exceeded the axis clamp speed during the thread cutting command. вЂў Lower the commanded spindle rotation speed. 0108 Fixed point mode feed axis No. illegal: An axis not found in the specifications was designated for the fixed point mode feed or the fixed point mode feedrate is illegal. вЂў Check for broken wires in the fixed mode feed axis selection signal wire and fixed point mode feedrate wire. вЂў Check the fixed point mode feed specifications. 0109 BLK ST INTLK (Block start interlock) An interlock signal that locks the start of the block has been input. вЂў Check the sequence program. I-3 1. 1.1 Error No. LIST OF ALARMS OPERATION ALARMS Details Remedy 0110 CTBL ST INTLK (Cutting block start interlock) An interlock signal that locks the start of the cutting block has been input. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0111 Restart switch ON The restart switch was turned ON before the restart search was completed, and the manual mode was selected. вЂў Search the block to be restarted. вЂў Turn OFF the restart switch. 0112 Program Check Mode The automatic start button was pressed during program check or in program check mode. вЂў Press the reset button to cancel the program check mode. 0115 RESETTING The automatic start button was pressed during resetting or tape rewinding. вЂў When rewinding the tapeвЂљ wait for the winding to endвЂљ or press the reset button to stop the windingвЂљ and then press the automatic start button. вЂў During resettingвЂљ wait for resetting to endвЂљ and then press the automatic start button. 0117 PLAYBACK NOT POSSIBLE The playback switch was turned ON during editing or full-character mode (9-inch). вЂў During editingвЂљ cancel the function by pressing the input or previous screen keyвЂљ and then turn ON the playback switch. вЂў Set the edit screen (9-inch) to the half-character modeвЂљ and then turn ON the playback switch. 0160 Axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft limit range Returned from the outside of the soft limit range for the axis with no maximum speed set for the outside of the soft limit range. вЂў Set the maximum speed for the outside of the soft limit range. (Parameter вЂњ#2021 out_fвЂќ) вЂў Change the soft limit range. (Parameter вЂњ#2013 OTвЂ“вЂќ вЂњ#2014 OT+вЂќ) 1007 The spindle is being used in synchronized tapping. вЂў Cancel synchronized tapping. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) M90 PARAM SET MODE Error No. вЂ” M90 Messages output when the setup parameter lock function is enabled are displayed. Details Remedy Setup parameter lock released The setup parameter lock is released. Automatic start is disabled when setup parameters can be set. I-4 вЂў Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer. 1. 1.2 LIST OF ALARMS STOP CODES 1.2 STOP CODES These codes indicate a status that caused the controller to stop for some reason. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) T01 CANвЂ™T CYCLE ST Error No. This indicates the state where automatic operation cannot be started when attempting to start it from the stop state. Details Remedy 0101 AX IN MOTION (axis in motion) Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is moving. вЂў Try automatic start again after all axes have stopped. 0102 READY OFF Automatic start is not possible as the NC is not ready. вЂў Another alarm has occurred. Check the details and remedy. 0103 RESET ON Automatic start is not possible as the reset signal has been input. вЂў Turn OFF the reset input signal. вЂў Check that the reset switch is not ON constantly due to trouble. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0104 A-OP STP SGL (Automatic operation stop signal вЂњONвЂќ) The FEED HOLD switch on the machine operation panel is вЂњONвЂќ (valid). вЂў Check the FEED HOLD switch. вЂў The feed hold switch is the B contact. вЂў Check for broken wires in the feed hold signal wire. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0105 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis) Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stroke end. вЂў If one of the axisвЂ™ ends is at the stroke endвЂљ move the axis manually. вЂў Check for broken wire in the stroke end signal wire. вЂў Check for trouble in the stroke end limit switch. 0106 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis) Automatic start is not possible as one of the axes is at the stored stroke limit. вЂў Move the axis manually. вЂў If an axis is not at the endвЂљ check the parameter details. 0107 NO OP MODE (NO operation mode) The operation mode has not been selected. вЂў Select the automatic operation mode. вЂў Check for broken wires in the automatic operation mode (memoryвЂљ tapeвЂљ MDl) signal wire. I-5 1. 1.2 Error No. LIST OF ALARMS STOP CODES Details Remedy 0108 OP MODE DUPL (Operation mode duplicated) Two or more automatic operation modes are selected. вЂў Check for a short circuit in the mode selection signal wire (memoryвЂљ tapeвЂљ MDl). вЂў Check for trouble in the switch. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0109 OP MODE SHFT (Operation mode shift) The automatic operation mode changed to another automatic operation mode. вЂў Return to the original automatic operation modeвЂљ and start automatic start. 0110 Tape search execution Automatic start is not possible as tape search is being executed. вЂў Begin automatic start after the tape search is completed. 0113 Thermal alarm Automatic start is not possible because a thermal alarm (Z53 TEMP. OVER) has occurred. вЂў The NC controller temperature has exceeded the specified temperature. вЂў Take appropriate measures to cool the unit. 0115 In host communication Automatic start cannot be executed as the NC is communicating with the host computer. вЂў Execute automatic start after the communication with the host computer is completed. 0138 Disabled start during absolute position detection alarm A start signal was input during an absolute position detection alarm. вЂў Reset the absolute position detection alarmвЂљ and then input the start signal. 0139 Disabled start during zero point initialization A start signal was input while initializing the absolute position detectorвЂ™s zero point. вЂў Complete zero point initialization before inputting the start signal. 0190 Automatic start disabled Automatic start is disabled because setup parameters can be set. вЂў Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer. 0191 Automatic start disabled Automatic start was caused during file deletion or writing. вЂў Cause automatic start after file deletion or writing is completed. I-6 1. 1.2 T02 FEED HOLD Error No. LIST OF ALARMS STOP CODES The feed hold state been entered due to a condition in the automatic operation. Details Remedy 0201 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis) An axis is at the stroke end. вЂў Manually move the axis away from the stroke end limit switch. вЂў The machining program must be corrected. 0202 S/W STRK END (S/W stroke end axis) An axis is at the stored stroke limit. вЂў Manually move the axis. вЂў The machining program must be corrected. 0203 RESET SIGNAL ON (Reset signal on) The reset signal has been input. вЂў The program execution position has returned to the start of the program. Execute automatic operation from the start of the machining program. 0204 AUTO OP STOP (Automatic operation stop) The FEED HOLD switch is вЂњONвЂќ. вЂў Resume automatic operation by pressing the вЂњCYCLE STARTвЂќ switch. 0205 AUTO MD CHING (Automatic mode change) The operation mode changed to another mode during automatic operation. вЂў Return to the original automatic operation modeвЂљ and resume automatic operation by pressing the вЂњCYCLE STARTвЂќ switch. 0206 Acceleration and deceleration time constants too large The acceleration and deceleration time constants are too large. (This problem occurs at the same time as system alarm Z59.) вЂў Increase the set value of the parameter вЂњ#1206 G1bFвЂќ. вЂў Decrease the set value of the parameter вЂњ#1207 G1btLвЂќ. вЂў Lower the cutting speed. 0215 Absolute position detection alarm stop An absolute position detection alarm occurred. вЂў Reset the absolute position detection alarm. I-7 1. 1.2 T03 BLOCK STOP Error No. 0301 LIST OF ALARMS STOP CODES This indicates that automatic operation stopped after executing one block of the program. Details Remedy SNGL BLK ON (Single block on) The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine operation panel is ON. вЂў Automatic operation can be resumed by turning the CYCLE START switch ON. The single block or machine lock switch changed. 0302 User macro stop The block stop command was issued in the user macro program. вЂў Automatic operation can be resumed by turning the CYCLE START switch ON. 0303 Mode change The automatic mode changed to another automatic mode. вЂў Return to the original automatic operation modeвЂљ and resume automatic operation by turning the CYCLE START switch ON. 0304 MDI completion The last block of MDI was completed. вЂў Set MDI againвЂљ and turn the CYCLE START switch ON to resume MDl operation. 0305 Block start interlock The interlock signal that locks the block start is entered. вЂў Check the sequence program. 0306 Block cutting start interlock The interlock signal that locks the block cutting start is entered. вЂў Check the sequence program. I-8 1. 1.2 LIST OF ALARMS STOP CODES This indicates the operation state when an alarm did not occur during automatic operationвЂљ and nothing seems to have happened. T10 FIN WAIT Error No. 0 Details The error number is displayed while each of the completion wait modes listed in the table below is ON. It disappears when the mode is canceled. 0 Alarm No. In dwell execution Alarm No. Door open Note 1) 0 1 Waiting for spindle position to be looped 0 Г— Alarm No. Waiting for spindle orientation to complete Waiting for cutting speed deceleration Waiting for rapid traverse deceleration Waiting for MSTB completion 0 Г— 1 8 Г— 9 Г— Г— Г— 1 2 Г— 3 Г— 4 Г— 5 Г— 6 Г— Г— 7 Г— Г— I-9 Г— 8 Г— 9 Г— A Г— Г— B Г— Г— C Г— Г— D Г— Г— E Г— Г— Г— F Г— Г— Г— Note 1: This mode is enabled by the door interlock function. Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— 1. 1.3 LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS 1.3 SERVO ALARMS These alarms describe errors in the servo system such as the servo drive amplifierвЂљ motor and encoder. The alarm messageвЂљ alarm No. and Axis Name will display on the alarm message. The No. of the axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No. will also display on the servo monitor screen. If several alarms have occurredвЂљ a max. of two errors per axis will display on the servo monitor screen. If вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ is displayed as an axis name on the alarm message screen, the error is a spindle alarm. Refer to the section вЂњSpindle alarmsвЂќ. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) S SERVO ALARM : Г—Г— 0 0 в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. Alarm reset class Alarm class (Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset class combinations are preset. (Refer to the separate table for S02, S51 and S52.) Alarm class S01 Alarm reset class PR S03 NR S04 AR Resetting methods After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the NC power ON again. After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by inputting the NC RESET key. After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the servo drive unit power ON again. (Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class. For example, even if вЂњS03 Servo error: NRвЂќ is displayed, it may be necessary to turn the NC power ON again. (Note 3) Refer to the spindle alarms if the axis name is вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. 10 Name Insufficient voltage 11 Axis selection error 12 13 14 15 Meaning PN bus voltage dropped to 200 V or lower. The rotary switches for both axes are set to the same axis number when using the 2-axis integrated amplifier. Otherwise, the switches are set to an illegal value. Memory error 1 An error occurred in a memory or FB IC by self-check to be made during driver power-ON. Software processing The S/W process did not end within the specified time. (S/W error 1 operation sequence or timing error) Software processing The control IC is not operating correctly. error 2 Memory error 2 Amplifier self-diagnosis error (The amplifier LED display will be вЂњ- вЂќ.) I - 10 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 16 LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Name Magnetic pole position detection error A/D converter error Meaning An error occurred in the U, V, and W phases for polarity position detection. 22 An error occurred in the A/D converter for current detection by self-check to be made during driver power-ON. A/D converter variables contain an abnormal value. Motor side detector: The absolute position data was not sent properly with serial data when the power was turned ON. Initial communication error Initial communication with the detector could not be performed. Initial communication with the detector cannot be performed in the Machine side system that uses OHA25K-ET in the machine end detector. detector: Initial communication error In the high-speed serial detector connected to the machine end, an Machine side detector: CPU error error occurred in the data stored in an EEROM. 1 In the high-speed serial detector connected to the machine end, a Machine side deteriorated LED was detected. detector: EEPROM/LED error Machine side In the high-speed serial detector connected to the machine end, an detector: Data error error occurred in a position within one rotation. In the high-speed serial detector connected to the machine end, the Machine side built-in thermal protector functioned. detector: Memory error Machine side In the high-speed serial detector connected to the machine end, detector: communication with the detector stopped. Communication error Motor side detector: An abnormality was detected in the ABZ or UVW phase for the motor No signal 1 end detector. Machine side An abnormality was detected in the ABZ phase in a closed-loop detector: No signal 2 system. LSI error LSI operation error 24 Grounding 25 Absolute position data lost 26 Unused axis error 27 Machine side detector: CPU error 2 A grounded motor cable was detected. (Detected only in Ready ON state) The absolute position data in the detector was lost. (The backup voltage in the absolute position detector dropped. The absolute position cannot be corrected.) A power module error occurred in the axis set as [F] in the rotary switch. (Alarm issued only for 2-axis amplifier.) The CPU in the machine end absolute position detection linear scale is malfunctioning. 17 18 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 I - 11 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 28 LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS 30 Name Meaning Machine side The absolute position linear scale moved more than 45 mm/s during detector: Overspeed initialization after the NC power was turned ON. (Alarm output by linear scale.) An error occurred in the scale or scale circuit for the absolute value Machine side linear scale. detector: Absolute (Alarm is output from the linear scale.) position data error The absolute position linear scale has exceeded the maximum Machine side movement speed. detector: Relative (Alarm is output from the linear scale.) position data error Motor side detector: Detector circuit error CPU error 1 In the motor end high-speed serial detector, an error occurred in the data stored in an EEROM. The scale CPU doesnвЂ™t operate properly. (Alarm is output from the linear scale.) Motor side detector: A deteriorated LED was detected in the detector. EEPROM/LED error Motor side detector: A detector position data error was detected. Data error Motor side detector: Communication with the detector stopped or receive data was abnormal. Communication error Over regeneration Overheating was detected in the regenerative resistor. 31 Overspeed 32 Power module overcurrent 33 Overvoltage 34 NC-DRV communication: CRC error NC command error 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2F 35 36 37 38 39 NC-DRV communication: Communication error Initial parameter error NC-DRV communication: Protocol Error 1 NC-DRV communication: Protocol Error 2 A speed exceeding the motorвЂ™s tolerable rotation speed was detected. The overcurrent protector in the power module functioned. An error occurred in the IPM used in the inverter. One of the following factors can be considered. (1) OvercurrentвЂљ (2) OverheatвЂљ (3) Drop in control power voltageвЂљ etc. The PN bus voltage exceeded 400 V. An error occurred in the communication data from the NC. The movement command data from the NC is abnormally large in amount. Communication from the NC stopped. The servo parameter sent from the controller during initialization by NC power-ON was illegal. There was a protocol error in the communication with the NC. (Frame error) There was a protocol error in the communication with the NC. (Information error) I - 12 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 3A LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Name Overcurrent Meaning The motor drive current is too large. An overheat in the IPM used for the servo driveвЂ™s main circuit was detected. A regeneration transistor or resistor error was detected. 42 Power module overheat Regeneration circuit error Feedback error 1 43 Feedback error 2 46 Motor overheat 48 Motor side detector: CPU error 2 Motor side detector: Overspeed 3B 3C 49 4A 4B 4F 50 51 52 53 A feedback pulse skip or Z-phase error occurred in the position detector. There is an excessive difference in the feedback amount between the motor end detector and the machine end detector during a closed loop. An FB IC error was also detected during semi-closed loop. The motor overheated. When using the linear servo system, the CPU in the absolute position linear scale is malfunctioning. When using the linear servo system, the absolute position linear scale detected a speed exceeding 45m/s when the CNC power was turned ON. Motor side detector: When using the linear servo system, the absolute position linear scale detected an error in the scale or scale circuit. Absolute position data error Motor side detector: When using the linear servo system, the absolute position linear scale detected a speed exceeding the maximum movement speed of Relative position the absolute position scale. data error Instantaneous A momentary power interrupt of 50 ms or longer was detected. power interruption Overload 1 Excessive loads were applied for an interval exceeding the specified time. The load level of the servomotor or servo driver can be calculated from the motor current. This load level has reached the overload level that is specified by the overload detection level (sv022: OLL) and overload-time constant (sv021: OLT). Overload 2 Excessive loads are applied, exceeding the specified time. A current command exceeding 95% of the maximum driver capacity continued for 1.0 second or more. Excessive error 1 The difference between the ideal and actual positions has exceeded parameter setting value sv023: OD1 (or sv053: OD3) when the servo was turned ON. Excessive error 2 The difference between the ideal and actual positions has exceeded parameter setting value sv026: OD2 when the servo was turned OFF. I - 13 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 54 Name Excessive error 3 55 External emergency stop error 58 Collision detection 1: G0 Collision detection 1: G1 Collision detection 2 59 5A 5F 61 62 External contactor welding Power module overcurrent Frequency error 65 Supplementary regeneration error Rush relay error 67 Phase interruption 68 Watchdog 69 Grounding 6A External contactor welding 63 LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Meaning When an excessive error or alarm 1 is detected, no motor current flows. This error occurs when the power cable is loose or disconnected or no voltage is applied to the bus. No contactor interrupt command is issued in 30 seconds after an external emergency stop signal is input. Check the settings for the emergency stop input signal and sv036 external emergency stop. An interference or system 1 error was detected in G0 modal (rapid traverse feed) mode. An interference or system 1 error was detected in G1 modal (cutting speed) mode. An interference or system 2 error was detected. An outside contact fused. The вЂњregenerative overcurrentвЂќ alarm was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ1вЂќ on the power supply unit.) A вЂњpower frequency errorвЂќ was detected in the power supply unit. (Alarm вЂњ2вЂќ on the power supply unit.) The вЂњcompensating regenerative errorвЂќ alarm was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ3вЂќ on the power supply unit.) The вЂњrush current errorвЂќ alarm was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ5вЂќ on the power supply unit.) The вЂњopen phase alarmвЂќ was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ7вЂќ on the power supply unit.) The вЂњwatch dogвЂќ alarm was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ8вЂќ on the power supply unit.) The вЂњmotor ground faultвЂќ alarm was generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњ9вЂќ on the power supply unit.) For details refer to the descriptions for the power supply unitвЂ™s alarms. вЂњExternal contactor depositionвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњAвЂќ on the power supply unit.) I - 14 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 6B Name Rush relay welding LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Meaning вЂњRush relay depositionвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњbвЂќ on the power supply unit.) вЂњMain circuit errorвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњcвЂќ on the power supply unit.) вЂњParameter value abnormalвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњdвЂќ on the power supply unit.) An incorrect power PCB and control PCB combination was detected. (Alarm вЂњdвЂќ on the power supply unit.) (MDS-CH-CV Series only) вЂњMemory errorвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњEвЂќ on the power supply unit.) вЂў вЂњAD converter errorвЂќ was detected on the power supply unit side. вЂў It was recognized that the power supply is not connected. (Alarm вЂњFвЂќ on the power supply unit.) вЂњMomentary power failure detectionвЂќ alarm is generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњHвЂќ on the power supply unit.) 6C Main circuit error 6D Parameter error 6E Power supply PCB combination error Memory error 6F Power supply error 71 Instantaneous power interruption/External emergency stop Over regeneration вЂњOverregenerationвЂќ alarm is generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњJвЂќ on the power supply unit.) Regenerative вЂњRegeneration resistor overheatedвЂќ alarm is generated on the power resistor overheat supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњKвЂќ on the power supply unit.) Overvoltage вЂњOvervoltageвЂќ alarm is generated on the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњLвЂќ on the power supply unit.) External emergency вЂњExternal emergency stop setting abnormalвЂќ alarm is generated on stop setting error the power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњMвЂќ on the power supply unit.) Power module вЂњPower module or PC board overheatedвЂќ alarm is generated on the overheat power supply unit side. (Alarm вЂњnвЂќ on the power supply unit.) An error was detected when the high-gain mode and normal mode Drive unit power was selected. supply reclose Turn the amplifier power ON again. request If this alarm is detected even after the amplifier power is turned ON again after the alarm 7F is detected, there is an error in the EEPROM. Refer to the MELDAS AC Servo Maintenance Manual for details. Detector converting The MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end detected an incorrect connection or broken cable. unit 1: Connection error 73 74 75 76 77 7F 80 I - 15 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 81 83 84 85 86 88 89 8A 8C 8D 8E Name Detector converting unit 1: Communication error Detector converting unit 1: Judgment error Detector converting unit 1: CPU error Detector converting unit 1: Data error Detector converting unit 1: Magnetic Pole error Watchdog Detector converting unit 2: Connection error Detector converting unit 2: Communication error Detector converting unit 2: Judgment error Detector converting unit 2: CPU error Detector converting unit 2: Data error LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Meaning The MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end detected an error in the communication with the absolute position detection scale. The MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end could not judge the connected scale's analog wave cycle. The CPU for the MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end is not operating correctly. An error was detected in the analog interpolation data for the MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end. An error was detected in the magnetic pole data of the MDS-B-HR connected to the motor end. Servo system operation is abnormal. The MDS-B-HR connected to the machine end detected an incorrect connection or broken cable. The MDS-B-HR connected to the machine end detected an error in the communication with the absolute position detection scale. The MDS-B-HR connected to the machine end could not judge the connected scale's analog wave cycle. The CPU for the MDS-B-HR connected to the machine end is not operating correctly. An error was detected in the analog interpolation data for the MDS-B-HR connected to the machine end. I - 16 1. 1.3 LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the S02 INIT PARAM ERR в€†в€†в€†в€† controller to the spindle amplifier Axis name when the power was turned ON. Remove the cause of the alarm, Alarm No. (parameter No.) and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once. (Note) Refer to the spindle alarms if the axis name is вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. Details Remedy 2201 вЂ“ 2264 The servo parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate parameters and correct them. The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter where the error occurred. The number of constants to be used in the Check that all the related parameters are 2301 specified correctly. following functions is too large: sv001:PC1, sv002:PC2, sv003:PGN1 вЂў Electronic gears sv018:PIT, sv019:RNG1, sv020:RNG2 вЂў Position loop gain вЂў Speed feedback conversion Check that all the related parameters are High-speed serial incremental detector 2302 Parameters for absolute position detection specified correctly. sv017:SPEC, sv025:MTYP are set to ON during OSE104 and OSE105 connection. Set the parameters for absolute position detection to OFF. To detect an absolute position, replace the incremental specification detector with an absolute position detector. Check that all the related parameters are No servo option is found. 2303 The closed loop (including the ball screw- specified correctly. sv025:MTYP/pen end detector) or dual feedback control sv017:SPEC/dfbx function is an option. No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are 2304 The SHG control function is an option. specified correctly. sv057:SHGC sv058:SHGCsp No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are 2305 The adaptive filtering function is an option. specified correctly. sv027:SSF1/aflt I - 17 1. 1.3 S51 PARAMETER ERROR LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS в€†в€†в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. (parameter No.) A warning appears if a parameter set outside the tolerable range is set. Illegal settings will be ignored. This alarm will be reset when the correct value is set. (Note) Refer to the spindle alarms if the axis name is вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. Details Remedy Check the descriptions for the appropriate 2201 вЂ“ 2264 Servo parameter setting data is illegal. The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameters and correct them. parameter where the warning occurred. The servo warning is displayed. S52 SERVO WARNING 0 0 в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. (Warning No.) (Note) Refer to the spindle alarms вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. Name Detector: Initial 90 communication error Detector: 91 Communication error Detector: Protocol 92 error Initial absolute 93 position fluctuation Scale feedback 96 error Scale offset error 97 9B 9C if the axis name is вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ or Meaning Initial communication with the absolute position linear scale cannot be performed. An error occurred in communication with the detector in the absolute position detector. An error occurred in the data from the detector in the absolute position detector. The absolute position data fluctuated when the power was turned ON so the absolute value counter could not be set. There is an excessive difference in the feedback amount between the motor end detector and the MP scale in the absolute position detector. An error occurred in the offset data to be read during initialization by NC power-ON in the absolute position detector of the MP scale. When using the linear servo system, an error was detected in the magnetic pole shift amount set in sv028. Detector converting unit: Magnetic pole shift warning When using the linear servo system, an error was detected in the Detector magnetic pole data of the MDS-B-HR connected to the MAIN side converting unit: after the Z phase was passed. Magnetic pole warning I - 18 1. 1.3 Alarm No. 9E 9F E0 E1 E3 E4 E6 E8 E9 EA EB Name Absolute position detector: Revolution counter error Battery voltage drop Over regeneration warning Overload warning Absolute position counter warning Set parameter warning Control axis detachment warning Excessive supplementary regeneration frequency Instantaneous power interruption warning In external emergency stop state Over regeneration warning LIST OF ALARMS SERVO ALARMS Meaning An error occurred in the rotation counter in the detector. An error occurred in the rotation counter in OSE104/OSA104/OSE105/OSA105/OSE104-ET/OSA104-ET/OSE1 05-ET/OSA105-ET. The absolute position cannot be corrected. The voltage of the battery supplying to the absolute value detector dropped. An 80% level of the regeneration alarm was detected. (The regeneration alarm may occur if operation is continued.) An 80% level of the overload 1 alarm was detected. This is not an alarm so the servo will not turn OFFвЂљ but if operation is continuedвЂљ overload 1 alarm may occur. There is a difference between absolute and relative position data. A parameter setting exceeding the setting range was set. A control axis removal command has been issued. (Status display) The auxiliary regeneration cycle was too high in the power supply unit. (Alarm вЂњoвЂќ from the power supply unit) A momentary power interrupt of 25 to 50 ms occurred. (Alarm вЂњpвЂќ from the power supply unit.) The power supply enters an emergency stop state by receiving the stop signal from the NC. (Alarm вЂњqвЂќ from the power supply unit) An excessive-regeneration alarm was generated from the power supply unit. (Alarm вЂњrвЂќ from the power supply unit.) I - 19 1. 1.4 LIST OF ALARMS SPINDLE ALARMS 1.4 SPINDLE ALARMS These alarms describe errors in the spindle system such as the spindle amplifierвЂљ motor and encoder. The alarm message, alarm number, and axis name (S: 1st spindle, T: 2nd spindle, M: 3rd spindle, N: 4th spindle) will display on the alarm message screen. If several alarms have occurred, the number of the alarm that occurred last and the other alarm numbers will display on the spindle monitor screen for confirmation. If an axis name other than вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ and вЂњNвЂќ is displayed, the alarm is a servo alarm. Refer to the section вЂњServo alarmsвЂќ. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) S SERVO ALARM : Г—Г— 0 0 в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. Alarm reset class Alarm class (Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset class combinations are preset. (Refer to the separate table for S02, S51 and S52.) Alarm class S01 Alarm reset class PR S03 NR S04 AR Resetting methods After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the NC power ON again. After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by inputting the NC RESET key. After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm by turning the servo drive unit power ON again. (Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class. For example, even if вЂњS03 Servo error: NRвЂќ is displayed, it may be necessary to turn the NC power ON again. (Note 3) Refer to the servo alarms if the axis name is other than вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ and вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. 12 13 16 17 20 Name Memory error 1 Software processing error 1 Magnetic pole position detection error Meaning A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the ROM of the spindle driveвЂ™s control card. The S/W process did not end within the specified time. The start signal was input before the Z-phase of the magnetic pole position was automatically adjusted. Or, the number of initial magnetic pole estimation retry times (10 times or more) was exceeded. (After replacing the spindle amplifier, set parameter (SP205: ZCHS) to 1 from 0, carry out Z phase automatic adjustment, and then turn the power ON again.) A/D converter error The AD converter for current detection did not function normally during initialization. A signal was not input from the PLGвЂљ or was not at a normal level. Motor side detector: No signal 1 I - 20 1. 1.4 Alarm No. 21 Name Machine side detector: No signal 2 Excessive speed error 1 LIST OF ALARMS SPINDLE ALARMS Meaning A signal was not input from the spindle encoder (for orientвЂљ C axis)вЂљ or was not at a normal level. 30 Over regeneration The command speed and motor speed difference was above the specified valueвЂљ and the state continued for the specified time. This may also occur when the coil changeover contactor is not the specified contactor. Overheating was detected in the regenerative resistor. 31 Overspeed The motor speed exceeded 115% of the set max. speed. 32 Power module overcurrent 33 Overvoltage 34 A current exceeding the specified value flowed to the spindle driveвЂ™s main circuit. This may also occur when the coil changeover contactor is not the specified contactor. The bus voltage in the driver exceeded 400V. This may also occur when the coil changeover contactor is not the specified contactor. A CRC error occurred in the communication data from the controller. NC-DRV communication: CRC error NC command error The movement command data from the controller is abnormally high during position control. NC-DRV The periodic data transmission from the controller was stopped. communication: Communication error Initial parameter The servo parameter sent from the controller during initialization of the error driver was illegal. NC-DRV There was a protocol error in the communication with the controller. communication: (Frame error) Protocol error 1 NC-DRV There was a protocol error in the communication with the controller. communication: (Information error) Protocol error 2 Overcurrent The command current reached the spindle drive's maximum output current and continued for one second or more. Power module An overheat in the IPM used for the driverвЂ™s main circuit was detected. overheat Spindle motor A state in which the motor speed did not reach 45r/min or more even locked when the maximum torque command value reached the time set in the parameter SP239 (3 seconds when set to 0) was detected. Spindle speed 1. A state in which the motor was continuously accelerated even overrun when the speed feedback exceeded 112.5% (detection speed) of the commanded speed was detected. (Note that if a speed less than the parameter SP237 (1000r/min when set to 0) setting is commanded, the detection speed will be the speed command value + SP237в€—1.125.) 2. Motor rotation exceeding the value set with parameter SP206 (when set to 0: 10 deg.) was detected even though the speed command was 0 (including when stopped during position control). 23 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3D 3E I - 21 1. 1.4 Alarm No. 3F 40 41 42 43 44 46 4E 50 51 52 5C LIST OF ALARMS SPINDLE ALARMS Name Excessive speed error 2 Meaning The state in which the speed range set by parameter SP238 (30% when set to 0) was exceeded while rotating at a constant speed with speed control exceeded the time set in parameter SP239 (3 seconds when set to 0). Detector selection The procedure for changing the signal during use of the TK unit is unit switching error wrong. Detector selection Communication with the TK unit during use of the TK unit was incorrect. unit communication error Feedback error 1 1. A PLG error was detected during PLG automatic compensation. 2. The correct Z phase was not detected even when the motor rotated several times during Z phase automatic adjustment. 3. An abnormal number of feedback pulses was continuously detected during normal operation. Feedback error 2 A deviation occurred in the feedback from the spindle encoder and motor built-in encoder. When using the coil changeover motor, the C axis mode was entered Inappropriate when the H coil or M coil was selected. winding selected for C axis Motor overheat The motor overheated and the thermal protector functioned during an overload or when the motor cooling blower stopped. NC command The spindle control mode was selected several times. mode error (If the input was unexpected, the mode will return to the speed control mode, and an alarm will occur.) Overload 1 The time that the motor current exceeded the overload detection level exceeds the detection time constant. Overload 2 The motor output reached the overload level set with the overload detection level and detection time constant. Excessive error 1 The position tracking error exceeded the specified value during position loop operation. Orientation When orientation was completed, the error between the command feedback error and feedback exceeded the value set in the parameters. If the number of orientation retry times parameter SP118 is set, вЂњS52 SERVO WARNING 00A9вЂќ will occur, and then this alarm will occur. (An alarm will occur if the error exceeds SP114: OPER. This cannot be detected when using magnetic sensor orientation, so set SP114 to 0.) I - 22 1. 1.4 Alarm No. 5D Name Speed monitoring: Input mismatch 5E Speed monitoring: Feedback speed error Power supply alarm 61 вЂ“ 6F 88 Watchdog LIST OF ALARMS SPINDLE ALARMS Meaning This occurs if the door state of the вЂњDI input (CN9 10-20)вЂќ and the вЂњdata input (control input 4-bit D)вЂќ signal from the NC do not match. (Occurs if the state does not match for three seconds.) This occurs if the door is opened when the spindle speed is higher than the speed set in parameter SP223: SPDV. The codes 60 to 6F are power supply alarms. The power supply alarms will be displayed as alarms of the axis to which the power supply is connected. Refer to the section вЂњServo alarmsвЂќ for details. 88 is the watch dog alarm. Refer to the section вЂњServo alarmsвЂќ for details. S02 INIT PARAM ERR в€†в€†в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. (parameter No.) An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the controller to the spindle amplifier when the power was turned ON. Remove the cause of the alarm, and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once. (Note) Refer to the servo alarms if the axis name is other than вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ and вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. Details Remedy вЂў Confirm the spindle parameter for the No. 3201 вЂ“ 3584 Parameter error displayed as an error. A parameter value not within the tolerable range was set. The alarm No. is Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance ManualвЂ™s the No. of the spindle parameter where Alarm No. 37. the error occurred. S51 PARAMETER ERROR в€†в€†в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. (parameter No.) A warning appears if a parameter set outside the tolerable range is set. Illegal settings will be ignored. This alarm will be reset when the correct value is set. (Note) Refer to the servo alarms if the axis name is other than вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ and вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. 3201 вЂ“ 3584 Details Parameter warning A parameter value not within the tolerable range was set. The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle where the warning occurred. I - 23 Remedy вЂў Confirm the details of the spindle parameter for which the No. is displayed. 1. 1.4 S52 SERVO WARNING LIST OF ALARMS SPINDLE ALARMS The spindle warning is displayed. 0 0 в€†в€† Axis name Alarm No. (Warning No.) (Note) Refer to the servo alarms if the axis name is other than вЂњSвЂќ, вЂњTвЂќ, вЂњMвЂќ and вЂњNвЂќ. Alarm No. A9 E0 E1 E4 Details Orientation feedback warning The system is retrying when an orientation feedback error occurs. (When SP118: ORCT is set to 0, an alarm (5C) will occur instead of the warning.) Over regeneration warning A level of 80% of the excessiveregeneration alarm was detected (continuing the operation may cause the excessive-regeneration alarm). Overload warning The time that the motor current exceeded the overload detection level was 80% or more of the detection time constant. Set parameter warning A parameter exceeding the setting range was set. The illegal parameter will be ignoredвЂљ and the value before the illegal parameter setting will be retained. I - 24 Remedy Check the speed detector or encoder shield treatment, and for wire breakage. Check the phase of the A, B and Z phases. (Adjust the waveform) Refer to the Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual. Refer to the Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual. Confirm the spindle parameter. 1. 1.5 LIST OF ALARMS MCP ALARM 1.5 MCP ALARM An error has occurred in the drive amplifier and other interfaces. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) Y02 SYSTEM ALARM Error No. 0050 0051 An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and amplifier after the power was turned ON. Details Remedy Background error The software or hardware may be damaged. Contact the service center. 0000 CRC error A communication error has occurred between the controller and amplifier. (10 times/910.2 ms) 0001 CRC error (2 continuous times) вЂў Take measures against noise. вЂў Check that the communication cable 0002 Reception timing error connector between the controller and (2 continuous times) amplifier and one between the amplifiers are Data ID error Г—Г—03 tight. (2 continuous times) вЂў Check whether the communication cable Г—Г—: Axis No. between the controller and amplifier and one between the amplifiers are No. of reception frames error Г—Г—04 disconnected. (2 continuous times) вЂў A driving amplifier may be faulty. Take a Г—Г—: Axis No. note of the 7-segment LED contents of each driving amplifier and report to the Service Center. Check the amplifier mounting state. вЂў Check the end of the cable wiring. вЂў Check the cable for broken wires. The amplifier is not correctly вЂў Check the connector insertion. connected вЂў The amplifier input power is not being input. вЂў The amplifier axis No. switch is illegal. Error No. Details Servo axis amplifier not mounted Alphabet (axis name) PLC axis amplifier not mounted 1вЂ“4 Spindle axis not mounted S Y03 AMP. UNEQUIPPED Y05 INIT PARAM ERR в†‘ : Error parameter number Details Remedy There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes. Check the value set for the corresponding parameters. #1001 SYS_ON #1002 axisno #1039 spinno I - 25 1. 1.5 LIST OF ALARMS MCP ALARM Y06 mcp_no ERROR Error No. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 There are differences in the MCP and axis parameters when the NC power is turned ON. Details Remedy There is a skipped number in the channels. Check the values set for the following parameters. The random layout setting is duplicated. #1021 mcp_no The amplifier fixed setting вЂњ0000вЂќ and #3031 smcp_no random layout setting вЂњв€—в€—в€—в€—вЂќ are both set. #3032 mbmcp_no The spindle/C axis вЂњ#3031 mcp_noвЂќ and вЂњ#3032 smcp_noвЂќ are set to the same values. A random layout is set for the вЂњ#1154 pdoorвЂќ =1 two-system. The channel No. parameter is not within the setting range. An error occurred in a parameter that causes an alarm while the control axis was operating. Details Remedy вЂў Check вЂњ#2004 G0tLвЂќ. LN FEED ABNL (Linear feed abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. вЂў Check вЂњ#2007 G1tLвЂќ. CT FEED ABNL (Cutting feed abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. DLY F-F ABNL (Delayed fast feed abnormal) вЂў Check вЂњ#2005 G0t1вЂќ. The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. вЂў Check вЂњ#2008 G1t1вЂќ. DLY CUTG ABNL (Delayed cutting feed abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. GRID SPACE ERROR вЂў Check вЂњ#2029 grspcвЂќ. вЂў Check spindle parameters #3017 stapt1 to SYNCHRONOUS TAP CYCLE #3020 stapt4. ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIME CONSTANT ERROR The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. вЂў Check вЂњ#2102 skip_tLвЂќ. LN SKIP ABNL (Linear skip abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. вЂў Check вЂњ#2103 skip_t1вЂќ. DLY SKIP ABNL (Delayed skip abnormal) The time constant has not been set or the setting exceeded the setting range. ROTARY AXIS GEAR RATIO EXCESSIVE вЂў Check вЂњ#2201 PC1вЂќ and вЂњ#2202 PC2вЂќ. (ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION) Y51 PARAMETER ERROR Error No. 1 2 3 4 9 12 15 16 101 I - 26 1. 1.5 LIST OF ALARMS MCP ALARM Y90 SP. NON SIGNAL (Alarm No.) 0 0 Alarm No. 0 Z open phase Г— Г— 2 3 4 5 6 7 A open phase Г— 1 Spindle Alarm No. 0001 вЂ“ 0007 B open phase Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Details Remedy вЂў Check the spindle encoderвЂ™s feedback There is an error in the spindle encoder cable and the encoder. signal. The data transmission to the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier is stopped when this error occurs. I - 27 1. 1.6 LIST OF ALARMS SYSTEM ALARMS 1.6 SYSTEM ALARMS The following messages are displayed with the register at the time when the error occurred if the system stops due to a system error. Message Parity error Bus error Zero divide Details RAM error A non-existing memory was accessed. The division with a 0 denominator was attempted. Watch dog The software process is not functioning error correctly. Illegal The alarm was caused by an illegal exception software function not listed above. Address error An illegal memory was accessed. Illegal The software process is not functioning instruction correctly. Stack overflow Remedy вЂў Write down the displayed registerвЂљ and contact the service center. Z31 DATA SERVER ERROR в†‘ Warning No. Warning No. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 000A Explanation Socket open error (socket) Socket bind error (bind) Connection wait queue error (listen) Connection request acceptance error (accept) Data receive error (socket error) Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection) Data send error (socket error) Data send error (data shortage or disconnection) Socket close error (close) Note: If warning No. 0001, 0002, 0003, or 000A is displayed, set the parameters, then turn power OFF and turn it ON again. Message Z40 FORMAT NOT MET Details Remedy This appears when the parameter MemVal вЂў Either return the MemVal setting, or format is formatted at 0, and MemVal is set to 1. and restart. I - 28 1. 1.6 LIST OF ALARMS SYSTEM ALARMS The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen. Message Z51 EE ROM ERROR 000x Details Remedy This occurs when the parameters were not correctly written into the EEROM. вЂў If the same alarm is output by the same operation, the cause is an H/W fault. Contact the Service Center. <Type> Z51 ROM error 0001: Open error Z51 ROM error 0002: Erase error Z51 ROM error 0003: Write error Z51 ROM error 0004: Verify error вЂў Reformat the area. Z52 BATTERY FAULT The voltage of the battery inserted in вЂў Replace the battery of the NC control unit. the NC control unit has dropped. (The вЂў After treating the batteryвЂљ check the battery used to save the internal data) machining programвЂљ Z53 TEMP. OVER вЂў Cooling measures are required. The controller or operation board Turn OFF the controller powerвЂљ or lower temperature has risen above the the temperature with a coolerвЂљ etc. designated value. (Note 1) Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT This occurs when an error occurs in the communication between the controller and remote l/O unit. вЂў Cable breakage вЂў Remote l/O unit fault вЂў Check and replace the cables. вЂў Replace the remote I/O unit. вЂў Check the power supply. (existence of supplyвЂљ voltage) вЂў Power supply to remote l/O unit fault (Note 2) The program memory capacity setting Check the state of the following items. value cannot be formatted. вЂў Program memory capacity Z57 SYSTEM WARNING Z59 вЂў Increase the value specified as the #1206 Acceleration and deceleration time TIME G1bF parameter. constants are too large. CONSTANT (This alarm is output at the same time вЂў Decrease the value specified as the #1207 G1btL parameter. as вЂњT02 FEED HOLD 0206.вЂќ) вЂў Lower the feedrate. I - 29 1. 1.6 LIST OF ALARMS SYSTEM ALARMS CAUTION If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery. Do not replace the battery while the power is ON. Do not short circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery. Dispose of the spent battery following local laws. Note 1: Temperature warning If the alarm is displayed when an overheat alarm is detectedвЂљ the overheat signal will be output simultaneously. If the machine is in automatic operationвЂљ the operation will be continuedвЂљ but restarting will not be possible after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible after block stop or feed hold.) The alarm will be reset and the overheat signal will turn OFF when the temperature drops below the specified temperature. Z53 TEMP. OVER 000x в†‘ 0001 : The temperature in the controller is high. 0002 : The temperature around the communication terminal (setting and display unit) is high. 0003 : The temperature in the controller and around the communication terminal (setting and display unit) is high. The ambient temperature must be lowered immediately when a вЂњZ53 TEMP.OVERвЂќ alarm occursвЂљ but if machining must be continuedвЂљ the alarm can be invalidated by turning the following parameter OFF. 76543210 PLC parameter bit selection #6449 Communication terminal (setting and display unit) Controller I - 30 0: Detection invalid 1: Detection valid 1. 1.6 LIST OF ALARMS SYSTEM ALARMS Note 2: RIO communication interrupt If communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit fails, the alarm and remote I/O unit number are displayed. (a)(b) в†“в†“ Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT Board connection remote I/O communication interrupted station 00 Remote I/O 1st system communication interrupted station (a) and (b) above indicate the following matters. Alarm number RIO (seventh station) RIO (sixth station) RIO (fifth station) RIO (fourth station) 0 Г— Г— Г— 2 3 Г— Г— Г— Г— 4 5 6 7 9 A B C D E F RIO (third station) RIO (second station) RIO (first station) RIO (0th station) 0 1 8 Alarm number Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— 2 Г— 3 Г— Г— Г— Г— 4 Г— Г— Г— 5 6 Г— 7 8 Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— 1 9 A Г— B C Г— Г— Г— D E Г— F Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— Г— This applies for both the remote I/O 1st system communication interrupted station and board connection remote I/O communication interrupted station. I - 31 1.7 1. LIST OF ALARMS ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS 1.7 ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL This error is displayed if the absolute position data is lost in the absolute position detection system. Alarm reset Zero point when Servo Remedy initialization power is alarm No. turned OFF Complete zero point Required в€’ в€’ initialization. (Error No.) (Axis name) Error No. Details 0001 Zero point initialization is incomplete. Otherwise, the spindle was removed. The absolute position reference point data saved in the NC has been destroyed. 0002 0003 0004 0005 0080 0101 0106 Note: Input the parameters. If the reference point data cannot be restoredвЂљ perform zero point initialization. The parameters used to detect Correctly set the parameters. Turn the the absolute position have power on againвЂљ and been changed. perform zero point initialization. #1003 iunit #2201 PC1 #1016 iout #2202 PC2 #1017 rot #2218 PIT #1018 ccw #2219 RNG1 #1040 M_inch #2220 RNG2 #2049 type #2225 MTYP The zero point initialization Reperform zero point point is not at the grid position. initialization. Restoration was possible with Turn the power on parameter input in the above againвЂљ and operation will be possible. No.0002 state. The absolute value data was Replace the detector lost, because the multi-rotation and complete zero point initialization. counter data in the detector was incorrect, etc. Reperform zero point The power was turned ON again after the servo alarm No. initialization. 25 displayed. Reperform zero point The power was turned ON again after the servo alarm No. initialization. E3 displayed. (Required) в€’ в€’ Required в€’ в€’ Required в€’ в€’ Not required в€’ в€’ Required в€’ (9E) etc. Required в€’ (25) Required в€’ (E3) To release alarm вЂњZ70 ABS. ILLEGALвЂќ, enter the parameter data output when establishing the absolute position and turn ON the power again. For the rotation axis, however, the alarm cannot be released by entering the parameter data. I - 32 1. LIST OF ALARMS ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS 1.7 Z71 DETECTOR ERROR (Error No.) (Axis name) Error No. 0001 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Details Remedy The backup voltage in the Replace the batteryвЂљ absolute position detector check the cable connectionsвЂљ and dropped. check the detector. Turn the power ON againвЂљ and perform zero point initialization. Communication with the Check and replace the absolute position detector cablesвЂљ card or detector. Turn the was not possible. power ON againвЂљ and perform zero point initialization. Check and replace the The absolute position cablesвЂљ card or data fluctuated when establishing the absolute detector. Turn the power ON againвЂљ and position. perform zero point initialization. An error was found in the Check and replace the cablesвЂљ card or serial data from the detector. Turn the absolute position power ON againвЂљ and detector. perform zero point initialization. Operation is possible Servo alarm E3 Absolute position counter until the power is turned off. warning This alarm is displayed if an error is found in the detector for the absolute position detection system. Alarm reset Zero point when Servo initialization power is alarm No. turned OFF 25 Required в€’ (Z70-0101 displays after power is turned ON again.) (Required) Only when detector is replaced. Reset 91 (Required) Only when detector is replaced. Reset 93 (Required) Only when detector is replaced. Reset 92 Reset (Required) When power is turned ON (Z70-0106 displays again. after power is turned ON again.) Reset Initial communication with Check and replace the (Required) Only when detector is cablesвЂљ card or the absolute position replaced. detector. Turn the detector was not power ON againвЂљ and possible. perform zero point initialization. I - 33 E3 18 1.7 Z72 COMPARE ERROR Alarm No. 1. LIST OF ALARMS ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM ALARMS This alarm is displayed if an error is detected when (Alarm No.) (Axis name) comparing the detectorвЂ™s absolute position and controller coordinate values in the absolute position system. Details Remedy This displays a warning in the absolute position (Warning No.) (Axis name) detection system. Details Remedy Servo alarm 9F The battery voltage dropped or a cable is Battery voltage drop broken. Absolute position initialization is not required. Z73 ABS. WARNING Alarm No. 0001 I - 34 1.8 1. LIST OF ALARMS MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP 1.8 MESSAGES DURING EMERGENCY STOP EMG EMERGENCY в€—в€—в€—в€— Error items Refer to the explanations for details. Error No. PLC Details The user PLC has entered the emergency stop state during the sequence process. вЂў EXIN The emergency stop input signal is significant (open). вЂў вЂў SRV An alarm occurred in the servo system causing an emergency stop. вЂў STOP The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not running. вЂў вЂў SPIN Spindle amplifier not mounted The spindle amplifier is not mounted. вЂў вЂў PC_H High-speed PC processing abnormal вЂў PARA Setting of the door open II fixed device is illegal. The dog signal random assignment parameter setting is illegal. вЂў вЂў LAD The user PLC (ladder sequence) has an illegal code. I - 35 вЂў Remedy Investigate and remove the cause of the user PLC emergency stop. Cancel the emergency stop input signal. Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken. Investigate and remove the cause of the servo alarm. Check if the rotary switch CS2 on the top of the controller front panel is set to 1. Check if the PLC edit file save screen (onboard function) [4RUN/SP] (run/stop) switch is turned ON. Cancel the causes of the other emergency stop. Check emergency stop signal input in the spindle amplifier. Check the sequence program. (To stop monitoring the high-speed PC processing temporarily, set 1 in #1219 aux03 bit1. Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure.) Specify the #1155 DOOR_m and #1156 DOOR_s parameters correctly. (When the door open II fixed device is not used, set #1155 DOOR_m and #1156 DOOR_s to 100.) Correctly set the #2073 zrn_dog, #2074 H/W_OT+, #2075 H/W_OT-and #1226 aux 10 bit 5 parameters. Check the user PLC (ladder sequence) to see if it uses illegal device numbers or constants. 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS 1.9 AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS Display example S01 AUX SERVO ALM Axis No. 1 Alarm information (Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information) (1) S01 AUX SERVO ALM Alarm information Details Remedy 0011 PCB error 1 An error occurred in the amplifier's internal PCB. 0013 Software An error occurred in the processing amplifier's internal reference timeout, clock error clock. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. 0016 Motor type, Motor type error detector type error вЂў Use a correct amplifier and motor combination. Detector initial communication error. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. вЂў Connect correctly. вЂў Replace the motor. вЂў Replace or repair cable. Detector CPU error вЂў Replace the motor (detector). 0017 PCB error (A/D conversion initial error) An error occurred in the вЂў Replace servo amplifier. amplifier's internal A/D converter. 0025 Absolute position lost An error occurred in the detector's internal absolute position data. вЂў Turn the power ON for 2 to 3 minutes while the alarm is occurring, and then turn the power ON again. вЂў Replace the battery, and initialize the absolute position again. 0034 CRC error An error occurred in the communication with the NC. вЂў Take countermeasures against noise. 0036 Communication timeout, NC down Communication with the NC was вЂў Connect correctly. cut off. вЂў Turn the NC power ON. вЂў Replace the amplifier or NC. 0037 Parameter error (Regenerative resistance error) The parameter setting value is incorrect. вЂў Set the parameter correctly. 0038 Frame error An error occurred in the communication with the NC. вЂў Take countermeasures against noise. 0039 INFO error Undefined data was transferred from the NC. вЂў Change the NC software version to a compatible version. I - 36 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS (2) S02 AUX SERVO ALM Alarm information Details Remedy 0011 PCB error 1 An error occurred in the (drive circuit error) amplifier's internal PCB. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. 0013 Software An error occurred in the processing amplifier's internal reference timeout, clock error clock. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. 0015 EEROM error A write error occurred to the EEROM in the amplifier. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. 0017 PCB error (A/D conversion error) An error occurred in the вЂў Replace servo amplifier. amplifier's internal A/D converter. 0018 PCB error (LSI error) An error occurred in the amplifier's internal LSI. вЂў Replace servo amplifier. 0020 Detector error An error occurred in the communication between the servo amplifier and detector. вЂў Connect correctly. A ground fault of the output was detected when the power was turned ON. вЂў Repair the ground fault section. 0024 Ground fault detection вЂў Replace or repair cable. вЂў Replace the cable or motor. (3) S03 AUX SERVO ALM Alarm information 0010 0030 Details Undervoltage Remedy The power voltage is 160V or less. вЂў Review the power supply. вЂў Replace the servo amplifier. Regeneration error The tolerable regeneration power вЂў Set the parameter #002 correctly. of the internal regenerative вЂў Connect correctly. resistor or external regenerative вЂў Lower the positioning frequency. option was exceeded. вЂў Change the regenerative option to a larger capacity. вЂў Lower the load. вЂў Review the power supply. 0031 Overspeed Regenerative transistor error вЂў Replace the servo amplifier. The motor's rotation speed exceeded the tolerable momentary speed. вЂў Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time constant. вЂў Review the gear ratio. вЂў Replace the detector. 0032 Overcurrent A current exceeding the servo amplifier's tolerable current flowed. I - 37 вЂў Repair the wiring. вЂў Replace the servo amplifier. вЂў Take countermeasures against noise. 1. 1.9 Alarm information 0033 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS Details Overvoltage Remedy The voltage of the converter in the servo amplifier was 400V or more. вЂў Wire correctly. вЂў Replace the servo amplifier. вЂў For the internal regenerative resistor, replace the amplifier. вЂў For the external regenerative option, replace the regenerative option. 0046 0050 Motor overheating An operation state causing the motor to overheat continued. вЂў Reduce the motor load. Overload 1 вЂў Reduce the motor load. The servo amplifier or servomotor overload protection function activated. вЂў Review the operation pattern. вЂў Review the operation pattern. вЂў Change to a motor or amplifier with large output. вЂў Change the setting of the automatic tuning response characteristics. вЂў Correct the connection. вЂў Replace the servomotor. 0051 Overload 2 The max. output current flowed for several seconds due to a machine collision or overload. вЂў Review the operation pattern. вЂў Change the setting of the automatic tuning response characteristics. вЂў Correct the connection. вЂў Replace the servomotor. 0052 Excessive error A position deflection exceeding the excessive error detection setting value occurred. вЂў Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time constant. вЂў Increase the torque limit value. вЂў Review the power facility capacity. вЂў Review the operation pattern. вЂў Replace the servomotor. вЂў Connect correctly. вЂў Repair or replace the cable. I - 38 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS (4) S52 AUX SERVO WRN Alarm information Details Remedy 0092 Battery voltage drop The absolute position detection battery voltage dropped. вЂў Mount a battery. вЂў Replace the battery and initialize the absolute position. 00E0 вЂў Lower the positioning frequency. Over-regeneration The regeneration power may warning have exceeded the tolerable вЂў Change the regenerative option range of the built-in regenerative to a larger one. resistor or external regenerative вЂў Lower the load. option. 00E1 Overload warning The overload alarm 1 could occur. вЂў Refer to the items for S03 0050. 00E3 Absolute position counter warning There is an error in the absolute position detector internal data. вЂў Take countermeasures against noise. вЂў Replace the servomotor. 00E9 Main circuit OFF warning вЂў Turn ON the main circuit power. The servo ON signal was input while the main circuit power was OFF. The contactor operation is faulty. (5) Z70 AUX POS. ERR Alarm information Details Cause Remedy вЂў Initialize the zero point (reference point). 0001 Zero point initialization incomplete The zero point (reference point) has not been initialized in the absolute position system. 0002 Absolute position data lost The absolute position coordinate вЂў Initialize the zero point (reference point). data in the amplifier has been lost. 0003 Absolute position system related parameter error The absolute position system related parameters have been changed or lost. вЂў Correctly set the parameters and then initialize the zero point (reference point). (6) Z71 AUX DETEC. ERR Alarm information 0001 Details Absolute position memory battery voltage drop Cause Remedy The data in the detector has been вЂў Check the battery and detector cable and then initialize the zero lost. point (reference point). Battery voltage drop. Detector cable wire breakage or looseness. I - 39 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS (7) Z73 AUX SYSTEM WRN Alarm information Details Cause Remedy 0001 Absolute position memory battery voltage warning Battery voltage drop. Detector cable wire breakage or looseness. вЂў Check the battery and detector cable. The zero point does not need to be initialized. 0003 Absolute position counter warning An error occurred in the detector's absolute position counter. вЂў Replace the detector. (8) M00 AUX OPER. ALM Alarm information Details Cause Remedy 0001 Near-point dog length insufficient вЂў Lower the zero point return speed When executing dog-type or increase the dog length. reference point, the zero point return speed is too fast or the dog length is too short. 0003 Reference point return direction illegal When executing reference point вЂў Move the axis in the correct return, the axis was moved in the direction. opposite of the designated direction. 0004 External interlock The axis interlock function is valid. вЂў Cancel the interlock signal 0005 Internal interlock An interlock was established by the servo OFF function. вЂў Cancel the servo OFF. 0007 Soft limit The soft limit was reached. вЂў Check the soft limit setting and machine position 0024 Reference point return was In absolute executed during an absolute position alarm. position alarm. Reference point return not possible. вЂў Initialize the absolute position reference point and then fix the absolute position coordinates. 0025 Reference point return was In initializing absolute position. executed while initializing the absolute position. Reference point return not possible. вЂў Initialize the absolute position reference point and then fix the absolute position coordinates. I - 40 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS (9) M01 AUX OPER. ALM Alarm information Details Cause Remedy 0001 No operation mode The operation mode is not designated, or the operation mode was changed during axis movement. вЂў Correctly designate the operation mode. 0003 Feedrate 0 вЂў Set a value other than zero in the feedrate setting or override value. 0060 A station No. exceeding the No. Station No. designation illegal. of indexed divisions was designated. Starting not possible. 0061 Reference point return incomplete. Starting not possible. Automatic/manual operation was вЂў Execute the reference point return. started before reference point return was executed with the incremental system. 0062 In initializing reference point. Starting not possible. The start signal was input while initializing the absolute position reference point. 0063 In absolute position alarm. Starting not possible. The start signal was input during вЂў Initialize the absolute position an absolute position alarm. reference point and then fix the absolute position coordinates. 0064 In random positioning mode. Manual operation not possible. The manual operation mode was вЂў Turn the random positioning mode OFF before switching to started during the random the manual operation mode. positioning mode. 0065 Uneven indexing station No. illegal. Starting not possible. The commanded station No. was вЂў Check the commanded station No. higher than 8 during uneven indexing. The operation parameter's feedrate setting is zero. The operation parameter feedrate setting is zero. Or, the override is valid, and the override value is zero. I - 41 вЂў Correctly designate the station No. вЂў Complete the absolute position reference point initialization. 1. 1.9 LIST OF ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS ALARMS AUXILIARY AXIS MCP ALARMS Y02 AUX SYSTEM ALM Error No. 0050 0051 An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and auxiliary axis amplifier after the power was turned ON. Details Remedy Background error 0000 0001 The software or hardware may be damaged. Contact the service center. CRC error (10 times/910.2ms) CRC error (2 continuous times) 0002 Reception timing error (2 continuous times) Г—Г—03 Data ID error (2 continuous times) Г—Г—: Axis No. Г—Г—04 No. of reception frames error (2 continuous times) Г—Г—: Axis No. Y03 AUX AMP UNEQU. A communication error has occurred between the controller and amplifier. вЂў Take measures against noise. вЂў Check that the communication cable connector between the controller and amplifier and one between the amplifiers are tight. вЂў Check whether the communication cable between the controller and amplifier and one between the amplifiers are disconnected. вЂў A driving amplifier may be faulty. Take a note of the 7-segment LED contents of each driving amplifier and report to the Service Center. Check the auxiliary axis amplifier mounting state. вЂў Check the end of the cable wiring. The amplifier is not correctly connected. вЂў Check the cable for broken wires. вЂў Check the connector insertion. The auxiliary axis amplifier input power is not being input. The auxiliary axis amplifier axis No. switch is illegal. Error No. Axis No.1 Details bit correspondence (bit 0 : 1st axis) I - 42 1. 1.10 LIST OF ALARMS USER PLC ALARMS 1.10 USER PLC ALARMS Sub-status Message 1 2 Details Remedy Download the ladder of the format selected with the PLC environment selection parameters (bit selection #51/bit 4). U01 No PLC вЂ“ вЂ“ The ladder is not a GPPW ladder or PLC4B ladder. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will be applied. U10 Illegal PLC 0x0010 вЂ“ Scan time error Edit the ladder size to a The scan time is 1 second or longer. smaller size. 0x0040 вЂ“ Ladder operation mode illegal A ladder different from the designated mode was downloaded. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will be applied. Download the ladder having the same format as when the power was reset or turned ON. 0x0080 вЂ“ GPPW ladder code error (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will be applied. Download the correct GPPW format ladder. 0x0400 Number of Software illegal interrupt ladder steps The ladder process stopped abnormally due to an illegal software command code. (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will be applied. Turn the power ON again. If the error is not reset, download the correct ladder. 0x1000 вЂ“ Edit the ladder size to a smaller size. 0x800x U50 Stop PLC Number of ladder steps over Number of ladder steps exceeded limit value. Software exceptional interrupt Number of ladder steps The ladder process stopped abnormally due to a bus error, etc. bit 0: BIN command operation error bit 1: BCD command operation error Refer to the methods for using the BCD and BIN function commands. bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET command error bit7: IRET command execution error (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) is applied for bit 6/7. Turn the power ON again. If the error is not reset, download the correct ladder. The ladder is stopped. Start the ladder. (Note) The number of ladder steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of error occurrence steps because of the ladder timing. Use this as a guideline of the occurrence place. I - 43 2. 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT If a setting operation error occurs on any setting and display unit screenвЂљ the error No. EOO and a message describing the details of the error will display in the line above the data setting area or the menu display area. 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS в€†: Message requiring resetting and restarting Г—: Message requiring restarting after canceling error conditions (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) Error No. Error message Details E01 SETTING ERROR в€† E02 DATA OVER в€† вЂў The setting data is incorrect. An alphabetic character was set when only number can be setвЂљ etc. вЂў Data was input without setting number (#). (Word editing) вЂў Even though no retrieval data was set, menu key [ в†“ ] or [ в†‘ ] was pressed. вЂў Even though no data is stored in edit buffers, menu key вЂњReplaceвЂќ was pressed. вЂў One of the following characters was entered as the first character of the retrieval data and edit buffers: 0 to 9, вЂњ. вЂќ, вЂњ вЂќ (space), вЂњ+вЂќ, вЂњв€’вЂќ, вЂњ=вЂќ, вЂњ*вЂќ, вЂњ[ ] вЂќ, and вЂњ " " вЂќ. вЂў When the incremental detection system was used, the parameter (#0 absolute position setting) was set on the absolute position setting screen. вЂў The data input for the standard parameter setting or during execution of formatting is not вЂњYвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ. вЂў A value from 4 to 10 or 21 was specified for #1043 lang. вЂў Even though no language data exists, its output and comparison were attempted. Check the numbers (0253 and 0254) of the language data to be output. вЂў The setting data exceeded the setting range. вЂў The compensation data specification exceeded the range when inputting the tool offset data on tapeвЂљ so that block could not be input. Press the INPUT key again while the input screen is displayedвЂљ and the input will continue from the next block. вЂў When workpiece coordinate offsets are measured, the calculation results given by pressing the CALC key are exceeding the specified range. Correctly specify the tool length or the wear data of cutting edges used for the calculation. вЂў When 23 or more was specified for #1043 lang. I - 44 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E03 No. NOT FOUND в€† E04 DEV. NOT READY Г— E05 NOT ACCEPTABLE Г— E06 NO SPEC Г— E07 RESET END в€† E08 PHYSICAL ERR Г— вЂў The corresponding setting No. (#) was not found. This error occurs if a setting No. not found on the screen was set and inputвЂљ or if a variable No. not found in the specifications was set and input for the common variables. вЂў When the tool length was measured manually, a nonexisting tool wear compensation number was specified and the sensor was turned ON. Specify the R register of the offset number correctly. вЂў The input/output unit power is not ON. вЂў The cable is disconnected. вЂў Setting of the transfer speed (baud rate) does not agree. вЂў The PLC timer cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 1 is set to 1.) вЂў The PLC counter cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 0 is set to 1.) вЂў The tool registration data setting is prohibited. (When special relay SM71 is valid by the PLC.) вЂў Setting from the tool life management screen is prohibited. вЂў Absolute position setting screenвЂ™s #1 вЂњORIGINвЂќ and #2 вЂњZEROвЂќ cannot be set when #0 вЂњINIT SETвЂќ is invalid. вЂў The total of axes set in #1001 SYS_ONвЂљ #1002 axisno is illegal. Set so that the total No. of axes is within the specifications range for the target model. вЂў #1037 cmdtyp is not within the setting range. вЂў The INPUT key was pressed to perform search for the program that is in background edit status on the word edit screen. вЂў The menu keys (Replace and Insert) on the word edit screen were manipulated when a running program is displayed (PDISP signal: ON). вЂў An attempt was made to set MDI data in an MDI setting lock state (the MDI setting lock parameter is specified with 0 and a non-MDI mode is valid). вЂў Language data in display selection status was entered. Change the display selection status once before entering the data. (#1043 lang) вЂў When the manual value command protection (#1228 aux12/bit7) function is valid, the first monitor screen was manipulated by manual command operation (M, S, and T keys). вЂў The menu key for a function not in the specifications was pressed. вЂў A parameter not in the specifications was set. вЂў A language that cannot select was selected. (#1043 lang) вЂў The input/output operations were forcibly stopped by resetвЂљ etc. (including EMG). вЂў The input/output parameter setting or input/output unit side setting was incorrect. I - 45 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E09 TIME OUT Г— E10 MEMORY OVER Г— E11 PROG. No. DUPLI в€† E12 FILE ENTRY OVER Г— E13 NB NOT FOUND в€† E14 PROG. NOT FOUND в€† E15 EDIT LOCK B Г— E16 EDIT LOCK C Г— E17 PARITY H ERR Г— E18 PARITY V ERR Г— E20 OVER RUN ERR Г— E21 PROGRAM RUNNING Г— вЂў The input/output unit parameter вЂњ#9116 TIME-OUT SETвЂќ setting was too short. вЂў There is no EOB code in the machining program. вЂў The program cannot be written because the memory capacity is exceeded. вЂў This error occurs when the MDI data setting on the MDI screen exceeds 500 charactersвЂљ or when saving MDlвЂљ editing or making a program on the edit screenвЂљ input on the data input/output screenвЂљ program copyвЂљ etc. вЂў When registering a machining program in the memoryвЂљ a program with the same No. as the designated program No. was found in the memory. Refer to the program file to find a program No. not being usedвЂљ and reset the program No. вЂў This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screen or during creation of a program in the edit screen. вЂў When registering a machining program in the memoryвЂљ the No. of programs determined in the specifications is exceededвЂљ preventing registration. This error occurs during MDI registration in the MDI screenвЂљ creation of a program in the edit screenвЂљ data input in the data input/output screenвЂљ and program copy. вЂў The block with the designated sequence No. or block No. does not exist in the designated program. вЂў The designated program is not found in the memory. вЂў The corresponding program No. was not found with search of tape memory during graphic check. вЂў An operation (editвЂљ input/outputвЂљ etc.) inhibited for machining program B was attempted. вЂў An operation (editвЂљ input/outputвЂљ etc.) inhibited for machining program C was attempted. вЂў A parity H error was detected during data inputвЂљ etc. вЂў Check the paper tape or input device. This error may occur if the paper tape is dirtied with oilвЂљ etc. вЂў A parity V error was detected during data input. вЂў Check the paper tape to see whether the number of characters in the significant information section of a block is odd. вЂў Also check the state (cable wiringвЂљ noise measuresвЂљ etc.) of the connected equipment. вЂў The control method using the DC codesвЂљ etc.вЂљ for the input/output operation is incorrect. вЂў Check the settings of the input/output unit parametersвЂљ and the settings on the input/output unit sideвЂљ and reset if necessary. вЂў Deletion of a machining program was attempted during operation. вЂў Search was attempted during operation. вЂў Change of data such as parameters was attempted during operation. вЂў Start of graphic check was attempted during operation. I - 46 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details CODE CHANGE ERR PLC RUN Г— вЂў There was an illegal code on the paper tape. Г— E25 DATA MEMORY ERR Г— E26 NO CHARACTERS в€† E35 Г— E40 COMPARE ERROR OP MODE ERROR вЂў Data input/output or comparison was attempted when the PLC was not stopped. вЂў Analog output adjustment was attempted when the PLC was not stopped. вЂў An attempt was made to input or output language data during PLC execution. (Measures) Stop the PLC. вЂў Set the control unit rotary switch NCSYS to 1. вЂў Set the onboard file screen RUN/STOP setting to 1. вЂў When inputting the tool offset data onto tapeвЂљ an offset type exceeding the specifications range was designatedвЂљ and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screenвЂљ the input will continue from the next block. вЂў The designated character string was not found from the block displayed on the screen to the end of the program when searching with data search in the edit screen. Press the INPUT key againвЂ™ and the search will start at the head of the program. вЂў An inconsistency was found in the paper tape and memory data during comparison. E50 FILE ERR Г— E51 FILE OPEN ERR E52 FILE CLOSE ERR E53 FILE SEEK ERR E54 FILE READ ERR E55 FILE DELETE ERR FILE INSERT ERR E22 E24 E56 Г— вЂў Continuous or step graphic check was not possible because the operation mode was illegal. вЂў If one of these errors occursвЂљ the editing or input/output operations cannot be continued. Contact the Service Center. As for E50вЂљ a classification No. will display at the end of the message. Inform the service center of this No. as well. I - 47 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E60 IOP ERRВ…В… Г— E62 I/O PARAM ERR в€† E64 PROGRAM No. ERR в€† E65 PROG. No. DUPLl в€† E66 NO PROG. NUMBER в€† A classification number is displayed after the message for E60. Refer to the section shown in parenthesesвЂљ and remedy the problem. E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 2 (Port already being used) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 4 (E09 TIME OUT) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 5 (E08 PHYSICAL ERR) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 7 (E07 RESET END) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 10 (E04 DEV. NOT READY) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 15 (E17 PARITY H ERR) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 16 (E18 PARITY V ERR) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 17 (E20 OVER RUN ERR) E60 lOP ERROR вЂ“ 18 (E22 CODE CHANGE ERR) E60 IOP ERROR вЂ“ 20 (framing and H/W errors) вЂў Setting for the bit length is incorrect. (Baud rate, stop bit, and character length) Check the setting of the I/O device system and its parameters and set it again. вЂў Check the situations of the connected devices (cable wiring and noise measures). вЂў Data was input/output or the tape search was executed during the host link. Set 0 in #8109 HOST LINK, and then set 1 again before performing the cycle start. (IOP error -2) вЂў The host link parameter was turned ON during connecting to the Anshin-net. Turn the Anshin-net valid OFF. (IOP error -2) вЂў When #10812 Anshin-net/ Machine builders network system valid is set to 1, the modem connection port of the Anshin-net or machine builders network system is occupied. Perform inputting or outputting using a port other than the modem connection port. (IOP error -2) вЂў When connecting the GX Developer (when the bit selection parameter #6451 bit5 is set to 1), the port 2 of the RS232C communication port is always used. Use a port other than the port 2 of the RS232C communication port. (IOP error -2) вЂў The вЂњEIA codeвЂќ data set for I/O parameter is of an unusable code. вЂў The unusable codes are those used as the EIA standard codes and the even hole codes. вЂў The same No. as the program No. designated for program copy was found in the memory. вЂў During tape inputвЂљ the first character of the machining program block is the program No. address вЂњOвЂќ or вЂњLвЂќ. вЂў During tape inputвЂљ the same No. as the specified program was found in the memory. вЂў During tape inputвЂљ the program No. was not found on the paper tapeвЂљ and a program No. was not designated on the screenвЂ™s data setting area. Set the program No.вЂљ and input again. I - 48 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E69 PROG. CHECK MODE Г— E70 TOOL No. DUPLl в€† E71 TOOL ENTRY OVER Г— E73 CANвЂ™T CALCULATE Г— E74 MENU IMPOSSIBLE Г— E75 TLM ILL. SIGNAL E76 TOOL No. ERROR Г— E77 AXIS No. REF-RET Г— вЂў Search (operation search) was attempted during program check (continuous or step). вЂў Retry search after the program check is completedвЂљ or after resetting the program search вЂў A tool No. already registered was newly registered on the tool life management screen. вЂў Registration of data exceeding the max. No. of registerable tools was attempted on the tool life management screen. вЂў When inputting the tool offset data onto tapeвЂљ a compensation number exceeding the specifications range was specifiedвЂљ and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screenвЂ™ the input will continue from the next block. вЂў The coordinate value of the hole center cannot be obtained. вЂў Reset the measurement point, which must not applied to the following conditions. The measurement A point is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The measurement B is the same as the Y coordinate of the C point. The slope of the line through A and C point is the same as the slope of the line through B and C point. вЂў Press the operation menu вЂњ= InputвЂќ or вЂњ+ inputвЂќ during the tool measurement. вЂў Press the operation menu вЂњ= InputвЂќ or вЂњ+ inputвЂќ during the manual value command mode. вЂў Press the screen selection menu on which вЂњв†“вЂќ is displayed during the tool measurement. вЂў Press the screen selection menu on which вЂњв†“вЂќ is displayed during the manual value command mode. вЂў The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated. вЂў After the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated, the sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement. вЂў The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100Вµm from the final entry start position. вЂў Turn the tool measurement mode signal input OFF, or turn the sensor signal OFF and move the axis in a safe direction. Note) This display will be erased when another screen is opened. The display will not be erased even if the tool measurement mode signal input is turned OFF, or if the axis is moved in a direction away from the sensor. вЂў The offset No. to be used for workpiece coordinate system offset data measurement was invalid. Restart from tool selection. (Correctly specify the R register that contains the offset number.) вЂў Zero point return has not been completed for the axis being measured. Return the axis to the zero point. I - 49 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E78 AX UNMATCH (TLM) Г— E79 NO REF-RTN (TLM) Г— E84 CANвЂ™T IN/OUT Г— E86 INPUT DATA ERR Г— E87 NOT EDIT PROG. Г— E88 CANвЂ™T ADD BLOCK Г— вЂў During movement of two or more axesвЂљ the sensor turned ON and the tool length was measured. Keep off from the sensor and perform the measurement for one axis at a time. вЂў The sensor turned on for an axis that has not completed dog-type reference point returnвЂљ and the tool length was measured. Return the axis to the zero point. вЂў An attempt was made to input a parameter in the setup parameter locked state. Refer to the manual issued by the machine manufacturer. вЂў When inputting the tool offset dataвЂљ the data format was not correctвЂљ so that block could not be input. вЂў If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screenвЂљ the input will continue from the next block. вЂў When data is read from parameter tape, its format is incorrect. вЂў The format of file written to the NC memory is illegal. вЂў Playback edit was executed for a fixed cycle subprogram. Playback edit of a fixed cycle subprogram is not possible. вЂў Playback edit cannot be executed unless the block being edited with playback is displayed to the end (EOB) on the left side of the machining program display area. Press the cursor key в†“ вЂљ and Г— E165 MODE ERROR (PBK) AUX RUNNING E190 FORE EDITING Г— E191 Г— E200 NOT COM. SEARCH ADJUST ERROR E201 UNIT NOT EQUIP Г— E91 Г— Г— display the whole block to the end. ThenвЂљ input the data. вЂў G90 was set when вЂњPB_G90вЂќ was OFF. вЂў G91 was set when вЂњPB_G90вЂќ was ON. вЂў The keys other than Function/Menu/Previous page/Next page were pressed in Auxiliary monitor screen during auxiliary axis operation. вЂў An attempt was made to perform background search for the program that is in foreground search status. (Word editing) вЂў Operation search was attempted in tape mode. вЂў The hardware status canвЂ™t be read correctlyвЂљ so automatic adjustment was not possible. вЂў Check the remote l/O unit. вЂў A Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT occurred. вЂў Adjust manually. вЂў Unit defect (replace unit) вЂў The analog output unit is not mounted. вЂў Confirm the remote l/O unit. вЂў Prepare a unit having analog output. вЂў Check the connection (power and signal wires) вЂў Unit defect (replace unit) I - 50 2. Error No. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.1 OPERATION ERRORS Error message Details E330 BACKUP FROM NG Г— E331 NO EMG STOP Г— E332 Г— E350 RESTORE ERROR TITLE ERROR 1 E351 TITLE ERROR 2 Г— E352 TITLE ERROR 3 Г— E353 TITLE ERROR 4 Г— E354 TITLE ERROR 5 Г— E355 TITLE ERROR 6 Г— Г— вЂў The cassette was in the following state. Un-mounting Outside of regulation Empty data Invalid data вЂў Emergency stop (EMG) was not applied, so could not be operated. вЂў The restore failed. (The error of manufacturing number.) вЂў Data output was performed without inputting title screen customization data beforehand. вЂў The title screen customization data which have been input is not Bitmap File for Windows. вЂў Perform the input after converting the data into Bitmap File for Windows. вЂў The setting of the title screen customization data which have been input is not monochrome bitmap for Bitmap File for Windows. вЂў Perform the input after converting the data into the monochrome setting of Bitmap File for Windows. вЂў The compression setting of the title screen customization data which have been input is not non-compression that applies to the Bitmap File for Windows. вЂў Perform the input after saving the data with another drawing software. вЂў The size of the customized title part is exceeding 640 pixels r 250 pixels. вЂў Perform the input after changing the size to be 640 pixels r 250 pixels. вЂў A communication error occurred during input/output of the bitmap data. вЂў Check the communication cables and parameters. I - 51 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES 2.2 OPERATOR MESSAGES The following messages indicate the status of the setting and display functionsвЂљ and are not operation errors. They are mainly used to show that operation is normalвЂљ and serve as guides for the following operations. There is no classification by numbers. 2.2.1 SEARCH AND OPERATION RELATED Message Message details SEARCH EXECUTION вЂў Search is being executed normally. SEARCH COMPLET вЂў Search was completed normally. I - 52 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES 2.2.2 MDI/EDITING RELATED Message Message details MDI NO SETTING вЂў Only display of MDI data (no execution) MDI SETTING COMPLETE вЂў The MDI data setting has been completed (execution is now possible). MDI ENTRY COMPLETE вЂў The MDI data was saved in the memory with the specified program No. MDI RUNNING вЂў The NC is operating with an MDI programвЂљ and the MDI data cannot be corrected. PUSH KEY SERCH/PROG вЂў Status in which no programs to be edited have been called on the editing screen. To editвЂљ press the SEARCH or PROGRAM edit key. EDITING вЂў The details of a program are being edited on the screen. Press INPUT to write the data in the memory. PROGRAM RUNNING вЂў A machining program to be edited is currently being run with memory operationвЂљ and cannot be edited. DELETE? (Y/N) вЂў Waiting for a key entry (whether to delete the program) in word edit status (when the background search menu is selected) BACK GROUND EDITING вЂў Background edit mode EDIT POSSIBLE вЂў Editing can be performed in foreground edit mode. EDIT IMPOSSIBLE вЂў Editing cannot be performed in foreground edit mode. вЂў This state also occurs during feed hold or fixed cycle mode (single-block stop). WORD SEARCH FIN вЂў The word matching the search data was searched on word editing. I - 53 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES 2.2.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT RELATED Message DATA IN EXECUTION Message details вЂў Data is being read without error from the paper tape. DATA WRITING IN PROGRESS вЂў Data has been entered normally and the input data is being written to the ROM. DATA IN COMPLETE вЂў Data has been stored without error. COMPARE EXECUTION вЂў Comparison is being executed without error. COMPARE COMPLETE вЂў Comparison has completed without error. DATA OUT EXECUTION вЂў Data is being output without error. DATA OUT COMPLETE вЂў Data has been output without error. ERASE EXECUTION вЂў Data is being erased without error. ERASE COMPLETE вЂў Data has been erased without error. COPY EXECUTION вЂў The machining program is being copied without error. COPY COMPLETE вЂў The machining program has been copied without error. CONDENSE EXECUTION вЂў The machining program is being condensed without error. CONDENSE COMPLETE вЂў The machining program has been condensed without error. MERGE EXECUTION вЂў The machining program is being merged without error. MERGE COMPLETE вЂў The machining program has been merged without error. No. CHANGE EXECUTION вЂў The machining program No. is being changed without error. No. CHANGE COMPLETE вЂў The machining program No. has been changed without error. I - 54 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES 2.2.4 S-ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT RELATED Message Message details ADJUST EXECUTION вЂў Analog output adjustment is being executed without error. ADJUST COMPLETE вЂў Analog output adjustment has completed without error. 2.2.5 AUXILIARY AXIS Message Message details CONTINUE Y/N вЂў Type вЂњYвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ to specify whether to perform operation. BACKUP EXECUTION вЂў The auxiliary axis parameters are being backed up in SRAM. BACKUP COMPLETE вЂў The backup of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM has been completed. AUX. WRITING EXEC. вЂў The auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM is being written to MR-J2-CT. WRITE COMPLETE вЂў The writing of the auxiliary axis parameters in SRAM to MR-J2-CT has been completed. ABS POS RESTORED вЂў The absolute position in SRAM has been restored in MR-J2-CT. 2.2.6 PARAMETER BACKUP RELATED Message Message details BACKUP EXEC. Y/N Type вЂњYвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ to specify whether to perform the operation. BACKUP EXECUTION The parameters are being backed up. BACKUP COMPLTE Backup of the parameters has been completed. RESTORE EXEC. Y/N Type вЂњYвЂќ or вЂњNвЂќ to specify whether to perform the operation. RESTORE EXECUTION The parameters are being restored. RESTORE COMPLETE Restoration of the parameters has been completed. I - 55 2. OPERATION MESSAGES ON SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT 2.2 OPERATION MESSAGES 2.2.7 OTHERS Message Message details DATA PROTECTING вЂў The data protection key is validвЂљ and the various data cannot be set or erasedвЂљ etc. BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N) вЂў Waiting for the key input of standard parameter setting (Y/N). BASE PARA EXECUTION вЂў The standard parameters are being set. EXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N) вЂў Waiting for the key input of execute format (Y/N). FORMAT EXECUTION вЂў Formatting is being executed. SETUP COMPLETE вЂў The simple setup has been completed. Setup with #1060 SETUP "1" has been completed. Formatting with #1060 SETUP "20" has been completed. NON SETUP вЂў Completed without executing simple setup. (When вЂњNвЂќ has been set for both вЂњBASE PARA. SET? (Y/N)вЂќ and вЂњEXECUTE FORMAT? (Y/N)вЂќ.) CONFIRM OPE? (Y/N) вЂў Confirmation for erasing operating time or alarm history. INPUT? (Y/N) вЂў Waiting for the key input of tool length data by manual measurement. V-ANALIZER EXEC. вЂў Waveform display data cannot be output while waveform is displayed. I - 56 3. 3. PROGRAM ERROR PROGRAM ERROR (The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.) These alarms occur during automatic operationвЂљ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors which occurвЂљ for instanceвЂљ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared. Error No. Details P 10 EXCS. AXIS No. The number of axis addresses commanded in the same block exceeds the specifications. AXIS ADR. ERROR The axis address commanded by the program and the axis address set by the parameter do not match. DIVISION ERROR An axis command which cannot be divided by the command unit has been issued. NOT ACCEPT CMND The normal line control command (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the modal in which the normal line control is not acceptable. PARITY H The number of holes per character on the paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for ISO code. PARITY V The number of characters per block on the paper tape is odd. ADDRESS ERROR An address not listed in the specifications has been used. FORMAT ERROR The command format in the program is not correct. G-CODE ERROR A G code not listed in the specifications has been used. G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the rotary tool axis No. (#1501 polyax) was set to вЂњ0вЂќ. G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the tool axis was set to the linear axis (#1017 rot вЂњ0вЂќ). P 11 P 20 P 29 P 30 P 31 P 32 P 33 P 34 Remedy I - 57 вЂў Divide the alarm block command into two. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Revise the axis names in the program. вЂў Check the program. вЂў Check the program. вЂў Check the paper tape. вЂў Check the tape puncher and tape reader. вЂў Make the number of characters per block on the paper tape even. вЂў Set the parameter parity V selection OFF. вЂў Check and revise the program address. вЂў Check and correct the parameters values. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the program. вЂў Check and correct the G code address in the program. вЂў Check the parameter setting values. 3. Error No. P 35 P 36 P 37 P 39 P 40 P 60 P 62 P 70 PROGRAM ERROR Details Remedy вЂў Check the program. CMD-VALUE OVER The setting range for the addresses has been exceeded. вЂў Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end PROGRAM END ERR of the program. вЂњEORвЂќ has been read during tape and вЂў Enter the M99 command at the end of the memory operation. subprogram. вЂў The program numbers are designated across PROG. NO. ZERO a range from 1 to 99999999. A zero has been specified for program вЂў The sequence numbers are designated and sequence numbers. across a range from 1 to 99999. вЂў Check the specifications. NO SPEC ERR вЂў A non-specified G code was specified. вЂў The high-speed program server operation specifications are not provided. вЂў Reconsider the program. PREREAD BL. ERR When tool radius compensation is executedвЂљ there is an error in the pre-read block and so the interference check is disabled. вЂў Reconsider the axis address command. OVER CMP. LENG. The commanded movement distance is excessive. (Over 231) вЂў The default movement modal command at F-CMD. NOTHING power ON is G01. This causes the machine вЂў No feed rate command has been issued. to move without a G01 command if a movement command is issued in the program, and an alarm results. Use an F command to specify the feedrate. вЂў Specify F with a thread lead command. вЂў Check the numerical values of the addresses ARC ERROR that specify the start and end points, arc вЂў There is an error in the arc start and end center as well as the radius in the program. points as well as in the arc center. вЂў Check the вЂњ+вЂќ and вЂњвЂ“вЂќ directions of the вЂў The difference of the involute curve through the start point and the end point is address numerical values. large. I - 58 3. Error No. P 71 P 72 P 90 P 93 P111 P112 P113 PROGRAM ERROR Details Remedy вЂў Check the numerical values of the addresses ARC CENTER in the program. вЂў The arc center is not sought during вЂў Check whether the start point or end point is R-specified circular interpolation. вЂў The curvature center of the involute curve on the inner side of the base circle for involute interpolation. When carrying out tool cannot be obtained. radius compensation, check that the start point and end point after compensation are not on the inner side of the base circle for involute interpolation. вЂў Check whether the start point and end point are at an even distance from the center of the base circle for involute interpolation. вЂў Check the helical specifications. NO HELICAL SPEC вЂў An Axis 3 command was issued by the A helical command has been issued circular interpolation command. If there is no though it is not included in the helical specification, the linear axis is moved specifications. to the next block. вЂў Check the specifications. NO THREAD SPEC A thread cutting command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications. вЂў Issue the thread cutting command and then SCREW PITCH ERR set the screw pitch command properly. The screw pitch has not been set correctly when the thread cutting command is issued. вЂў Before issuing the plane selection PLANE CHG (CR) commands, issue G68 and then G69 Plane selection commands (G17, G18, and G19) were issued when a coordinate (coordinate rotation cancel). rotation command (G68) was issued. вЂў Issue the plane selection command after the PLANE CHG (CC) вЂў A plane selection command (G17вЂљ G18вЂљ tool radius compensation command or nose R compensation command has been G19) has been issued when the tool canceled (issue axial movement command radius compensation command (G41вЂљ after the G40 cancel command). G42) or nose R compensation command (G41вЂљ G42вЂљ G46) is issued. вЂў The plane selection command was issued when nose R compensation is completedвЂљ there is no axial movement command after the G40 commandвЂљ and the compensation has not been canceled. вЂў Issue arc command on the correctly selected ILLEGAL PLANE plane. The arc command axis is not on the selected plane. I - 59 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details Remedy P122 NO AUTO C-OVR An automatic corner override command (G62) has been issued though it is not included in the specifications. 2nd AUX. ADDR The 2nd miscellaneous function address specified in the program does not match that set by the parameter. NO G96 SPEC (No constant peripheral speed) The constant peripheral speed command (G96) was issued despite the fact that such a command does not exist in the specifications. SPINDLE S = 0 No spindle speed command has been specified. G96 P-No. ERR An invalid constant peripheral speed control axis has been specified. NO C-CMP SPEC вЂў Even though there were no tool radius compensation specifications, tool radius compensation commands (G41 and G42) were issued. вЂў Even though there were no nose R compensation specifications, nose R compensation commands (G41, G42, and G46) were issued. G2вЂљ 3 CMP. ERR A compensation command (G40вЂљ G41вЂљ G42вЂљ G43вЂљ G44вЂљ G46) has been issued in the arc mode (G02вЂљ G03). вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Delete the G62 command from the program. P130 P131 P132 P133 P150 P151 P152 P153 вЂў Check and correct the 2nd miscellaneous function address in the program. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Change from the constant peripheral speed command (G96) to the rotation speed command (G97). вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Reconsider the parameter specified for the constant peripheral speed control axis. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid traverse command (G00) in the compensation command block or cancel block. (Set the modal to linear interpolation.) вЂў Reconsider the program. I.S.P NOTHING In interference block processing during execution of a tool radius compensation (G41 or G42) or nose R compensation (G41вЂљ G42вЂљ or G46) commandвЂљ the intersection point after one block is skipped cannot be determined. вЂў Reconsider the program. I.F ERROR An interference error has arisen while the tool radius compensation command (G41вЂљ G42) or nose R compensation command (G41вЂљ G42вЂљ G46) was being executed. I - 60 3. Error No. P155 P156 P157 P158 P170 P172 P173 P177 PROGRAM ERROR Details Remedy вЂў The radius compensation mode is F-CYC ERR (CC) established when a fixed cycle command is A fixed cycle command has been issued executed and so the radius compensation in the radius compensation mode. cancel command (G40) should be issued. вЂў Change the vector to that with which the BOUND DIRECT At the start of G46 nose R compensationвЂљ compensation direction is defined. the compensation direction is undefined вЂў Exchange with a tool having a different tip point number. if this shift vector is used. вЂў Change the G command to that which allows SIDE REVERSED inversion of the compensation direction (G00вЂљ During G46 nose R compensationвЂљ the G28вЂљ G30вЂљ G33вЂљ or G53). compensation direction is inverted. вЂў Exchange with a tool having a different tip point number. вЂў Turn ON the #8106 G46 inversion error avoidance parameter. вЂў Change the tip point number to a legal one. ILLEGAL TIP P. During G46 nose R compensationвЂљ the tip point is illegal (other than 1 to 8). вЂў Add the compensation number command to NO CORR. No. the compensation command block. The compensation number (DOOвЂљ TOOвЂљ вЂў Check the number of compensation number HOO) command was not given when the sets a correct it to a compensation number radius compensation (G41вЂљ G42вЂљ G43вЂљ command within the permitted number of G46) command was issued. compensation sets. AlternativelyвЂљ the compensation number is larger than the number of sets in the specifications. вЂў Check the address L-Number of the G10 G10 L-No. ERR command and correct the number. (G10 L-number error) The L address command is not correct when the G10 command is issued. вЂў First check the number of compensation sets G10 P-No. ERR and then set the address P designation to (G10 compensation error) within the permitted number of sets. When the G10 command is issuedвЂљ a compensation number outside the permitted number of sets in the specifications has been commanded for the compensation number command. вЂў The tool life management data cannot be LIFE COUNT ACT Registration of tool life management data registered when counting the used data. Turn the used data count valid signal OFF. with G10 was attempted when the used data count valid signal was ON. I - 61 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P178 LIFE DATA OVER The No. of registration groupsвЂљ total No. of registered tools or the No. of registrations per group exceeded the specifications range. P179 P180 P181 P182 P183 P184 P190 Remedy GROUP No. ILL. вЂў When registering the tool life management data with G10вЂљ the group No. was commanded in duplicate. вЂў A group No. that was not registered was designated during the TВ…В…В…В…99 command. вЂў An M code command must be issued as a single command but coexists in the same block as that of another M code command. вЂў The M code commands set in the same group exist in the same block. NO BORING CYC. A fixed cycle command was issued though there are not fixed cycle (G72 вЂ“ G89) specifications. NO S-CMD (TAP) The spindle rotation speed command has not been issued when the hole drilling fixed cycle command is given. SYN TAP ERROR Connection to the main spindle unit was not established. PTC/THDвЂљ No. The pitch or thread number command has not been issued in the tap cycle of a hole drilling fixed cycle command. NO PTC/THD CMD The pitch or the number of threads per inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the hole drilling fixed cycle command. NO CUTTING CYC A lathe cutting cycle command was input although the lathe cutting cycle was undefined in the specification. I - 62 вЂў Review the No. of registrations. The maximum No. of registrations is shown below. No. of groups 80 No. of tools 80 Per group 16 вЂў The group No. cannot be commanded in duplicate. When registering the group dataвЂљ register it in group units. вЂў Correct to the correct group No. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Correct the program. вЂў Issue the spindle rotation speed command (S) when the hole drilling fixed cycle command G84вЂљ G74 (G84вЂљ G88) is given. вЂў Check connection to the main spindle. вЂў Check that the main spindle encoder exists. вЂў Specify the pitch data and the number of threads by F or E command. вЂў Check the pitch or the number of threads per inch. вЂў Check the specification. вЂў Delete the lathe cutting cycle command. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details Remedy P191 TAPER LENG ERR In the lathe cutting cycleвЂљ the specified length of taper section is illegal. CHAMFERING ERR Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is illegal. NO MRC CYC SPC The fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) was commanded when the fixed cycle for compound lathe I specifications were not provided. PROG. ERR (MRC) вЂў When called with a fixed cycle for compound lathe I command, the subprogram contained at least one of the following commands: вЂў Reference point return command (G27, G28, G29, G30) вЂў Thread cutting (G33, G34) вЂў Fixed cycle skip-function (G31) вЂў The first move block of the finish shape program in fixed cycle for compound lathe I contains an arc command. BLOCK OVR (MRC) The number of blocks in the shape program of the fixed cycle for compound lathe I is over 50 or 200 (this differs according to the model). CONF. ERR (MRC) The fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) shape program could not cut the work normally because it defined an abnormal shape. VALUE ERR (MRC) A command value of the fixed cycle for compound lathe (G70 to G76) is illegal. NO SPECIAL CYC No special fixed cycle specifications are available. NO HOLE (S_CYC) A 0 has been specified for the number of holes in special fixed cycle mode. вЂў The radius set value in the lathe cycle command must be smaller than the axis shift amount. вЂў Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the cycle. P192 P200 P201 P202 P203 P204 P220 P221 I - 63 вЂў Check the specification. вЂў Delete the following G codes from this subprogram that is called with the fixed cycle for compound lathe I commands (G70 to G73): G27вЂљ G28вЂљ G29, G30вЂљ G31вЂљ G33вЂљ G34, fixed cycle G-code. вЂў Remove G2 and G3 from the first move block of the finish shape program in fixed cycle for compound lathe I. вЂў Specify 50 or a less value. The number of blocks in the shape program called by the fixed cycle for compound lathe I commands (G70 to G73) must be decreased below 50 or 200 (this differs according to the model). вЂў Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) shape program. вЂў Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe (G70 to G76) command value. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Reconsider the program. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P222 G36 ANGLE ERR A G36 command specifies 0 for angle intervals. G12 G13 R ERR The radius value specified with a G12 or G13 command is below the compensation amount. NO G12вЂљ G13 SPC There are no circular cutting specifications. NESTING OVER вЂў A subprogram has been called 4 or more times in succession from the subprogram. NO N-NUMBER At subprogram call timeвЂљ the sequence number set at return from the subprogram or specified by GOTOвЂљ was not set. NO PROGRAM No. The subprogram has not been found when the subprogram is called. NO VARl NUMBER The variable number commanded is higher than the numbers in the specifications. EQL. SYM. MSSG. The вЂњ=вЂќ sign has not been commanded when a variable is defined. VARIABLE ERR. An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression. NO COOD-RT SPC Even though there were no coordinate rotation specifications, a coordinate rotation command was issued. NO MACRO SPEC A macro specification was commanded though there are no such command specifications. P223 P224 P230 P231 P232 P241 P242 P243 P260 P270 Remedy I - 64 вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the number of subprogram calls and correct the program so that it does not exceed 4 times. вЂў Specify the sequence numbers in the call block of the subprogram. вЂў Enter the subprogram. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the program variable number. вЂў Designate the вЂњ=вЂќ sign in the variable definition of the program. вЂў Correct the program. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the specifications. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P271 NO MACRO INT. A macro interrupt command has been issued though it is not included in the specifications. MACRO ILL. A statement and a macro statement exist together in the same block. MACRO OVERCALL The number of macro call nests exceeded the specifications. MACRO ARG. EX. The number of macro call argument type II sets has exceeded the limit. CALL CANCEL A G67 command was issued though it was not during the G66 command modal. P272 P273 P275 P276 Remedy P277 MACRO ALM MESG An alarm command has been issued in #3000. P280 EXC. [ вЂљ The number of parentheses вЂњ[вЂќ or вЂњ]вЂќ which can be commanded in a single block has exceeded five. [ вЂљ ] ILLEGAL The number of вЂњ[вЂќ and вЂњ]вЂќ parentheses commanded in a single block does not match. CALC. IMPOSS. The arithmetic formula is incorrect. DIVIDE BY ZERO The denominator of the division is zero. P281 P282 P283 P290 P291 P292 IF SNT. ERROR There is an error in the IF conditional GOTOВ… statement. WHILE SNT. ERR There is an error in the WHILE conditional DOВ…-ENDВ… statement. SETVN SNT. ERR There is an error in the SETVNВ… statement when the variable name setting was made. I - 65 вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Reconsider the program and place the executable statement and macro statement in separate blocks. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so that the macro calls do not exceed the limit imposed by the specification. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў The G67 command is the call cancel command and so the G66 command must be designated first before it is issued. вЂў Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG screen. вЂў Refer to the instruction manual issued by the machine manufacturer. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so the number of вЂњ[вЂќ or вЂњ]вЂќ does not exceed five. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so that вЂњ[вЂќ and вЂњ]вЂќ parentheses are paired up properly. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct the formula. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so that the denominator for division in the formula is not zero. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў Reconsider the program. вЂў The number of characters in the variable name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or less. 3. Error No. P293 P294 P295 P296 P297 P298 P300 P301 P360 PROGRAM ERROR Details Remedy вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so that DO-END EXCESS the number of вЂ™s in the DO вЂ“ END statement The number of В…вЂ™s for DO-ENDВ… in the does not exceed 27. WHILE conditional DOВ… вЂ“ ENDВ… statement has exceed 27. вЂў Reconsider the program and correct it so that DO-END MMC. the DOвЂ™s and ENDвЂ™s are paired off properly. The DOвЂ™s and ENDвЂ™s are not paired off properly. вЂў During tape operationвЂљ a program which WHILE/GOTO TPE There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on includes a WHILE or GOTO statement cannot be executed and so the memory the tape during tape operation. operation mode is established instead. вЂў Review the program. NO ADR (MACRO) A required address has not been specified in the user macro. вЂў Review the program. ADR-A ERR. The user macro does not use address A as a variable. вЂў Review the program. PTR OP (MACRO) User macro G200вЂљ G201вЂљ or G202 was specified during tape or MDI operation. вЂў Reconsider the variable names in the VER. NAME ERROR program and correct them. The variable names have not been commanded properly. вЂў Correct the program so that the name is not VAR NAME DUPLI duplicated. The name of the variable has been duplicated. вЂў Check the specifications. NO PROG.MIRR. A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command has been issued though the programmable mirror image specifications are not provided. I - 66 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P380 NO CORNER R/C A command was issued for corner chamfering/corner rounding though there are no such specifications. NO ARC R/C SPC Corner chamfering/corner rounding was specified in the arc interpolation block although corner chamfering/corner rounding II is unsupported. CORNER NO MOVE The block next to corner chamfering/ corner rounding is not a movement command. CORNER SHORT In the corner chamfering/corner rounding commandвЂљ the movement distance was shorter than the value in the corner chamfering/corner rounding command. CORNER SHORT When the corner chamfering/corner rounding command was inputвЂљ the movement distance in the following block was shorter than the length of the corner chamfering/corner rounding. G0 G33 IN CONR A block with corner chamfering/corner rounding was given during G00 or G33 modal. NO GEOMETRIC A geometric command was issued though there are no geometric specifications. NO GEOMETRIC 2 There are no geometric IB specifications. LES AGL (GEOMT) The angular difference between the geometric line and line is 1В° or less. INC ERR (GEOMT) The second geometric block was specified by an incremental value. NO G01 (GEOMT) The second geometric block contains no linear command. NO ADRS (GEOMT) The geometric format is invalid. P381 P382 P383 P384 P385 P390 P391 P392 P393 P394 P395 Remedy I - 67 вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Remove the corner chamfering/corner rounding command from the program. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Replace the block succeeding the corner chamfering/corner rounding command by G01 command. вЂў Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this distance is shorter than the corner chamfering/ corner rounding. вЂў Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this distance in the following block is shorter than the corner chamfering/corner rounding. вЂў Recheck the program. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Correct the geometric angle. вЂў Specify this block by an absolute value. вЂў Specify the G01 command. вЂў Recheck the program. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P396 PL CHG. (GEOMT) A plane switching command was executed during geometric command processing. ARC ERR (GEOMT) In geometric IBвЂљ the circular arc end point does not contact or cross the next block start point. NO GEOMETRIC 1B Although the geometric IB specifications are not includedвЂљ a geometric command is given. PRAM. IN ERROR вЂў The specified parameter number or set data is illegal. вЂў An illegal G command address was input in parameter input mode. вЂў A parameter input command was input during fixed cycle modal or nose R compensation. AXIS NOT RET. вЂў A command was issued to move an axisвЂљ which has not returned to the reference pointвЂљ away from that reference point. вЂў A command was issued to an axis removal axis. NO 2nd REF. SPC A command for secondвЂљ third or fourth reference point return was issued though there are no such command specifications. COLLATION ERR One of the axes did not return to the start position when the origin point collate command (G27) was executed. G27/M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G27 command block. G29/M ERROR An M command was issued simultaneously in the G29 command block. P397 P398 P421 P430 P431 P434 P435 P436 Remedy I - 68 вЂў Execute the plane switching command before geometric command processing. вЂў Recheck the geometric circular arc command and the preceding and following commands. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the program. вЂў Execute reference point return manually. вЂў The command was issued to an axis for which axis removal is validated so invalidate axis removal. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the program. вЂў An M code command cannot be issued in a G27 command block and so the G27 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks. вЂў An M code command cannot be issued in a G29 command block and so the G29 command and M code command must be placed in separate blocks. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P450 NO CHUCK BARR. The chuck barrier on command (G22) was specified although the chuck barrier was undefined in the specification. TAPE I/O ERROR An error has arisen in the tape reader orвЂљ alternativelyвЂљ in the printer during macro printing. FILE I/O ERROR A file of the machining program cannot be read. P460 P461 P600 P601 P602 P603 P604 P605 P606 Remedy NO AUTO TLM. An automatic tool length measurement command (G37) was execute though there are no such command specifications. NO SKIP SPEC. A skip command (G31) was issued though there are no such command specifications. NO MULTI SKIP A multiple skipping command (G31.1вЂљ G31.2 or G31.3) was issued though there are no such command specifications. SKIP SPEED 0 The skip speed is 0. TLM ILL. AXIS No axis or more than one axis was specified in the automatic tool length measurement block. T-CMD IN BLOCK The T code is in the same block as the automatic tool length measurement block. NO T-CMD BEFOR The T code was not yet specified in automatic tool length measurement. I - 69 вЂў Check the specification. вЂў Check the power and cable of the connected devices. вЂў Check the I/O device parameters. вЂў In memory mode, the programs stored in memory may have been destroyed. Output all of the programs and tool data once and format them. вЂў Ensure that the external device that contains the file is mounted. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Check the specifications. вЂў Specify the skip speed. вЂў Specify only one axis. вЂў Specify this T code before the block. вЂў Specify this T code before the block. 3. PROGRAM ERROR Error No. Details P607 TLM ILL. SIGNL Before the area specified by the D command or decelerating area parameter dвЂљ the measurement position arrival signal went ON. The signal remains OFF to the end. SKIP ERROR (CC) A skip command was specified during radius compensation processing. ILLEGAL PARA. вЂў The parameter setting is not correct. CMD-VALUE ILL. Spindle synchronization was commanded to a spindle that is not connected serially. PREPRO S/W ERR Combining commands that required pre-reading (nose R offsetвЂљ corner chamfering/corner roundingвЂљ geometric IвЂљ geometric IBвЂљ and fixed cycle for compound lathe) resulted in eight or more pre-read blocks. P608 P610 P700 P990 Remedy I - 70 вЂў Check the program. вЂў Specify a radius compensation cancel (G40) commandвЂ™ or remove the skip command. вЂў вЂў вЂў вЂў Check the program. Check the parameter. Check the program. Check the parameter. вЂў Reduce the number of commands that require pre-reading or delete such commands. II EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS 1. 1.1 1. SCREEN CONFIGURATION SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS SCREEN CONFIGURATION 1.1 SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS When the function selection key MENU is pressedвЂљ the following menu appears: TOOL menu is displayed after the power is turned on. To display PARAM menuвЂљ use menu key on the TOOL screen. Tool offset menu display (No.1 to 4) OFFSET WORK Setup parameter menu display (No.1 to 4) REGIST PROCESS WORK Previous page Next page I/O PAR SETUP MENU MENU Next page key Previous page Key PARAM menu No.1 to 4 LIFE Menu selection key PROCESS I/O BASE PARAM #8001 to #8018 #9001 to #9014 Machining parameter #8019 to #8059 I/O device parameter #9101 to #9130 . . . Machining parameter #8071 to #8086 CONTROL PARAM #8101 to #8124 SETUP PARAMETER #9501 to #9530 AXIS PARAM #8201 to #8212 BARRIER PARAM #8300 to #8319 MENU TOOL menu The contents of TOOL menu depends on the system. II - 1 1. 1.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION SCREEN TRANSITION CHARTS Press the menu key SETUP to display the setup selection screen. If the setup parameter menu opening option is specified in this screen, the setup parameters can be set up and displayed. Parameter menu display (No.1 to 4) Tool offset menu display (No.1 to 4) MC-ERR Setup parameter menu display (No.5 to 8) Setup parameter menu display (No.1 to 4) Base Basic specification parameter #1001 to #1024 . . . #1925 to #1936 Previous page Next page Life Axis Macro Servo PSW Spindle MENU Setup I/O PAR Registration PLC Previous page key Setup parameter menu No.1 to 4 Process Work Offset MENU MENU MENU Next page key Menu selection key Axis specification parameter #2001 to #2012 Basic specification parameter of spindle Servo specification parameter #3001 to #3036 Servo adjustment parameter Spindle specification parameter Spindle specification parameter #2037 to #2048 Servo parameter #2201 to #2212 . . . Absolute position parameter #2261 to #2265 Axis specification parameter #2013 to #2024 Zero point return parameter #2025 to #2036 Zero point return parameter #2049 to #2060 Spindle offset parameter Spindle offset parameter Spindle parameter #3201 to #3212 . . . Axis specification parameter #2061 to #2072 Axis specification parameter #2073 to #2084 Axis specification parameter #3573 to #3584 #2085 to #2096 Menu switch Machining error correction Setup parameter menu No.5 to 8 Previous page Next page #4000 to #4047 Machining error correction #4051 to #4097 PLC timer #6000 to #6055 . . . Machining offset data #4101 to #4184 . . . PLC counter #6200 to #6223 #5109 to #5124 #6301 to #6348 #6936 to #6999 PLC constant Bit selection #6401 to #6460 . . . #6581 to #6596 II - 2 Macro list M macro #7001 to #7103 G macro #7201 to #7313 ASCII macro #7401 to #7415 Position switch #7501 to #7574 2. 2.1 2. MACHINING PARAMETERS PROCESS PARAMETERS MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.1 PROCESS PARAMETERS <WRK COUNT> (No. of workpieces machined) # Item 8001 WRK COUNT M 8002 WRK COUNT 8003 WRK LIMIT Contents Setup range (unit) 0 to 99 Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece repeated machining. The No. will not be counted when set to 0. The current machining No. is displayed. Set the 0 to 999999 initial value. 0 to 999999 Set the maximum No. of workpieces machined. A signal is output to PLC when the No. of machining times is counted to this limit. <AUTO TLM> (Automatic tool length measurement) # Item 8004 SPEED 8005 ZONE r 8006 ZONE d Contents Setup range (unit) Set the feedrate during automatic tool length 1 to 60000 (mm/min) measurement. Set the distance between the measurement position 0 to 99999.999 (mm) and deceleration start point. Set the tolerable zone of the measurement position. 0 to 99999.999 (mm) If the sensor signal turns ON in front of d before the measurement positionвЂљ or if the signal does not turn ON after d is passedвЂљ an alarm will occur. <AUTO CORNER OVR> (Automatic corner override) # Item 8007 OVERRIDE 8008 MAX ANGLE 8009 DSC. ZONE Contents Setup range (unit) Set the override value for automatic corner override. 0 to 100 (%) 0 to 180 (В°) Set the max. corner opening angle where deceleration should start automatically. If the angle is larger than this valueвЂљ deceleration will not start. 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Set the position where deceleration starts at the corner. Designate at which length point before the corner deceleration should start. II - 3 2. 2.1 MACHINING PARAMETERS PROCESS PARAMETERS <T-TIP OFFSET> (Wear data input) # Item 8010 ABS. MAX. (For L system only) 8011 INC. MAX. (For L system only) Contents Setup range (unit) 0 to 99.999 (mm) Set the max. value when inputting the tool wear compensation amount. A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set. Set the max. value for when inputting the tool wear 0 to 99.999 (mm) compensation amount in the addition mode. <FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle) # Item 8012 G73 n (For M system only) 8013 G83 n 8014 CDZ-VALE (For L system only) 8015 CDZ-ANGLE (For L system only) 8016 G71 MINIMUM (For L system only) 8017 DELTA-D (For L system only) 8018 G84/G74 return (For M system only) Contents Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). Setup range (unit) 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Not used. Set the screw cut up amount for G76вЂљ G78 (thread cutting cycle). Set the screw cut up angle for G76вЂљ G78 (thread cutting cycle). Set the minimum cut amount for the final cutting in G71вЂљ G72 (rough cutting cycle). If the final cutting amount is smaller than this valueвЂљ the final cut will not be performed. Set the change amount to the command cut amount D for G71вЂљ G72 (rough cutting cycle). Each cut amount will be the value obtained by adding or subtracting this value from command DвЂљ and thusвЂљ the amount can be changed each cut. Set up return length m at a G84/G74 pecking tap cycle. Note: Set вЂњ0вЂќ to specify a usual tap cycle. вЂ“ 0 to 127 (0.1 lead) II - 4 0 to 89 (В°) 0 to 99.999 (mm) 0 to 99.999 (mm) 0 to 999.999 (mm) 2. 2.1 MACHINING PARAMETERS PROCESS PARAMETERS <PRECISION> (High precision control) # 8019 8020 8021 8022 8023 8024 8025 8026 8027 8028 8029 8030 8033 8034 8035 8036 8037 Item R COMP DCC ANGLE COMP CHANGE CORNER COMP CURVE COMP EDGE ANGLE SPLINE ON (for M system only) CANCEL ANG. (for M system only) Toler-1 (for M system only) Toler-2 (for M system only) FairingL (for M system only) MINUTE LENGTH (for M system only) Fairing ON (for M system only) AccClamp ON (for M system only) AccClampMag CordecJudge (for M system only) CorJudgeL (for M system only) Contents Setup range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. Not used. вЂ“ вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ <C axis normal line> # Item 8041 C-rot.R 8042 C-ins.R Contents Not used. Not used. Setup range (unit) вЂ“ вЂ“ II - 5 2. 2.1 MACHINING PARAMETERS PROCESS PARAMETERS <Fixed cycle> # 8051 G71 Item THICK 8052 PULL UP 8053 G73 U 8054 W 8055 R 8056 G74 RETRACT 8057 G76 LAST-D 8058 TIMES 8059 ANGLE Contents Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) Set the amount of recess after cutting by the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72). Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). Set the number of times cutting is performed by the forming rough cutting cycle (G73). Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the push-cut cycle (G74, G75). Set the amount of final cut-in by the composite threading cycle (G76). Set the number of times the amount of final cut-in (G76 finish margin) is divided in the composite threading cycle (G76). Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the composite threading cycle (G76). Setup range (unit) 0 to 99999.999 (mm) 0 to 99999.999 (mm) вЂ“99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) вЂ“99999.999 to 99999.999 (mm) 0 to 99999 (times) 0 to 99.999 (mm) 0 to 99.999 (mm) 0 to 99 (times) 0 to 99 (В°) <Three-dimensional cutter compensation> # Item 8071 3-D CMP (for M system only) Contents Not used. Setup range (unit) вЂ“ < Scale factor> # Item 8072 SCALING P (for M system only) Contents Not used. Setup range (unit) вЂ“ II - 6 2. 2.1 MACHINING PARAMETERS PROCESS PARAMETERS <Tool ID> # Item 8073 OfsetPosition (for M system only) 8074 IDMacroTop (for M system only) Contents Setup range (unit) Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ <Spiral interpolation> # Item 8075 SpiralEndErr (for M system only) 8076 SpiralMinRad (for M system only) Contents Setup range (unit) Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ <Involute interpolation> # Item 8077 InvoluteErr (for M system only) Contents Setup range (unit) Not used. вЂ“ Contents Set the time to turn the screen OFF. The screen saver will not turn ON if 0 is set. (Note) This parameter setting is valid only for the LCD display unit. Setup range (unit) 0 to 60 (min) 0: Do not turn screen OFF. <Screen saver> # Item 8078 Screen Saver <Deep hole drilling cycle> # Item 8083 G83S modeM (for M system only) 8084 G83S Clearanse (for M system only) 8085 G83S Forward F (for M system only) 8086 G83S Back F (for M system only) Contents Setup range (unit) Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ Not used. вЂ“ II - 7 2. 2.2 MACHINING PARAMETERS CONTROL PARAMETERS 2.2 CONTROL PARAMETERS # Item 8101 MACRO SINGLE 8102 COLL. ALM OFF 8103 COLL. CHK OFF 8105 EDIT LOCK B 8106 G46 NO REV-ERR (For L system only) 8107 R COMPENSATION 8108 R COMP Select Contents Select the control of the blocks where the user macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro block continues. 1: Stop every block during signal block operation. Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation. 0: An alarm is output and operation stops when an interference is judged. 1: Changes the path to avoid interference. Select the interference (bite) control to the workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius compensation and nose R compensation. 0: Performs interference check. 1: Does not perform interference check. Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999. 0: Program can be edited. 1: Editing of above program is prohibited. Select the control for the compensation direction reversal in G46 (nose R compensation). 0: An alarm is output and operation stops when the compensation direction is reversed (G41 в†’ G42вЂљ G42 в†’ G41). 1: An alarm does not occur when the compensation direction is reversedвЂљ and the current compensation direction is maintained. 0: In arc cutting mode, the machine moves to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command, making the arc smaller than the command value. 1: In arc cutting mode, the machine compensates the movement to the inside because of a delay in servo response to a command Specify whether to perform arc radius error correction over all axes or axis by axis. 0: Perform correction over all axes. 1: Perform correction over axis by axis. Note: This parameter is effective only when #8107 R COMPENSATION is 1. II - 8 Setup range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 2. 2.2 # 8109 8110 8111 8112 8113 8114 Item HOST LINK G71/G72 POCKET Milling Radius DECIMAL PNT-P MillingInitG16 MillingInitG19 MACHINING PARAMETERS CONTROL PARAMETERS Contents Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Setup range (unit) вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ II - 9 2. 2.3 MACHINING PARAMETERS AXIS PARAMETERS 2.3 AXIS PARAMETERS Set up the parameter required for each axis. # Item 8201 AX. RELEASE Contents Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target. 0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target. 8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 and #8205. 0: Stored stroke limit II valid 1: Stored stroke limit II invalid 8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL When the simple absolute position method (#2049 type is 9) is selectedвЂљ the stored stroke limits I, II will be invalid until the first zero point return is executed after the power is turned ON. 0: Stored stroke limit II valid (according to #8202) 1: Stored stroke limit II invalid Note: Temporary cancel of #8203 soft limit affects all the stored stroke limits. 8204 OT-CHECK-N This sets the coordinates of the (вЂ“) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II. If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the stored stroke limit II will be invalid. 8205 OT-CHECK-P This sets the coordinates of the (+) direction in the moveable range of the stored stroke limit II. 8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for G30. n (tool change position return). Set with coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system. 8207 G76/87 IGNR Select the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and (For M system only) G87 (back boring). 8208 G76/87 (вЂ“) Specifies the shift direction at G76 and G87. (For M system only) 8209 G60 SHIFT Set the last positioning direction and distance for a (For M system only) G60 (uni-directional positioning) command. 8210 OT INSIDE Not used. 8211 MIRR. IMAGE Not used. II - 10 Setup range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) 0: Shift effective 1: No shift 0: Shift to (+) direction 1: Shift to (вЂ“) direction В±99999.999 (mm) вЂ“ вЂ“ 2. MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.4 BARRIER DATA 2.4 BARRIER DATA # Item 8300 PO (For L system only) P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 (For L system only) 8310 Barrier ON (For L system only) 8301 8302 8303 8304 8305 8306 8311 8312 8313 8314 8315 8316 Contents Setup range (unit) Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck В±99999.999 (mm) and the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate (Radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system. Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. В±99999.999 (mm) (Radius value) Set the coordinate value from the center of workpiece for X-axis. Set the coordinate value by basic machine coordinate system for Z-axis. Select the validity of the chuck and tailstock barrier. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Set the area of the left spindle section. P7 P8 вЂў X axis: Set the coordinate value from the (For L system only) workpiece center (P0). (radius value) вЂў Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system. Set the area of the right spindle section. P9 P10 вЂў X axis: Set the coordinate value from the (For L system only) workpiece center (P0). (radius value) вЂў Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic machine coordinate system. BARRIER TYPE (L) Set the shape of the left chuck and tailstock (For L system only) barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock BARRIER TYPE (R) Set the shape of the right chuck and tailstock (For L system only) barrier. 0: No area 1: Chuck 2: Tailstock II - 11 0/1 В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) 0/1/2 0/1/2 2. # Item 8317 DELIV. AX. NAME (For L system only) MACHINING PARAMETERS 2.4 BARRIER DATA Contents When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is movable, set the name of the delivery axis. 8318 STOCK ANGLE (L) (For L system only) Setup range (unit) A/B/.. (axis address) 0 (cancel) 0 to 180 (В°) 0: 90В° default Set the angle for the left tailstock end section. The angle will be interpreted as 90В° if there is no setting (0). 8319 STOCK ANGLE (R) Set the angle for the right tailstock end section. 0 to 180 (В°) (For L system only) The angle will be interpreted as 90В° if there is no setting (0). II - 12 2. 2.5 MACHINING PARAMETERS TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS 2.5 TOOL MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS Set up the parameter of the tool (touch tool sensor), etc, used for measurement. # Item 8701 Tool length 8702 Tool Dia 8703 OFFSET X 8704 8705 RETURN 8706 FEED Y Contents Set the length to the end of the touch tool. Set the spherical diameter of the touch tool end. Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the X axis direction. Set the spindle center deviation amount from the touch tool center in the Y axis direction. Set the return distance to contact the touch tool against the workpiece again. Set the feedrate when contacting the touch tool against the workpiece again. II - 13 Setup range (unit) В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) В±99999.999 (mm) 1 to 60000 (mm/min) 3. 3.1 3. I/O PARAMETERS BASE PARAMETERS I/O PARAMETERS I/O Pressing the menu key PARA displays the I/O BASE PARAM screen. There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputtingвЂљ outputting or referring to dataвЂљ or when performing tape operation. One type is the parameters related to the input/output device. The baud rateвЂљ etc.вЂљ is set according to each device. Up to five types of input/output devices can be registered. The other type of input/output parameters is the I/O base parameters which determine which device is connected to which channel per input/output application. 3.1 BASE PARAMETERS <I/O> DATA IN DATA OUT TAPE MODE MACRO PRINT PLC IN/OUT REMOTE PROG IN EXT UNIT # <PORT No.> Specify the board No. to which the serial input/output device is connected to 2. вЂў Set вЂњ1вЂќ to use ch1. вЂў Set вЂњ2вЂќ to use ch2. 9001 Specify the port for inputting the data such as machine program and parameters. 9003 Specify the port for outputting the data such as machine program and parameters. 9005 Specify the input port for running with the tape mode. 9007 Specify the output port for the user macro DPRINT command. 9009 Specify the port for inputting/outputting various data with PLC. 9011 Not used. <DEV. No.> <DEV. NAME> Set the input/output device No. for each application. The device Nos. are 0 to 4 and correspond to the input/output device parameters. The device name set in the input/output device parameter is also displayed for identification. 9002 Specify the No. of the device that inputs the data. # 9004 Specify the No. of the device that outputs the data. 9006 Specify the No. of the device to be run with the tape mode. 9008 Specify the No. of the device for the DPRINT command. 9010 Specify the No. of the device for the PLC input/output. 9012 Not used. 9013 Specify the port for communication with 9014 Specify the number of the unit used an external unit. for communication with an external unit II - 14 3. 3.2 I/O PARAMETERS I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS 3.2 I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS Parameters for up to five types of input/output devices can be set in DEV <0> to <4>. # Item 9101 DEVICE NAME Contents Set the device name corresponding to the device No. Set a simple name for quick identification. 9102 BAUD RATE Set the serial communication speed. 9103 STOP BIT Set the stop bit length used in the start-stop system. 9104 PARITY CHECK 9106 CHR. LENGTH Specify whether to add the parity check bit to the data during communication. Specify the odd or even parity when it is added to the data. Set the length of the data bit. 9107 TERMINATOR TYPE The code to terminate data reading can be selected. 9108 HAND SHAKE Specify the transmission control method. The method will be no procedure if a value except 1 to 3 is set. 9109 DC CODE PARITY Specify the DC code when the DC code method is selected. 9111 DC2/DC4 OUTPUT Specify the DC code handling when outputting data to the output device. 9112 CR OUTPUT Specify whether to insert the <CR> code just before the EOB (L/F) code during output. 9105 EVEN PARITY II - 15 Setup range (unit) Use alphabet charactersвЂљ numerals and symbols to set a name within 3 characters. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 5: 600 6: 300 7: 150 1: 1 (bit) 2: 1.5 3: 2 0: Parity bit not added 1: Parity bit added 0: Odd parity 1: Even parity 0: 5 (bit) 1: 6 2: 7 3: 8 0 and 3: EOR 1 and 2: EOB or EOR 1: RTS/CTS method 2: No procedure (No handshaking) 3: DC code method 0: No parity to DC code (DC3 = 13H) 1: DC code with parity (DC3 = 93H) DC2 / DC4 0: None / None 1: Yes / None 2: None / Yes 3: Yes / Yes 0: Do not add 1: Add 3. 3.2 # Item 9113 EIA OUTPUT 9114 FEED CHR. 9115 PARITY V 9116 TIME-OUT 9117 DR OFF 9118 DATA ASC II 9119 INPUT FORM 9121 EIA CODE 9122 9123 9124 9125 9126 9127 9128 [ ] # в€— = : $ ! I/O PARAMETERS I/O DEVICE PARAMETERS Contents In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for data output. In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically. Specify the length of the tape feed to be output at the start and end of the data during tape output. Specify whether to check the parity of the No. of characters in block during data input. The No. of characters is factory-set so that the check is valid at all times. Set the time out time to detect an interruption in communication. Time out check will not be executed when set to 0 to 30 seconds. Specify whether to check the DR data at the data input/output. 0: Output in ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413, or #9513 EIA output parameter is set up) 1: Output in ASC II code Specify the mode for input (collation). 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is handled as significant information.) 1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data are skipped until data other than EOB is input. When output with EIA codeвЂљ data can be output using the alternate code in which the special ISO code not included in EIA is specified. Specify the codes which do not duplicate the existing EIA codes by hexadecimal for respective special codes. 9201 в€ј Set the same settings for device 1. 9301 в€ј Set the same settings for device 2. 9401 в€ј Set the same settings for device 3. 9501 в€ј Set the same settings for device 4. II - 16 Setup range (unit) 0: ISO code output 1: EIA code output 0 to 999 (characters) 0: Do not perform parity V check 1: Perform parity V check 0 to 30 (s) 0: DR valid 1: DR invalid 0/1 0/1 0 to FF (hexadecimal) 3.3 3. I/O PARAMETERS COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS 3.3 COMPUTER LINK PARAMETERS # 9601 9602 9603 9604 9605 9606 9607 9608 9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616 9617 9618 9619 9620 9621 9622 9623 9624 Item BAUD RATE STOP BIT PARITY EFFECTIVE EVEN PARITY CHR. LENGTH HAND SHAKE TIME-OUT SET DATA CODE LINK PARAM. 1 LINK PARAM. 2 LINK PARAM. 3 LINK PARAM.4 LINK PARAM.5 START CODE CTRL. CODE OUT CTRL. INTERVAL WAIT TIME PACKET LENGTH BUFFER SIZE START SIZE DC1 OUT SIZE POLLING TIMER TRANS. WAIT TMR RETRY COUNTER Contents Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. II - 17 Setup range (unit) вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ вЂ“ 4. 4. SETUP PARAMETERS SETUP PARAMETERS Pressing the menu key SETUP displays the OPEN SETUP PARAM screen. The systemвЂ™s basic parameters are normally hidden as setup parameters to prevent mistaken operations and to simplify the display. The setup parameters can be displayed and set by making a declaration to open the setup parameters on this screen. [OPEN SETUP PARAM] PARAM 3. 1/2 Open the menu setup parameter? в€— YES : "Y" "INPUT" в€— NO : "N" "INPUT" #( ) WORK PROCESS I/O PAR SETUP MENU 1) Select the setup parameter. Key-in вЂњYвЂќ in # ( )вЂљ and then press INPUT. The basic specification parameter screen appears and the normally hidden setup parameter menu will display. The required menu can be selected to display and set the setup parameters. 2) Cancel the setup parameter selection. Key-in вЂњNвЂќ in # ( )вЂљ and then press INPUT. The setup parameter menu will disappear. Note: The setup parameters are not displayed when the power is turned ON. (Note 1) Refer to вЂњ5. Base Specifications ParametersвЂќ to вЂњ13. Position SwitchвЂќ for details on the setup parameters. (Note 2) Be sure to turn OFF the power supply after selecting the setup parameter. (Note 3) If a key other than the screen changeover key is pressed when the setup parameters are locked, the message вЂњData ProtectedвЂќ will appear. II - 18 5. 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 1. 1/15) # Items 1001 SYS_ON System (PR) validation setup 1002 axisno Number of (PR) axes 1003 iunit (PR) Input setup unit 1013 axname Axis name 1014 incax Increment command axis name 1015 cunit (PR) Command unit 1016 iout (PR) Inch output Details Specify the existence of the NC axis and PLC axis with 1 or 0. Setting range (unit) 0: Not used 1: Used Set the No. of NC axes and the No. of PLC axes. Specify 3 as the maximum value for the NC axis and 1 as that for the PLC axis so that the total of those values is 4 or less. Specify the input setting value for NC axis and the PLC axis. The parameter units will follow this specification. Specify each axisвЂ™ name address with an alphabetic character. Use the characters XвЂљ YвЂљ ZвЂљ UвЂљ VвЂљ WвЂљ AвЂљ B or C. Do not specify the same address. The PLC address does not need to be set. (The axis name is displayed as 1 and 2.) When specifying the program movement rateвЂ™s absolute or incremental method with an addressвЂљ specify the incremental command axis name address with an alphabetic character. The address that can be used is the same as #1013 axname. Specify an address that is different from that #1013. Setting is not required if absolute/incremental specification with addresses is not performed (#1076 Abslnc = 0). Specify the minimum unit of the program movement amount. cunit Movement amount for movement command 1 10: 0.001 mm ( 1 Вµm) 100: 0.01 mm ( 10 Вµm) 1000: 0.1 mm (100 Вµm) 10000: 1.0 mm If there is a decimal point in the movement commandвЂљ the decimal point position will be handled as 1mm regardless of this setting. Specify whether the machine system (ball screw pitchвЂљ position detection unit) is an inch unit system or metric unit system. 0 to 4 II - 19 B: 1 Вµm Axis addresses such as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, and C 10 1 Вµm 100 10 Вµm 1000 100 Вµm 10000 1 mm 0: Metric unit system 1: Inch unit system 5. # 1017 rot (PR) Items Rotational axis 1018 ccw (PR) Motor CCW 1019 dia (PR) Diameter specification axis 1020 sp_ax (PR) 1021 mcp_no (PR) Amplifier I/F channel No. (servo) 1022 axname2 2nd axis (PR) name 1023 crsadr (PR) 1024 crsinc (PR) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear axis. For the rotary axisвЂљ the position display will be 360В°вЂљ and the axis will return to 0В°. If the position display is to be continuously displayed even with the rotary axisвЂљ set the axis as a linear axis Specify the direction of the motor rotation to the command direction. 0: Rotates clockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command. 1: Rotates counterclockwise (looking from motor shaft) with the forward rotation command. Specify whether the program movement amount is to be commanded with the diameter dimension or as movement amount. When the movement amount is commanded with the diameter dimensionsвЂљ 5mm will be moved when the command is a movement distance of 10mm. The movement amount per pulse will also be halved during manual pulse feed. Among parameters concerning lengthвЂљ the tool lengthвЂљ the wear compensation amount and the workpiece coordinate offset are displayed in diameter value when diameter is specifiedвЂљ but other parameters are always displayed in radius value. Not used. Setting range (unit) 0: Linear axis 1: Rotary axis Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting an axis amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to вЂњ0000вЂќ. Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.) 0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207 Not used. Not used. II - 20 0: Rotates clockwise 1: Rotates counterclockwise 0: Command with movement amount 1: Command with diameter dimension Two digits between A to Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is cleared when 0 is set) 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 2/15) # Items 1025 l_plane Initial plane selection 1026 base_l 1027 base_J 1028 base_K Base axis I Base axis J Base axis K 1029 aux_I Flat axis I 1030 aux_J Flat axis J 1031 aux_K Flat axis K Details Setting range (unit) Specify the plane to be selected when the power is 1: X-Y plane (G17 turned ON or reset. command state) When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed (X-Y plane). 2: Z-X plane (G18 command state) 3: Y-Z plane (G19 command state) Specify the basic axis address that composes the Control axis addresses such as X, Y, and Z plane. Specify the axis address set in #1013 axname. If all three items do not need to be specifiedвЂљ such as for 2-axis specificationsвЂљ input вЂњ0вЂќвЂљ and the parameter will be blank. NormallyвЂљ when XвЂљ Y and Z are specified respectively for base_lвЂљ_JвЂљ_KвЂљ the following relation will be established: G17: X-Y G18: Z-X G19: Y-Z Specify the desired address to set an axis address other than the above. If there is an axis parallel to #1026 base_lвЂљ specify Control axis addresses that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z If there is an axis parallel to #1027 base_JвЂљ specify Control axis addresses that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z If there is an axis parallel to #1028 base_KвЂљ specify Control axis addresses that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z II - 21 5. # Items 1037 cmdtyp Command type BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify the program G code series and compensation type. cmdtyp 1 2 System 2 (for M) 3 System 2 (for L) 4 7 System 3 (for L) System 6 (for special L) System 7 (for special L) 8 1038 plcsel 1039 spinno 1040 M_inch (PR) Ladder selection Number of spindles Constant input (inch) G code series System 1 (for M) Setting range (unit) 1 to 8 Compensation type Type A (one compensation amount for one compensation number) Type B (shape and wear amounts for one compensation number) Type C (two kinds of compensation amount of shape and wear per compensation No.) Same as above Same as above Same as above There are some items in the specifications that can be used or cannot be used according to the value set in this parameter. The file structure may also change depending on the compensation data type. ThusвЂљ after changing this parameterвЂљ initialize the system with #1060 SETUP. Specify the PLC type. 0: 1: Specify the existence of a spindle. 0: 1: Specify the parameter unit system for the position 0: and length. 1: II - 22 User custom PLC Standard PLC No spindle One spindle Metric system Inch system 5. # 1041 l_inch (PR) Items Initial state (inch) 1042 pcinch (PR) PLC axis command (inch) Select language displayed 1043 lang BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify the unit system for the program movement amount when the power is turned ON or reset and for position display. Designate an internal unit. Specify the unit system for the commands to the PLC axis. Setting range (unit) 0: Metric system 1: Inch system Specify the display language. 0, 1, 15, 22 0: Display in Japanese 1: Display in English 15: Display in Chinese (traditional Chinese) 22: Display in Chinese (simplified Chinese) Specify the number of MR-J2-CTs connected. 0/1 1044 auxno MR-J2-CT (PR) Connections 1045 nskno Not used. (PR) 1049 mmac_R Not used. (PR) Note: 0: Metric system 1: Inch system Selection of inch and metric unit When set value of #1041 I_inch is changedвЂљ the unit of length is changed after reset. Among parameters concerning lengthвЂљ following items are not changed automaticallyвЂљ therefore change the set values to agree with the new unit system when the unit system is changed. Tool compensation amount (Tool length compensation amountвЂљ tool wear compensation amount and tool tip compensation amount) Workpiece coordinate offset #8004 SPEED #8012 G73n #8053 G73U #8005 ZONE r #8016 G71 MINIMUM #8054 W Machining #8006 ZONE d #8017 G71 DELTA-D #8056 G74 RETRACT parameter #8009 DSC. ZONE #8018 G84/G74n #8057 G76 LAST-D #8010 ABS. MAX. #8051 G71 THICK #8011 INC. MAX. #8052 PULL UP Axis parameter #8204 OT-CHECK-N #8205 OT-CHECK-P #8206 TOOL CHG.P #8209 G60 Shift Barrier data #8300 вЂ“ #8306, #8311 вЂ“ #8314 Basic specification #1084 RadErr parameter #8004 SPEED is 10 inches/min. unit for the inch system. II - 23 5. # 1050 (PR) 1051 (PR) 1052 (PR) 1060 BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details MemPrg Not used. MemTol Not used. MemVal Not used. SETUP Setting range (unit) Activate setup Execute the functions required for initializing the processing system. 1: Execute one-touch setup #(1060) Data( 1)( ) INPUT "BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N)" is displayed. To initialize the parameters. Y To retain the current paramete N INPUT INPUT The parameters are initialized according to the setting values in #1001 to #1043. "FORMAT?(Y/N)" is displayed. To initialize the machining program file and tool offset file. Y To retain the current machining program file and tool offset fil N INPUT INPUT The above files are initialized and the standard canned cycle program is input. "SETUP COMPLETE" is displayed. Note: Most setup parameters will be initialized with one-touch setupвЂљ so confirm the data before executing. This parameter will automatically be set to 0 when the power is turned ON. II - 24 1 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 3/15) # 1061 intabs (PR) 1062 T_cmp Items Manual ABS updating Tool offset function Details Setting range (unit) Defines whether to update the absolute value data 0: Do not update during automatic handle interrupt. (shift coordinates This parameter is valid only when #1145 l_abs is set the amount of the to 1. interruption) 1: Update (same coordinates as when interrupt did not occur will be applied.) 0 to 3 Specify whether the tool length offset and wear compensation is valid during T command execution. Setting value 0 1 2 3 1063 mandog Manual dog-type 1064 svof (PR) Error correction Tool length offset Valid Valid Invalid Invalid Wear compensation Valid Invalid Valid Invalid The initial return to the reference point is performed 0: High speed return 1: Dog-type with dog-type return after the power is turned ONвЂљ and the coordinate system is established. Specify the manual reference point return method after the coordinate system is established with this parameter. (This setting is not required when using absolute position detection.) Specify whether to correct the error when the servo is 0: Do not correct the OFF. error 1: Correct the error II - 25 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # Items 1065 JOG_H JOG response type Setting range (unit) 0 to 4 1066 JOG_HP X: 0000 to 013F (hexadecimal) G: 0000 to 3071 M: 0000 to 5119 (decimal) X: 0000 to 013F (hexadecimal) G: 0000 to 3071 M: 0000 to 5119 (decimal) 1067 JOG_HN 1068 slavno (PR) 1069 no_dsp (PR) 1070 axoff Details Set up an improved JOG response type. 0: Conventional specification The system is started and stopped by signal via ladder without reference to external input signals. 1: Type 1 The system is started up and stopped by external signal. 2: Type 2 The system is started up and stopped by performing the AND operation for external signals and those via ladder. 3: Type 3 The system is started up when signals via ladder rise. It is stopped when external signals and those via ladder fall. 4: Type 4 Zero point return mode: The system is started up and stopped by signal via ladder without reference to external input signals (conventional specification). Non-zero point return mode: The system is started up and stopped by performing AND for external signals and those via ladder (type 2). Select JOG Specify the number of the device that inputs +JOG activation signals. The device type is specified by activation (+) device JOG_D in #1071. The effective range of set values vary depending on the device type. A value outside of the effective range is invalid if specified. Select JOG Specify the number of the device that inputs -JOG activation activation signals. The device type is specified by (в€’) device JOG_D in #1071. The effective range of set values vary depending on the device type. A value outside of the effective range is invalid if specified. Not used. Axis with no counter display Axis removal Set up an axis that displays no counter. This option is 0: Displays the counter valid on the counter display screen (relative value 1: Does not display screen). the counter. Define an axis that enables axis removal control. 0: Disables axis removal. 1: Enables axis removal II - 26 5. # Items 1071 J0G_D В±J0G (PR) activation signal device name 1072 chop_ax BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify the number of the device that inputs В±J0G activation signals. 0: X device 2: M device Set the JOG_HP (#1066) and JOG_HN (#1067) parameters according to this device specification parameter. Not used. Setting range (unit) 0, 2 (SETUP PARAM 1. 4/15) # Items 1073 I_Absm Initial absolute value Details Specify the absolute value/incremental value mode for when the power is turned ON or reset. 1074 l_Sync Initial synchronous feed 1075 I_G00 Initial G00 1076 Abslnc (For L system only) ABS/INC address 1077 radius Specify the feedrate specification mode for when the power is turned ON or reset. 0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute) 1: Synchronous feed (feed per rotation) Specify the linear command mode for when the power is turned ON or reset. 0: Linear interpolation (G00 command state) 1: Positioning (G01 command state) The absolute value/incremental commands can be issued by using the absolute value address and incremental value address for the same axis. 0: Absolute/incremental with G command 1: Absolute/incremental with address code (The #1013 axname address will be the absolute value commandвЂљ and #1014 incax address will be the incremental value command) Specify if the diameter specification axisвЂ™ (#1019 dia is set to 1) incremental value command uses the diameter value or radius value Incremental command for diameter specification axis Decimal point Specify the unit of position commands that do not type 2 have a decimal point. 0: The min. input command unit is used (follows #1015 cunit) 1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit is used (For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.) 1078 Decpt2 II - 27 Setting range (unit) 0: Incremental value command mode 1: Absolute value command mode 0: Asynchronous feed 1: Synchronous feed 0: Linear interpolation 1: Positioning 0: Absolute/ incremental with G command 1: Absolute/ incremental with address code 0: Diameter value 1: Radius value 0: The min. input command unit is used 1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit is used 5. # 1079 F1digt Items Validate F1 digit 1080 Dril_Z (For D system only) 1081 Gmac_P 1082 Geomet (For L system only) 1084 RadErr 1085 G00Drn 1086 G0lntp BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify whether to execute the F command with a 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical command. 0: Direct numerical command (command feedrate during feed per minute or rotation) 1: 1-digit code command (feedrate specified with #1185 spd_F1 вЂ“ #1189 F5) Specify a fixed cycle hole drilling axis. Specify 0: Use an axis vertical to the selected plane as the boring axis hole drilling axis. 1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis regardless of the selected plane. Specify the G code priority relationship during the Give priority to macro call with the G command. 0: G code used in system is priority. G code 1: Registered G code for call out is priority. parameter Geometric Specify whether to use the geometric I or IB function. 0: Do not use. 1: Use only geometric I. 2: Use geometric I and IB. With geometric, specific address codes are used for exclusive meanings. Thus, if A or C is used for the axis address or 2nd miscellaneous command code, the A used for the axis address may function as the geometric's angle designation. Take special care when designating the axis name, etc., when using this function. Arc error Specify the tolerable error range when a deviation occurs in the end point and center coordinate in the circular command. G00 dry Specify whether to apply dry run (feed with manual run setting speed instead of command feedrate) to the G00 command. 0: Do not apply to G00. (move at rapid traverse rate) 1: Apply to G00. (move at manual set feedrate) Specify the G00 movement path type G00 0: Move linearly toward the end point. non-interp (interpolation type) olation 1: Move to the end point of each axis at the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. (non-interpolation) II - 28 Setting range (unit) 0: Direct numerical command 1: 1-digit code command 0/1 0/1 0/1/2 0 to 1.000 (mm) 0: Do not apply to G00 1: Apply to G00 0/1 5. # Items 1087 G96_G0 Constant surface speed control by rapid traverse feed command 1088 G30SL Disable G30 soft limit 1089 Cut_RT Short cut for rotary axis 1090 Lin_RT Linear rotary axis 1091 Mpoint Ignore middle point 1092 Tchg _A Replace tools for additional axis 1093 Wmvfin BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (unit) Specify how to handle the cycle speed for the G00 0/1 command when using the constant surface speed control function. 0: Calculate the cycle speed constantly even during G00 movement. 1: Calculate the cycle speed at the block end point in the G00 command. Specify how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd reference point return) movement. 0: Soft limit valid during G30 movement 1: Soft limit invalid during G30 movement Specify how to handle the short cut control for the rotary axis (#1017 rot is set to 1). 0: No short cut (move toward end point) 1: Use short cut (when using the absolute value commandвЂљ move in the direction where the movement amount will be 180В° or less) Specify how to handle a command for the rotary axis that exceeds 360В°. 0: For absolute value commands that exceed 360В°вЂљ the value will be converted into a remainder of 360В° and the axis will move. Example: If the command is 420В°вЂљ the applied value will be 60В°. 1: For absolute value commands that exceed 360В°вЂљ the axis will move in the same manner as a linear axis. Example: If the command is 420В°вЂљ the axis will pass the 360В° position and will move to the 60В° position. Specify now to handle the middle point during G28 and G30 reference point return. 0: Move to the reference point after passing the middle point designated in the program. 1: Ignore the middle point designated in the program and move straight to the reference point. Specify the movement of the additional axis during tool change position return. 0: The additional axis does not move with the tool change position return command. 1: After returning the standard axis with the tool change position return commandвЂљ the additional axis also returns to the tool change position. Not used. II - 29 0: Soft limit valid 1: Soft limit invalid 0: No short cut 1: Use short cut 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # Items Details 1094 Tl_SBK Select life Select whether to count the data units to be used for a (for L count for single block when using the tool life management II system single block function (L system). only) 0: Does not count the data units. 1: Count the data units. 1095 T0tfof TF output Select how to handle TF for T00 command. 0: TF is output. 1: TF is not output Specify the tool life management type. Tool life 1096 T_Ltyp manageme (for L nt type system only) 1097 T1digt 1098 Tlno. 1099 Treset Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 1: Life management type l 2: Life management type ll Specify the No. of digits in the tool wear compensation 0/1 Tool wear compensati No. in the T command. 0: The 2 high-order digits are the tool No.вЂљ and the on number 2 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation 1-digit No. command 1: The 3 high-order digits are the tool No.вЂљ and the 1 Iow-order digit is the wear compensation No. This parameter will be fixed to 0 when tool life management II is selected. Tool length Specify the No. of digits in the tool length offset No. in 0/1 offset the T command. number 0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length offset and wear compensation Nos. 1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No. and tool length offset Nos. The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear compensation No. Cancel tool Specify how to handle tool compensation vector when 0: Clear 1: Save resetting system. wear 0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation compenvectors when resetting. sation 1: Save the tool length and wear compensation amount vectors when resetting. When the values are clearedвЂљ the compensation will not be appliedвЂљ so the axis will move the compensation amount in the next compensation operation. When the values are savedвЂљ the compensation will be appliedвЂљ so the axis will shift the differential amount of the compensation amount in the next compensation operation. II - 30 5. # 1100 Tmove 1101 Tabsmv 1102 tlm (For L system only) 1103 T_life BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Tool wear compensation Details Specify the period to perform tool length offset and wear compensation. 0: Compensate when T command is executed. 1: Superimpose and compensate with the movement command in the block where the T command is located. If there is no movement command in the same blockвЂљ compensation will be executed after the movement command is superimposed in the next movement command block. 2: Compensate when the T command is executed. 1: Superimpose and compensate a tool length offset with the movement command in the same block. If there is no movement command in the same block, compensation will be executed after the movement command is superimposed in the next movement command block. Specify the type of movement command when Tool wear #1100 compensation method Tmove is set to 1. 0: Compensate regardless of the movement command type. 1: Compensate only at the movement command in the absolute value command. Specify the measurement method for manual tool Manual tool measurement l. length 0: Align tool with reference position measuring 1: Input measurement results system Validate life Select the usage of the tool life management management function. 1104 T_Com2 Tool command method 2 Setting range (unit) 0 to 2 0: Compensate regardless of the command type. 1: Compensate only with the absolute value command. 0: Reference position method 1: Measured value input method 0: Do not use. 1: Perform tool life management control. Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life 0/1 is set to 1. 0: Handle the program tool command as the group No. 1: Handle the program tool command as the tool No. II - 31 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # 1105 T_Sel2 Items Tool selection method 2 1106 Tcount (For L system only) 1107 Tllfsc (For L system only) Life management count 1108 TlrectM (For L system only) 1109 subs_M (PR) Life management re-count M code Validate alternate M code 1110 M96_M M96 alternate M code M97 alternate M code Validate status trigger system Specify an M code to replace M96 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1. Specify an M code to replace M97 when #1109 subs_M is set to 1. Specify the validity conditions for the user macro interrupt signal. 0: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) turns OFF to ON. 1: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON. Validate interrupt method type 2 Specify the movement after user macro interrupt signal (UIT) input. 0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for block being executed to end. 1: Execute interrupt program after completing block being executed. 1111 M97_M 1112 S_TRG (PR) 1113 INT_2 (PR) Split life management display screen Details Select the tool selection method for when #1103 T_Life is set to 1. 0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group. 1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from tools used in the same group and the unused tools. Specify the function when address N is omitted when inputting data (G10 L3 command) for tool life management function ll. Setting range (unit) 0/1 Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M code. 0: Alternate M code invalid 1: Alternate M code valid 3 to 97 (excluding 30) 3 to 97 (excluding 30) 0: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) turns OFF to ON. 1: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON. 0/1 0: Time specified input 1: No. of times specified input Set up the number of groups to be displayed on the 0 to 2 tool life management II (L system) screen. 0: Displayed group count 1, maximum number of registered tools: 16 1: Displayed group count 2, maximum number of registered tools: 8 2: Displayed group count 4, maximum number of registered tools: 4 Set up the M code for tool life management II (L 0 to 99 system) re-count. II - 32 5. # 1114 mcrint Items Macro argument initialization 1115 thwait Waiting for thread cutting Invalidate soft limit (manual operation) Handle response switch 1116 G30SLM 1117 H_sens 1118 mirr_A (For L system only) 1119 Tmiron (For L system only) 1120 TofVal (PR) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Select whether to clear statements other than specified arguments by macro call. Also, select whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting. 0: Delete non-specified arguments by macro call. 1: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call. 2: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call and clear local variables by power-ON and resetting. Set the queue number during screw thread cutting when the chamfering is not valid. Setting range (unit) 0/1/2 Enable this function when disabling the soft limit check function from the second to the fourth zero point return by manual operation. 0: Enable soft limit function. 1: Disable soft limit function. 0/1 0 to 99 (Approx. 4 ms.) Standard set value: 4 Switch the handle response mode when feeding the handle. 0: Standard handle response 1: High-speed handle response 0/1 Select one of the following two methods: Select how вЂў Set up the current length of tools on each to set up the facing turret. length of вЂў Set up a value, assuming that the tools on tools on each facing turret are in the same direction cutter tables as that of those on the base turret. (opposed 0: Current length of the tools on each facing tables) turret 1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing turret are in the same direction as that of those on the base turret. Not used. Change macro variable Specify whether to change the macro variable (tool 0/1 offset) numbers for shape compensation and wear compensation. 0: Do not change. (Conventional specifications) 1: Change the shape and wear compensation variable numbers each for X, Z, and R. II - 33 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 5/15) # 1121 edlk_c Items Edit lock C Details Specify whether to prohibit editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Note: If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in #1121 when the power is turned ON. The display and search of program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can be prohibited. Specify whether to prohibit display and search. 0: Display and search is possible. 1: Program details are not displayed. 2: Program details are not displayedвЂљ and operation search is prohibited. The program details will not be displayedвЂљ but the program No. and sequence No. will display in the prohibited state. Note: If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in #1121 when the power is turned ON. Select whether to use the origin zero function. 1122 pglk_c (PR) Program display lock 1123 origin Origin zero inhibition Specify whether to automatically increment the Fix tool wear offset No. by 1 with the input or to display the No. as compensation number it is in the setting on the tool offset screen. 0: Increment the # No. by 1 when the input key is pressed. (Same as general parameters) 1: # No. does not change even if INPUT key is pressed. When making settings in sequenceвЂљ 0 is handier. When changing and setting repeatedly while adjusting one offset valueвЂљ 1 is handier Specify the feedrate display on the monitor screen. Actual feedrate display Playback G90 Specify whether the playback movement amount when performing playback editing is to be an absolute value or incremental value. DPRINT Specify the alignment for printing out with the alignment DPRINT function. 0: No alignmentвЂљ data is printed with left justification. 1: Align the minimum digit and output. 1124 ofsfix 1125 real_f 1126 PB_G90 1127 DPRINT II - 34 Setting range (unit) 0: Editing possible 1: Editing prohibited 0 to 2 0: Use 1: Do not use 0/1 0: Command speed 1: Real movement feedrate 0: Incremental value 1: Absolute value 0/1 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # Items 1128 RstVCI Clear variables by resetting Setting range (unit) 0/1 1129 PwrVCl 0/1 1130 set_t 1131 Fldcc (PR) Details Specify how to handle the common variables when resetting. 0: Common variables do not change after resetting. 1: The following common variables are cleared by resetting: During variable 100 group specifications: #100 to #149 are cleared. During variable 200 group and 300 group specifications: #100 to #199 are cleared. Specify how to handle the common variables when the Clear variables by power is turned ON. 0: The common variables are in the same state as power-ON before turning the power OFF. 1: The following common variables are cleared when the power is turned ON. During variable 100 group specifications: #100 to #149 are cleared. During variable 200 group and 300 group specifications: #100 to #199 are cleared. Specify the tool command value display on the Display selected tool POSITION screen. 0: T-modal value of program command is number displayed. 1: Tool number sent from PLC is displayed. Feed Parameter to suppress acceleration changes with a forward filter filter when starting acceleration or deceleration Specify the parameter in bits. 0/1 bit1: 7.1 (ms) bit2: 14.2 (ms) bit3: 28.4 (ms) bit4: 56.8 (ms) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Feed forward filter 1132 CRT If bit 1 to bit 4 are all 0 or two or more bits of bit 1 to bit 4 are 1, 3.5 ms is set up. LCD contrast This parameter adjusts the contrast of the LCD display вЂ“3 to 3 control unit. вЂ“3: Highest luminance (Brightest state) вЂ“3: Lowest luminance (Darkest state) Adjust this parameter to an appropriate brightness between вЂ“3 and 3. II - 35 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # Items Details 1133 ofsmem Select how to Select the number stored by previous setup when set up tool selecting the tool wear compensation screen. wear 0: Does not display the number when selecting compensathe screen. tion screen 1: Displays the stored number when selecting the screen. 1134 LCDneg LCD reverse Specify 1 to reverse the display on the monochrome display LCD. 1135 unt_nm Unit name Set up a unit name. Set up the unit name with 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers. If 0 is set up, the unit name is not displayed. 1136 optype Operation This parameter validates the operation menu display. menu display Specify the setting method for the tool offset dataвЂ™s valid absolute value or incremental value. 0: Mode selection method (Conventional specification) 1: Menu selection method This parameter is valid on the following screens. вЂў TOOL TIP OFFSET screen (L system) вЂў TOOL DATA screen (L system) вЂў NOSE-R screen (L system) вЂў TOOL OFFSET screen type I (M system) вЂў TOOL OFFSET screen type II (M system) Set the type of the position counter to be displayed on 1137 Cntsel Coordinate value screen the COORDINATE screen. display counter 0 : MST (Default) select 1 : Next command 2 : Current value B 3 : Manual interrupt amount Setting range (unit) 0/1 0: Normal display 1: Reverse display 4 or less characters consisting of both alphabets and numbers 0/1 1st digit : 0 to 3 2nd digit: 0 to 3 (Default : 00) 0 or 1 : Next value (Default) 1138 Pnosel Select screen by parameter number: 2 : Current value B 3 : Manual interrupt amount Specify whether to enable the function to select a screen by specifying a parameter number. II - 36 0: Disable 1: Enable 5. # Items 1139 edtype Edit type selection 1140 Mn100 1141 Mn200 1142 Mn300 1143 Mn400 1144 mdlkof 1145 I_abs M code number M code number M code number M code number MDI setup lock Manual ABS parameter 1146 Sclamp Spindle rotation speed clamp function 1147 smin_V Minimum spindle rotation speed clamp type BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set up an edit type. 0: Screen edit type (M50 or equivalent operation) 1: Screen edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI is changed automatically according to the selected operation mode.) 2: Word edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI is changed automatically according to the selected operation mode.) 3: Screen edit type (type 0 + retaining cursor position) 4: Screen edit type (type 1 + retaining cursor position) First number of M code that corresponds to setup number from 100 to 199 First number of M code that corresponds to setup number from 200 to 299 First number of M code that corresponds to setup number from 300 to 399 First number of M code that corresponds to setup number from 400 to 499 Select whether to enable MDI setup in non-MDI mode. Setting range (unit) 0/1/2/3/4 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999 0: Disable MDI setup 1: Enable MDI setup 0/1 Specify how to handle the absolute value data during automatic handle interrupt. 0: Absolute value data is renewed if manual ABS switch is ON. Data is not renewed if switch is OFF. 1: Follows the intabs state when #1061 intabs is valid. Specify how to handle the spindle rotation speed clamp 0/1 function with the G92S command. 0: G92S command is handled as a clamp command only in the G96 state (during constant surface speed control). G92S will be handled as normal S command in G97 state (constant surface speed OFF). 1: The S command in the same block as G92 is constantly handled as a clamp command. 0: Rotation speed Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp setting value. 1: Output voltage 0: Rotation speed setting coefficient setting 1: Output voltage coefficient setting Set the #3023 smini parameter according to this type setting. II - 37 5. # Items 1148 I_G611 1149 cireft Arc deceleration speed change 1150 F1dc0 G00 feed forward filter BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Not used. Specify whether to enable deceleration at the arc entrance or exit. 0: Disable 1: Enable This parameter is used to filter acceleration changes at the start of rapid acceleration/deceleration. Specify the filters in bit units. Setting range (unit) 0/1 bit1: 7.1 (ms) bit2: 14.2 (ms) bit3: 28.4 (ms) bit4: 56.8 (ms) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G00 feed forward filter When bits 1 to 4 are all 0 or when two or more of bits 1 to 4 are 1, 3.5 (ms) is assumed. Feed forward filter G00/G01 separation 0: Common 1: Separation 1151 rstint 1152 I_G20 1153 FixbDc 0/1 Specify whether to initialize various modals by resetting. 0: Don't initialize. 1: Initialize. 0/1 Specify whether the default mode after power-ON or Initial resetting, inch command or metric command mode. command 0: Metric command (G21 command state) unit 1: Inch command (G20 command state) Valid when reset input is made. Related parameter: Bit 6 вЂњSelect setting and display unitвЂќ of #1226 0 to 2 Hole bottom Specify whether to perform a deceleration check or deceleration in-position check at the hole bottom in the hole drilling cycle. This parameter is valid only for a hole drilling check cycle in which no dwell command can be issued at the hole bottom. 0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position check. 1: Perform a deceleration check. 2: Perform an in-position check. Reset initial II - 38 5. # 1154 pdoor (PR) Items Door interlock II (for each system) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (unit) 0/1 Specify whether to control door interlock II independently for each of the two systems. When door interlock II is controlled for each system of the two systems, system 1 is connected to SV1 (channel 1) of the base I/O unit and system 2 is connected to SV2 (channel 2) of the base I/O unit. Base I/O unit SV1 AMP AMP AMP System 1 AMP AMP AMP System 2 SV2 1155 DOOR_m 1156 DOOR_s When the auxiliary axis (MR-J2-CT) is used, connect it to the SV2 side (after the spindle). This validates door interlock II of system 2. 0: Do not use door interlock II independently for channels. 1: Use door interlock II independently for channels. (Separate systems when using two systems) 2: Use door interlock II independently for channels. (Use independently for system 1 channels) (Use both for system 2) When 0 is specified for this parameter, вЂњSignal input device 1 for door interlock II (#1155 DOOR_m)вЂќ and вЂњSignal input device 2 for door interlock II (#1156 DOOR_s)вЂќ are valid. When 1 is specified, вЂњSignal input device 1 for door interlock II: for each system (#1511 DOORPm)вЂќ and вЂњSignal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each system (#1512 DOORPs)вЂќ. Signal input Set up a fixed device number (X??) for door interlock device 1 for II signal input. A device number from X01 to XFF can be set up. door Device number 000 is invalid. Set up device number interlock II 100 when using no fixed device number for door interlock II signal input. Related parameter: #1154 pdoor Door interlock II (for each system) Set up a fixed device number (X??) for door interlock Device number 2 for II signal input. (Set up the same value as that of #1155.) door Related parameter: #1154 pdoor Door interlock II interlock II (for each system) signal input II - 39 000 to 100 (Hexadecimal) 000 to 100 (Hexadecimal) 5. # 1157 1158 1165 1166 BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items F0atrn F0atno p_trans fixpro 1167 e2rom 1168 test Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. Fixed cycle Select whether to use the edit, program list and data 0 to 99999999 editing input/output functions for the fixed cycles, machine manufacturer macro programs or general programs. 0: General programs can be edited, etc. 1: The fixed cycles can be edited, etc. Password No.: The machine manufacturer macro programs can be edited, etc. Not used. 0: Normal Simulation Specify the test mode for the control unit. operation mode test The test mode does not use reference point returnвЂљ 1: Test mode and tests with a hypothetical zero point return completed state. This is limited to test operation of the control unit itselfвЂљ and must not be used when connected to the machine. (SETUP PARAM 1. 6/15) # Items 1169 system name 1170 M2name Second miscellaneous code 1171 taprov 1172 tapovr 1173 dwlskp Tap return override Tap return override G04 skip condition Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Set this address code when using the 2nd miscellaneous command. Set an address with AвЂљ B and C that is not used with #1013 axname or #1014 incax. Set the tap return override value for the synchronous tap. Set the override value when leaving the tap end point in the synchronous tap cycle. The setting range is 1 to 999вЂљ and the unit is %. When a value less than 100 is setвЂљ it will be judged as 100%. Specify the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) command. A, B, C 1 to 100 (%) 1 to 999 (%) Skip condition 0 to 7 PLC interface input signal Setting Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 End when { signal is input. II - 40 5. # 1174 skip_F 1175 skip1 1176 1f 1177 2 1178 2f 1179 3 1180 3f 1181 G96_ax 1182 thr_F 1183 clmp_M 1184 clmp_D 1185 1186 1187 1188 1189 spd_F1 spd_F2 spd_F3 spd_F4 spd_F5 Items G31 skip speed G31.1 skip condition G31.2 skip speed G31.2 skip condition G31.2 skip speed G31.3 skip condition G31.3 skip speed Constant surface speed control BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (unit) Specify the feedrate when there is no F command in 1 to 999999 (mm/min) the program at G31 (skip) command. Specify the skip signal in the G31.1 to G31.3 Skip condition 0 to 7 PLC interface input signal (multi-step skip) commandвЂљ and the feedrate when Setting Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1 there is no F command in the program. 0 Skip signal specified at G31.1 1 Skip feedrate at G31.1 Skip signal specified at G31.2 Skip feedrate at G31.2 2 3 4 5 6 7 Skip feedrate 1 to 999999 (mm/min) Skip signal specified at G31.3 Skip feedrate at G31.3 Specify the axis to be targeted for constant surface speed control. 0: Program specification will be invalidatedвЂљ and the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis. 1: 1st axis specification 2: 2nd axis specification 3: 3rd axis specification The program specification will be the priority for all settings other than 0. Thread cutting Set the screw cut up speed when not using speed chamfering in the thread cutting cycle. 0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate 1 to 60000 mm/min: Set feedrate M code for Set the M code for C-axis clamp in the hole drilling clamp cycle. Dwelling time Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for C-axis unclamp in the hole drilling cycle. after outputting M code for unclamp Specify the feedrate for the F command in the F1 digit F1-digit command (#1079 F1 digt is set to 1). feedrate Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min) F1 Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min) F2 Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min) F3 Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min) F4 Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min) F5 II - 41 0 to 3 0 to 60000 (mm/min) 0 to 99999999 0.000 to 99999.999 (s) 1 to 60000 (mm/min) 5. # 1190 s_xcnt (PR) (For L system only) 1191 s_angl (PR) (For L system only) 1192 s_zrmv (PR) (For L system only) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. (SETUP PARAM 1. 7/15) # 1193 inpos 1194 H_acdc 1195 Mmac 1196 1197 Smac 1198 Tmac M2mac 1199 Sselect Items Details The setting is selected with вЂњ#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification typeвЂќ. 0: Deceleration check method 1 1: Validate in-position check Specify the deceleration check method for G0. Deceleration 0: Command deceleration check check method 1: In-position check 1 Validate Specify the deceleration confirmation method for in-position the positioning or cutting command. check 0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check 1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check Time constant Specify the time constant for the manual handle feed. 0 for handle 0: Use time constant for G01 feed 1: Time constant 0 (step) Specify the user macro MвЂљ S or T command macro call out. Macro call for Macro call out with M command M command Macro call for S Macro call out with S command command Macro call for T Macro call out with T command command Macro call with Macro call out with 2nd miscellaneous command 2nd miscellaneous code Not used. II - 42 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0: Invalid 1: Valid 5. # 1200 G0_acc (PR) 1201 G1_acc (PR) 1202 mirofs (For L system only) 1203 TmirS1 (For L system only) 1204 TmirS2 (For L system only) 1205 G0bdcc 1206 G1bF 1207 G1btL Items Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant G0 Validate acceleration and deceleration with inclination constant G1 BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a rapid traverse command is issued 0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) with time constant 1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant Setting range (unit) 0: Acceleration and deceleration with time constant 1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination angle constant Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a 0: Acceleration and liner interpolation command is issued. deceleration with 0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) time constant with time constant 1: Acceleration and 1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination deceleration with angle constant inclination angle constant Set up the distance between tools (edges) (between 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Distance between facing facing turrets). turrets Not used. Not used. Acceleration and deceleration before G0 interpolation Maximum speed Time constant 0: G00 acceleration and deceleration are selected as those after interpolation. 1: G00 acceleration and deceleration are selected as those before interpolation. 0/1 Set up a cutting feedrate when selecting acceleration 1 to 999999 and deceleration before interpolation. (mm/min) Set up a cutting feed time constant when selecting 1 to 5000 (ms) acceleration and deceleration before interpolation. Speed G1bF Time G1btL 1208 RCK Arc radius error compensation factor An arc radius error compensation can be increased and decreased from в€’60.0 to 20.0%. II - 43 в€’60.0 to +20.0 (%) 5. # 1209 cirdcc Items Arc decelerati on speed 1210 RstGmd Modal G code reset BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or exit. Setting range (unit) 1 to 999999 (mm/min) Specify whether to initialize each G code group modal and the H and D codes when the system is reset. Specify the initialization items in bit correspondence. 0. Initialize. 1: Don't initialize. M system Specify a hexadecimal number. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Group 1 Move G modal Group 2 Flat selection modal Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal Group 5 Feed G modal Group 6 Inch/metric modal Group 7 Radius compensation modal Group 8 Length compensation modal Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal Group 13 Cut modal Grpup 15 Normal line control modal Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal Group 19 G command mirror modal H, D codes Spindle clamp rotation speed The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and the D code indicates the tool radius compensation number. When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group 8 G modal area retained. When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G modal are retained. (To be continued to the next page) II - 44 5. # Items BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details (Continued from the previous page) L system 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1211 FHtyp 1212 FHno 1213 proaxy (For L system only) Setting range (unit) Specify a hexadecimal number. Group 1 Move G modal Group 2 Flat selection modal Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal Group 4 Barrier check modal Group 5 Feed G modal Group 6 Inch/metric modal Group 7 Nose R compensation modal Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal Group 13 Cut modal Group 17 Constant surface speed control command modal Feed hold stop Specify the type of the external signal used for feed 0 to 2 type hold. 0: Disable the external signal. 1: Enable the external signal (contact A) 2: Enable the external signal (contact B) Specify the number (X??) of the device used to input 000 to 13F Feed hold (hexadecimal) external signal the feed hold signal. device Not used. II - 45 5. # Items 1214 macaxy (For L system only) 1215 macaxx (For L system only) 1216 extdcc External deceleration level BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. 1 to 999999 (mm/min) Use an upper limit value at the feedrate indicated when validating external deceleration signals. This parameter is valid when #1239 set11/bit6 is set to 0. (SETUP PARAM 1. 8/15) # 1217 aux01 (bit4) 1218 aux02 (bit3) aux02 (bit4) aux02 (bit5) aux02 (bit6) aux02 (bit7) Items Validity of title screen customization Parameter input/output format Tool number selection Details Enable or disable the title screen customization. 0: Disable 1: Enable Specify a parameter input/output format. 0: Type I 1: Type II (related to #1218 aux02/bit5) Specify the R register that contains the tool number used for automatic calculation when measuring the coordinate offset of an external workpiece. 0: Conforms to #1130 set_t. 1: Uses the tool number indicated by user PLC Parameter I/O Specify the spindle specification address of parameter I/O type II. II spindle 0: C specification 1: T address This parameter also applies to the spindle specification address for input and collation. Note: This parameter is valid only for parameter I/O type II (bit 3 of aux02 in #1218 is 1). Set No. valid Specify which program No. is selected when inputting operation using вЂњ#1 MAIN PROGRAMвЂќ in Data I/O when program input screen. 0: The No. in the input data is valid. 1: The No. set in the data setting area is valid. When inputting operation using вЂњ#1 MAIN PROGRAMвЂќ Input by in Data I/O screen, select one of the following options program when the input program has already been registered: overwrite 0: An operation error (E65) occurs. 1: Input by overwrite. II - 46 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # 1219 aux03 (bit1) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set 1 to disable the function that stops the system when the high-speed processing time is extended. Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary measure. 0: Skip accuracy (conventional specification) aux03 1: Changes skip accuracy (correct a position in skip (bit2) coordinates when entering skip signals). Select whether to move to the intermediate point during aux03 automatic dog-type reference point return. (bit5) 0: Do not move to intermediate point during dog-type reference point return. 1: Move to intermediate point during dog-type reference point return. 1220 aux04 Tool life check Specify the life check standard applicable when the use count is incremented in tool life management II. (bit 0) timing 0: Determine that the tool life is over when the (For L selection incremented use count exceeds the life count. system (Use count > life count) only) aux04 (bit1) aux04 (bit4) Items Stop highspeed PC monitoring function Improve skip coordinate accuracy Dog-type intermediate point Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 (Default: 0) 1: Determine that the tool life is over when the incremented use count has reached the life count. (Use count в‰Ґ life count) Validate or invalidate the space code described in the 0/1 Validity of space code in comment statements in the machining program in edit (Default: 0) operation with the special display. comment 0: Invalidate the space code in the comment statements of the machining program. 1: Validate the space code in the comment statements of the machining program. Specify the input/output data unit for tool data and user 0/1 Data input/ parameter input/output. output unit 0: Internal unit (metric) selection 1: Follows command mode set with #1152 I_G20 Metric when set to 0 Inch when #1152 I_G20 is set to 1 This parameter is valid when initial metric (#1041 I_inch 0) is set and the setting and display unit is the command unit (#1226 aux10 bit6 1). In all other cases, the tool data will be input and output with the internal units. II - 47 5. # 1221 aux05 (bit7) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (unit) 0/1 Current value B Select the type of counter to be displayed on the valid POSITION screen. 0: Displays a relative value (value that includes tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and workpiece coordinate offset amount) 1: Displays current value B (value that does not include tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and workpiece coordinate offset amount) aux05/bit7 = 1 aux05/bit7 = 0 Tool offset Workpiece offset 1222 aux06 (bit0) aux06 (bit1) aux06 (bit2) aux06 (bit3) aux06 (bit4) Validity of tool length measurement confirmation message Height axis specification (Note1) When вЂњ#1221 aux05/bit7вЂќ is set to вЂњ1вЂќ, the current value B is selected regardless of the bit type of #1287 ext23. When the current value B is valid, the counter zero or origin zero is invalid. 0: Display no confirmation message when tool 0/1 compensation data is set. 1: Display a confirmation message when tool compensation data is set. When 1 is set in this parameter, the axis specified by base specification parameter #1028 base_k is measured and no other axes are measured if they move. Servo Specify whether to enable the waveform display waveform function. display 0: Disable the waveform display function. 1: Enable the waveform display function. Enable/disable Specify whether to enable the setup parameter lock setup parameter function. lock 0: Disable 1: Enable Minimum cut-in Select the minimum cut-in amount command value for the compound thread cutting cycle (G76 amount command). selection 0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is вЂњ0вЂќ. 1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is the CNC internal data. II - 48 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # aux06 (bit5) aux06 (bit7) 1223 aux07 (bit1) aux07 (bit3) Items Fixed cycle for compound lath command format check selection Details Select the operation to be made if the 1st block of the fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted when the conventional format is selected (#1265 ext01/bit0 вЂњ0вЂќ). 0: Program error (P33) occurs. 1: Parameter setting value is used. Zero point return Set the deceleration check method used during deceleration automatic reference point return. check method 0: In-position check 1: Commanded deceleration check Deceleration Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9. check method 2 0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9 1: In-position check in G1+G9 The deceleration check is not performed except G1+G9. When вЂњ#1306 InpsTyp deceleration check specification typeвЂќ is set to 1 (Deceleration check specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid. Specify whether to enable the synchronous tap Synchronous in-position check improvement function. (Applicable tap in-position only to M64 D version series) check 0: Disable improvement 1: Enable aux07 (bit6) Cancel synchronous tap (,S) return aux07 (bit7) Synchronous tap method 1224 aux08 (bit0) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Sampling data output Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Related parameters: #1223 bit 2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check bit 4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check bit 5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2 0/1 0: Retains a spindle rotation speed (, S) when performing synchronous tap return. 1: Cancels a spindle rotation speed (, S) by return with G80. 0/1 Specify a synchronous tap method. 0: Synchronous tap (multi-step acceleration and deceleration and rapid return) 1: Conventional type synchronous tap 0/1 Set the validity of the sampling data output. 0: Sampling output invalid 1: Sampling output valid II - 49 5. # 1225 aux09 (bit7) Items Enable/disable spindle rotation speed clamp 1226 aux10 (bit0) Tool compensation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement Optional block skip type aux10 (bit1) aux10 (bit2) aux10 (bit4) aux10 (bit5) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Specify whether to enable spindle rotation speed clamp by the spindle rotation speed clamp command (G92S, Q) instead of the spindle rotation speed command (R108) specified by the user ladder. 0: Enable 1: Disable Select the tool offset data to be used for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement. 0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data 1: Tool length data Specify whether to enable optional block skipping in the middle of a block. 0: Enable block skipping only at the beginning of a block. 1: Enable block skipping at the beginning of the block and in the middle of a block. Single block Specify the time at which the single block signal is stop timing activated. 0: When the signal goes ON while automatic operation is starting, the block stops after it is finished. 1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block, the block stops. S command Specify whether to output a strobe signal when the S during constant command is issued in constant surface speed mode. surface speed 0: Output no strobe signal in constant surface speed mode. 1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed mode. Specify whether to enable the arbitrary allocation Arbitrary parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT. allocation of 0: Disable arbitrary allocation. (Fixed device) dog signal 1: Enable arbitrary allocation. (Device specified by the parameter) II - 50 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # aux10 (bit6) aux10 (bit7) 1227 aux11 (bit0) aux11 (bit1) aux11 (bit2) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Setup and display unit Details Specify the unit to be used as the setup/display unit or handle feed unit, the command unit or internal unit. The machining program variables (system variables for coordinate system) are changed simultaneously. 0: Internal unit 1: Unit specified by command Note 1: This parameter is valid only in initial millimeter mode (0 is set in 14041 I_inch). The internal unit is always used in initial inch mode (1 is set in 14041 I_inch). Note 2: This parameter is validated immediately after it is set. Note 3: If addition setting is performed for tool and workpiece offset data with the command unit being inch and internal unit being mm, an error may be generated. Note 4: If вЂњ1вЂќ is set for this parameter and two systems are used, the operation will follow the unit commanded for each system. Note 5: The internal data is an internal unit determined with #1041 I_inch. Note 6: This parameter is not related to the PLC axis. Related parameter: #1152 I_G20 (Initial command unit) Shorten JOG Specify whether to shorten the JOG stop time. stop time 0: Do not shorten the JOG stop time. (Same as before) 1: Shorten the JOG stop time. Set up this option when disabling the cutting start Select PLC interlock by spindle feedrate attained. signal or 0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal spindle 1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate feedrate attained attained Select H or D Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on code the tool life management screen when issuing the H99 or D99 command. 0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up on the management setup screen. 1: Validates the data that is set up on the management setup screen when issuing the H99 or D99 command. Select a condition where a relieving operation Measures completes after measurement with tools. against tool 0: Sensor signals has stopped for 500 ms or setter longer. chattering 1: 100 Вµs or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped. II - 51 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # aux11 (bit3) aux11 (bit4) aux11 (bit5) aux11 (bit6) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Absolute coordinate switching (nose R) [Special display unit compatible] Program address check Details Select whether to display a tool nose position or coordinate value with the absolute coordinate counter. 0: Displays the tool nose position. 1: Displays the position specified by program command. Specify whether to simply check the program address when the machining program is executed. 0: Don't check the program address. 1: Check the program address. Spindle rotation Specify whether to clamp the rotation in constant speed clamp surface speed mode when the spindle rotation speed clamp command is issued. 0: Clamp the rotation regardless of the constant surface speed mode. 1: Clamp the rotation only in constant surface speed mode. Word edit menu Select the word edit menu format. Set 0 in this parameter to select the following menu format: LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE COPY SEARCH INSERT MENU PROGRAM MENU B.G. SRH B.G. END COMMENT RETURN WORD в†“ WORD в†‘ STR в†“ STR в†‘ RETURN Set 1 in this parameter to select the following men COPY LOOK UP DELETE REPLACE SEARCH PROGRAM MENU INSERT MENU B.G. SRH B.G. END COMMENT RETURN WORD в†“ WORD в†‘ STR в†“ II - 52 STR в†‘ RETURN Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # aux11 (bit7) 1228 aux12 (bit0) aux12 (bit1) aux12 (bit2) aux12 (bit3) aux12 (bit4) aux12 (bit5) aux12 (bit6) aux12 (bit7) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Switch the set up the range of tool life data to be input or range of tool life compared. 0: Inputs or compares all of the data output. data to be input 1: Inputs or compares part of the data output (For M system 1) Tool life management I data to be input or only) compared tool number (D), lifetime (E), life count (F), and auxiliary data (B). 2) Tool life management II data to be input or compared Group number (G), method (M), life (E/F), tool number (D), and compensation number (H) Note: When the maintenance function data input/ output #(99) ( ) is set, all data will be input and compared. Set up this option to switch the coordinate value Switch screen. coordinate 0: 80-character screen value screen 1: 40-character screen Set up this option to switch the offset and parameter Switch offset and parameter screen to the parameter screen. 0: Displays the offset and parameter screen. screen 1: Displays the parameter screen. Set up the range of data protection in data Switch data transmission mode. protection in 0: Protects both send and receive data. data 1: Protects receive data only. transmission mode Nose R Select whether to specify the nose R compensation specification by shape or wear number. 0: Specifies the nose R compensation by shape number. 1: Specifies the nose R compensation by wear number. Select operation Specify both block cutting start interlock and cutting start interlock as the operation error or stop code. error or stop 0: Operation error code 1: Stop code Select constant Select constant surface speed coordinates. 0: Workpiece coordinate value surface speed 1: Absolute coordinate value coordinates Switch relative Select whether to preset the relative coordinates with counter preset (G92). values 0: Preset relative coordinates. displayed 1: Do not preset relative coordinates. Protection with Set up this option to protect a manual value command. manual value 0: Does not protect the manual value command command (same as before). 1: Protects the manual value command. II - 53 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # 1229 set01 (bit0) set01 (bit1) set01 (bit2) set01 (bit2) set01 (bit3) set01 (bit4) set01 (bit5) set01 (bit6) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Subprogram interrupt Details 0: Specifies the user macro interrupt of macro type. 1: Specifies the user macro interrupt of sub-program type. Accurate thread 0: Address E specifies the number of threads per cutting E inch for inch screw cutting. 1: Address E specifies precise reading for inch screw cutting. Radius compen- 0: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during radius compensation, their sation type B blocks are not handled by intersection operation (For M system processing; they are handled as offset vectors in only) the direction vertical to that of the commands. 1: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during radius compensation, the intersection operation processing of the command block and the next block is executed. 0: When the start-up and cancel commands are Nose R operated during nose R and radius compencompensation, their blocks are not handled by sation type B intersection operation processing; they are (For L system handled as offset vectors in the direction vertical only) to that of the commands. 1: When the start-up and cancel commands are operated during nose R and radius compensation, the intersection operation processing of the command block and the next block is executed. Initial constant 0: The initial state after power-ON is a constant surface speed surface speed control cancel mode. 1: The initial state after power-ON is a constant surface speed control mode. Synchronous 0: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap tap cycles with a floating tap chuck. 1: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap cycles without a floating tap chuck. Start point alarm Select an operation when the operation start point cannot be found while moving the next block of G117. 0: Enables an auxiliary function after the block has been moved. 1: Outputs an program error (P33) when the operation start point is not found. Grid display Select a grid type to be displayed on the servo monitor screen during dog type reference point selection return. 0: Selects the distance between dog OFF and zero point (including a grid mask amount). 1: Selects a value given by reducing a grid mask amount from the distance between dog OFF and zero point. II - 54 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # 1230 set02 1231 set03 (bit1) Switch graphic coordinates set03 (bit2) Switch graphic check trace set03 (bit3) Hold display range information set03 (bit4) Switch zero point mark display position Items 1232 set04 (bit0) Switch load monitor 1233 set05 (bit1) Spindle clamp selection 1234 set06 1235 set07 BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Not used. Select whether to draw graphics with the machine coordinate value or the tool position coordinate value (position being machined, obtained by subtracting the tool compensation amount from machine coordinate values) when displaying the trace function. 0: Machine coordinate value (same as conventional method) 1: Tool position coordinate value The counter display and counter name are sequenced with this. Select whether to draw both the machine coordinate value (tool center path) and tool position coordinate value (program path) or draw only the coordinates selected with switch graphic coordinates (#1231 set03/ bit1) when using the program check function. 0: Both machine coordinates and tool position coordinates (same as conventional method) 1: Only coordinates designated with switch graphic coordinates. Select whether to hold the display range information (drawing position and scale value) for graphic displays. 0: Hold. 1: Do not hold. (Initialize each time ... same as conventional method) Select the position for displaying the zero point mark in the graphic display. 0: Machine coordinate zero point (same as conventional method) 1: Workpiece coordinate zero point Select whether to detect the load with the load monitor's load detection, excluding during acceleration/ deceleration. 0: Detect also during acceleration/deceleration. (Conventional) 1: Do not detect during acceleration/deceleration. Select whether to validate the spindle override for the spindle speed clamp command (G92 S?). 0: Spindle override invalid 1: Spindle override valid Not used. Not used. II - 55 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # 1236 set08 (bit0) set08 (bit1) set08 (bit2) 1237 set09 (PR) (bit0) set09 (bit1) set09 (bit2) set09 (bit3) set09 (bit4) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Manual rotation axis feedrate unit Spindle speed detection Details Select the unit of manual rotation axis feedrate. 0: Fixed to [В°/min] 1: Same speed as before Select the pulse input source of actual spindle rotation speed output (R18/19) when spindle encoder serial connection (#3025 enc-on: 2) is selected. 0: Serial input 1: Encoder input connector Current limit Set whether to cancel the position droop when the droop cancel current limit changeover signal is canceled. invalid 0: Cancel droop. 1: Do not cancel droop. External Set up this function to use the external workpiece workpiece offset coordinates by shifting them to the Z axis. 0: Does not reverse the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift) (same as before). 1: Reverses the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift). Note: When the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift) has been reversed, do not measure those external workpiece offsets. However, the external workpiece offsets can be measured by tool pre-setter. Switch PC I/F F The feedrate display for the special display unit is modal changed. 0: Display as feed per minute. 1: Change between feed per minute and feed per rotation according to the modal state. Switch PC I/F T The T command display for the special display unit modal is changed. (Only L system) 0: Display tool No. (excluding low-order two digits). 1: Display including the compensation No. The dwell time display for the special display unit is Switch PC I/F changed. remaining 0: Display at feedrate display position. distance dwell 1: Display at remaining distance display time display position. The display of the program being executed for the Switch PC I/F special display unit is displayed. execution 0: Display as searched state, regardless of program display/ operation mode. comment display 1: If operation mode and searched program differ, program is not displayed. Comment is displayed for head block search. II - 56 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # set09 (bit5) 1238 set10 (PR) (bit7) 1239 set11 (PR) (bit0) set11 (bit5) set11 (bit6) 1240 set12 (PR) (bit0) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Switch PC I/F modal S Details This parameter is for the special display unit I/F. 0: The S command commanded last is returned. 1: When #1039 spinno is 1 The 1st spindle data is returned. When #1039 spinno is 2 If #1199 Sselect for 2nd system is set to 1 with 2nd system setting, the 2nd spindle data is returned. When another command is issued, the 1st spindle data is returned. Note: When using constant surface speed control (G96 modal), the actual rotation speed command is returned. Switch Select whether to validate the NC alarm 5 (AL5) operation alarm signal output. 0: NC alarm 5 (AL5) invalid All operation alarms are output to NC alarm 4 (AL4). All operation alarms are recorded in the alarm history. 1: NC alarm 5 (AL5) valid The following operation alarms are not output to NC alarm 4 (AL4). These are output to NC alarm 5 (AL5). The operation alarms output to NC alarm 5 (AL5) are not recorded in the alarm history. вЂў External interlock axis found вЂў Cutting override zero вЂў External feedrate zero вЂў Block start interlock вЂў Cutting block start interlock Coil switching 0: Via PLC. (Y2D7) method 1: NC internal processing. (Y2D7 is invalid.) Select whether to validate the spindle clamp speed Door interlock changeover function by the PLC signal. spindle speed 0: Invalid clamp valid 1: Valid Designate the method for setting the external External deceleration speed. deceleration 0: Set speed common for all axes (#1216 extdcc axis compliance external deceleration speed) valid 1: Set speed for each axis (#2086 exdcax external deceleration speed) Handle input Select the handle input pulse. pulse 0: Handle 100 pulse (+12V power supply) 1: Handle 400 pulse (+5V power supply) II - 57 Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 9/15) # 1265 (PR) 1266 (PR) 1267 (PR) 1268 (PR) 1269 (PR) 1270 (PR) 1271 (PR) Items Details ext01 Not used. ext02 Not used. ext03 Not used. ext04 Not used. ext05 Not used. ext06 Not used. ext07 (bit1) ext07 (bit2) ext07 (bit3) ext07 (bit4) Specify the address that specifies the fixed cycle repetition count. 0: Address L only 1: Addresses K and L If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously, the data at address K is used for operation. F-command unit Specify the unit to be used if a thread cutting read command contains on decimal point. 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) F1 в†’ 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev 1: Type 2 F1 в†’ 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev G-code group for Specify the G-code group for unidirectional positioning. unidirectional 0: Unmodal G code (group 00) positioning (for 1: Modal G code (group 01) M system only) Related parameter: #8209 G60 SHIFT (Set the last positioning direction and distance for each axis applicable when the unidirectional positioning command is issued.) Specify the mode of canceling radius compensation Operation by vector by the independent G40 command. independent 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications) G40 command The independent G40 command cancels the radius compensation vector. 1: Type 2 The radius compensation vector is not canceled by the independent G40 command but is canceled by the next move command for the radius compensation plane. Address specifying fixed cycle repetition count (For M system only) II - 58 Setting range (unit) 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 0/1 (Default: 0) 5. # ext07 (bit5) ext07 (bit6) ext07 (bit7) 1272 ext08 (PR) (bit1) ext08 (bit3) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Cut start position Specify the position from where cutting begins in a (For L system fixed cycle for compound lathe. only) 0: Conventional specifications The cut start position is determined by the final shaping program. 1: Extended specifications The cut start position is determined from the cycle start point. Nose R Specify whether to apply nose R compensation to compensation shapes in a rough cutting cycle. (For L system 0: Conventional specifications only) If nose R compensation is enabled for the final shaping program, the shape obtained after applying nose R compensation to the final shaping program is used as the rough cutting shape. 1: Extended specifications The shape made by the final shaping program, without nose R compensation, is used as the rough cutting shape. Cut amount (For Specify the operation to be performed when the L system only) program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. 0: Conventional specifications A program error occurs if the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. 1: Extended specifications Rough cutting is performed by one cut if the program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut amount of the final shaping program. Specify whether to enable the M function M function synchronous tap synchronous tap cycle. 0: Invalid cycle 1: Valid Switch macro Select whether to shift the argument to the call function subprogram if nests are overlapped when per block call (G66.1) is commanded. 0: Shift argument even if nests are overlapped. 1: Do not shift arguments if nests differ. (Conventional specifications) II - 59 Setting range (unit) 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 (Default: 0) 0/1 0/1 5. # ext08 (bit6) ext08 (bit7) 1273 ext09 (PR) (bit0) ext09 (bit1) ext09 (bit2) 1274 ext10 (PR) (bit7) 1275 (PR) 1276 (PR) 1277 (PR) ext11 Items Switch corner chamfering/ corner R command format Details The corner chamfering/corner R command format is extended. 0: Command format I (conventional format) Issue a command with comma (,C and ,R). 1: Command format II In addition to command format I, commands can be issued with an address that does not have a comma. Corner chamfering: I/K or C, corner R: R Return position Select the destination to return to after a macro after macro interrupt in the fixed cycle. interrupt in fixed 0: Return to block in fixed cycle. cycle selection 1: Return to block after fixed cycle. Switch ASIN Select the ASIN calculation results range. calculation 0: вЂ“90В° to 90В° results range 1: 90В° to 270В° Switch system Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (time variable unit during automatic start). 0: 1ms unit 1: 1 hour unit Switch G71, Select whether to determine the cutting direction G72, G73 with the finished shape, or according to the cutting direction commanded finishing allowance and cutting judgment allowance when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle (G71), face rough cutting cycle (G72) or closed loop cutting cycle (G73) is commanded. 0: Conventional specifications Determined according to the finished shape program. 1: Extended specifications Determined according to the finishing allowance and cutting allowance commanded in the program. Word range Select whether to check that the operation check expression of the word date in the program is enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine program is executed. This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999 and the machine manufacture macro program. 0: Check valid 1: Check invalid Not used. ext12 ext13 (bit0) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Setting range (unit) 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 Not used. Tool life management II count type 2 0/1 Specify how and when the mount or use count is (Default: 0) incremented in tool life management II. 0: Type 1 The count is incremented when the spindle is used for cutting. 1: Type 2 The count is incremented for the tool used or mounted for one program. The increment is enabled by resetting. II - 60 5. # 1278 (PR) 1279 (PR) 1280 (PR) 1281 (PR) 1282 (PR) 1283 (PR) 1284 (PR) 1285 (PR) 1286 (PR) 1287 (PR) BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details ext14 Not used. ext15 Not used. ext16 Not used. ext17 (bit1) Tool offset addition axis selection Setting range (unit) ext18 0: Follows Tchg34 0/1 1: Plane selection Base J setting name is set as the 3rd axis compensation axis. Not used. ext19 Not used. ext20 Not used. ext21 Not used. ext22 Not used. ext23 (bit0) Workpiece coordinate display ext23 (bit3) Counter display expanded function selection ext23 (bit4) Relative coordinate display Select the mode of displaying the workpiece coordinate counter. 0: DonвЂ™t update the display immediately after workpiece coordinate data is changed. 1: Update the display immediately after workpiece coordinate data is changed. 0: Display the command value that does not consider the tool length offset amount or workpiece coordinate offset amount. 1: The counter display expanded function is validated. (bit4 to bit7) (M system) 0: Display the actual position including tool length offset. 1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool length offset. (L system) 0: Display the actual position including tool shape compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool shape compensation. II - 61 0/1 0/1 0/1 5. # ext23 (bit5) Details Setting range (unit) 0/1 ext25 (M system) 0: Display the actual position including tool radius compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding tool radius compensation. (L system) 0: Display the actual position including nose R compensation. 1: Display the machining position in terms of a program command excluding nose R compensation. Select whether to initialize the MDI buffer when MDI 0/1 operation ends, the power is turned ON again, reset is input, or emergency stop is canceled. 0: Do not clear programs registered with MDI. 1: Clear programs registered with MDI, and save only % programs. Not used. ext26 Not used. ext27 Not used. ext28 Not used. ext29 Not used. ext30 Not used. ext31 Not used. ext32 Not used. ext33 Not used. ext34 Not used. ext35 Not used. ext36 Not used. 1288 ext24 (PR) (bit0) 1289 (PR) 1290 (PR) 1291 (PR) 1292 (PR) 1293 (PR) 1294 (PR) 1295 (PR) 1296 (PR) 1297 (PR) 1298 (PR) 1299 (PR) 1300 (PR) Items Relative coordinate display BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS MDI program clear II - 62 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 10/15) # 1301 nrfchk 1302 1303 (PR) 1304 (PR) 1305 1306 AutoRP V1comN Details Setting range (unit) 0 to 2 Select the high-speed check method of the origin neighboring signal. 0: Do not check positions near the origin at high speeds. (Conventional specifications) 1: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using command machine positions. 2: Check positions near the origin at high speeds using detector feedback positions. Not used. Not used. V0comN Not used. corjug InpsTyp 1310 WtMmin 1311 WtMmax 1312 T_base 1313 TapDw1 Items Origin neighboring check method Not used. Select the parameter specification type for the G0 0/1 Deceleration or G1 deceleration check. check 0: Deceleration check specification type 1 specification G0 is specified with вЂњ#1193 inposвЂќ, and type G1+G9 with вЂњ#1223 aux07/BIT1вЂќ. 1: Deceleration check specification type 2 G0 or G1+G9 is specified with вЂњ#1193 inposвЂќ. Not used. Not used. 0 to 9999 When the T code command is issued while Tool life specifying a value that exceeds the value set in this management parameter, the value obtained by subtracting the standard set value from the command value is used as the number tool group number for tool life management. The value specified by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in this parameter, the T code is handled as a normal T code and not subjected to tool life management. When 0 is set in this parameter, the T code command always specifies a group number. (This parameter is valid for M-system tool life management II.) Specify the hole bottom wait time for synchronous 0 to 999 (ms) Synchronous tap hole bottom tapping. When the P address is specified, the greater value wait time is used as the hole bottom wait time. When an in-position check is performed at the hole bottom, dwelling for the specified time is completed after the in-position check is complete. Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 is set in #1223 aux07 bit 3 (synchronous tap in-position check improvement). II - 63 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS # 1314 TapInp Items Details Setting range (unit) Synchronous Specify the hole bottom in-position check width for 1 to 32767 tap in-position synchronous tapping. (1Вµm steps) check width Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 is set in (tap axis) #1223 aux07 bit 3 (synchronous tap in-position check improvement). 1324 Chop_R Not used. (SETUP PARAM 1. 11/15) # 1501 polyax (For L system only) 1502 G0Ipfg 1503 G1Ipfg Items Details Setting range (unit) Not used. G1 в†’ G0 deceleration check 0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the 0/1 move direction is changed from G1 to G0. G1 в†’ G1 deceleration check 0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the 0/1 move direction is changed from G1 to G1. 1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G0. 1: Perform a deceleration check when the move direction is changed from G1 to G1. 1505 ckref2 0/1 1506 0 to 60000 (mm/min) 1507 1510 1511 Second origin Specify the trigger for a check at the specified position return check in manual second original return mode. 0: Completion of spindle orientation 1: Generation of second origin return interlock signal F1_FM Upper limit of Specify the maximum value up to which the F1 digit feedrate can be changed. F1 digit feedrate Specify the constant that determines the speed F1_K F1 digit change rate per manual handle graduation in F1 digit feedrate feedrate change mode. change constant DOOR_H Shorten door Specify whether to shorten the time during which the axis is stopped when the door is opened. interlock II 0: Use the conventional axis stop time. axis stop time 1: Shorten the axis stop time. Note: When the door interlock II signal is input via a ladder, the conventional axis stop time is used. Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door DOORPm Signal input interlock II signal input for each system. device 1 for door interlock A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified. Device number 000 is invalid. II: for each Specify device number 100 when using no fixed system device number for door interlock II signal input. Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each system) II - 64 0 to 32767 0/1 000 to 100 (hexadecimal) 5. # Items 1512 DOORPs Signal input device 2 for door interlock II: for each system 1513 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 (PR) 1521 1522 (PR) 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1535 1537 to 1544 BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS expLinax expRotax mill_ax mill_C polm pols Tchg34 Details Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door interlock II signal input for each system. (Specify the same value as that of #1155.) Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for each system) Select the synchronous tap mode using the miscellaneous function code of the value set in this parameter. The M function command can be issued immediately before the tap command or in the same block. This function is valid only when 1 is set in #1272 ext08/bit 1 (Enable/disable M-function synchronous tap cycle). Note: Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. C_min C_axis Not used. Not used. C_feed C_type laxlen raxlen flclen rflch laxcmp raxcmp flccmp G01rsm millPax SnG44.1 C_leng crsax[1] to crsax[8] Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. II - 65 Setting range (unit) 000 to 100 (hexadecimal) 0 to 99999999 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 12/15) # 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1572 Items Iv0vr1 Iv0vr2 Iv0vr3 Iv0vr4 Iv0vr5 Iv0rd2 Iv0rd3 Iv0rd4 Iv0rd5 Iv0Min IvAMax IvFMin Cirorp Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. (SETUP PARAM 1. 13/15) # 1801 1802 1803 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 Items Hacc_c Macc_c Lacc_c Hcof_A Hcof_B Mcof_A Mcof_B Lcof_A Lcof_B mag_C Hcof_A Hcof_B Mcof_A Mcof_B Lcof_A Lcof_B mag_C Details Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. II - 66 Setting range (unit) 5. BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 1. 14/15) # 1901 (PR) 1902 (PR) 1903 (PR) 1904 (PR) 1905 (PR) 1906 (PR) 1907 (PR) 1908 (PR) 1909 (PR) 1910 (PR) 1911 (PR) Items station addr Not used. Din size Not used. Dout size Not used. data length Not used. baud rate Not used. stop bit Not used. parity check Not used. even parity Not used. Tout (ini) Not used. (run) clock select Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. (SETUP PARAM 1. 15/15) # Items 1925 EtherNet 1926 IP address 1927 Subnet mask 1928 Gateway address 1929 Port number 1930 Host address 1931 Host number Details Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. II - 67 Setting range (unit) 6. 6.1 6. AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 6.1 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 2. 1/8) # 2001 rapid 2002 clamp 2003 smgst (PR) Items Rapid traverse rate Details Setting range (unit) 1 to 999999 (mm/min) Set up the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. The maximum value to be set differs with mechanical systems. Cutting feedrate Define the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. 1 to 999999 (mm/min) Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this valueвЂљ the for clamp clamp will be applied at this feedrate. function Acceleration and Specify acceleration and deceleration control modes. deceleration F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 modes O T3 O T2 O T1 C 3 C1 LC R3 R1 Specify the modes in hexadecimal notation. 0 LR Note: Set 0 in null bits. Rapid traverse feed acceleration and deceleration types LR: Linear acceleration/deceleration R1: Primary delay R3: Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration Note: Designate вЂњFвЂќ with bits 0 to 3 for rapid traverse with acceleration/deceleration by software. Cutting feed acceleration and deceleration types LC: Linear acceleration/deceleration C1: Primary delay C3: Exponential acceleration and linear deceleration Note: Designate вЂњFвЂќ with bits 4 to 7 for cutting feed with acceleration/deceleration by software. (To be continued to the next page) II - 68 6. 6.1 # AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (unit) (Continued from the previous page) <Combination of acceleration and deceleration patterns> Primary delay R1=1 (C1=1) Command speed Linear to linear LR=1 (LC=1) Step Exponential to linear LR=0 (LC=0) R3=1 (C3=1) Step Parameters in parentheses are for cutting feed. R1-R3=0 (C1-C3=0) R1 > R3 when both R1 and R3 contain 1. <Stroke end stop types> Type Linear deceleration Position loop step stop Speed loop step stop Position loop step stop OT1 0 1 OT2 0 1 0 1 OT3 0 0 1 1 Deceleration by G0t1 Deceleration by 2 Г— G0t1 Stroke end signal Speed Time G0t1 G0t1 2 G0t1(OT1=1) (OT1=0) OT1 is valid under the following conditions (valid for dog type zero point return): Stop type: Linear deceleration Acceleration mode: Exponential Deceleration mode: Linear II - 69 6. 6.1 # 2004 G0tL AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (unit) G0 time constant Set up a linear control time constant for rapid traverse 1 to 4000 (ms) (linear) acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear acceleration or deceleration) or F (acceleration or deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. Speed Time G0tL 2005 G0t1 G0tL G0 time constant Set up a primary-delay time constant for rapid 1 to 5000 (ms) traverse acceleration and deceleration. (primary delay) The time constant is validated when R1 (rapid traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. Second-step time constant for acceleration and When acceleration or deceleration by software is deceleration by selected, the second-step time constant is used. software <Rapid traverse feed with primary delay> Speed Time G0t1 G0t1 <Rapid traverse feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration> Speed Time 2 G0t1 G0t1 2006 G0t2 Not used. 0 II - 70 6. 6.1 # 2007 G1tL Items G1 time constant (linear) AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (unit) Set up a linear control time constant for cutting 1 to 4000 (ms) acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F (acceleration and deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. Speed Time G1tL 2008 G1t1 G1tL G1 time Set up the primary delay time constant for cutting 1 to 5000 (ms) constant acceleration and deceleration. (primary delay) The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. Second stage time constant When acceleration or deceleration by software is for acceleration selected, the second stage time constant is used. and deceleration by <Cutting feed with primary time constant> software Speed Time G1t1 G1t1 <Cutting feed with exponential acceleration and linear deceleration> Speed Time 2 G1t1 G1t1 2009 G1t2 Not used. 0 II - 71 6. 6.1 # 2010 fwd_g Items Feed forward gain 2011 G0back G0 backlash 2012 G1back G1 backlash AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set up a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation acceleration and deceleration. The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical control error will be. However, if a mechanical vibration occurs, the set value must be reduced. Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement command in rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode. Set up the backlash compensation amount when the direction is reversed with the movement command in cutting mode. Setting range (unit) 0 to 100 (%) в€’9999 to 9999 (command unit / 2) в€’9999 to 9999 (command unit / 2) (SETUP PARAM 2. 2/8) # 2013 0T в€’ 2014 0T + Items Soft limit I в€’ soft limit I + Details Setting range (unit) Set up a soft limit area with reference to the zero point В±99999.999 (mm) of the basic mechanical coordinates. For the movable area of stored stroke limit 1, set the coordinate in the negative direction in #2013 and the coordinate in the positive direction in #2014. To narrow the available range in actual use, use the parameters #8204 OT- and #8205 OT+. When the same value (other than 0) is set in #2013 and #2014, this function is disabled. OT+ (Z) Basic mechanical coordinates OT- (X) M OT+ (X) Movable area OT- (Z) Set up a sensor position in the negative direction В±99999.999 (mm) when using the tool setter. When the TLM is used, set up the distance of a tool replacement point (reference point) for measuring the tool length from the zero point to the measurement reference point (surface). 2015 t1m1в€’ Negative direction sensor of tool setter or TLM standard length 2016 t1m1+ Set up the sensor position in the positive direction Positive when using the tool setter. direction sensor of tool setter Axis servo gain Set the position loop gain for synchronized tapping. The setting range is 1.00 to 200.00rad/s.вЂљ in 0.25 increment units. The standard setting is 10. 2017 tap_g II - 72 В±99999.999 (mm) 1.00 to 200.00 (rad/s) 6. 6.1 # 2018 no_srv Items Operation with no servo control 2019 revnum Return steps 2020 o_chkp Spindle orientation completion check during second zero point return 2021 out_f Maximum speed outside soft limit range 2022 G30SLX Validate soft limit (automatic and manual) 2023 ozfmin 2024 synerr Set up ATC speed lower limit AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set when performing test operation without connecting the drive amplifier and motor. 0: Specify normal operation. 1: Operation is possible even if units are not connected as the drive system alarm will be ignored. This is for test operation during start up and is not used normally. If 1 is set during normal operationвЂљ errors will not be detected even if they occur. Set up the steps required for reference point return for each axis. 0: Does not execute reference point return. 1 to max. number of NC axes: Sets up the steps required for reference point return. Set up the distance from the second zero point to the position for checking that the spindle orientation has completed during second zero point return. If the set value is 0, the above check is omitted. Setting range (unit) 0/1 0 to max. number of NC axes 0 to 99999.999 (mm) Set up the maximum speed outside the soft limit range. 0 to 999999 Set up this function to disable a soft limit check during the second to the fourth zero point return in both automatic and manual operation modes. 0: Enables soft limit check. 1: Disables soft limit check. Set up the minimum speed outside the soft limit range during the second to the fourth zero point return in both automatic and manual operation modes. Not used. 0/1 II - 73 0 to 999999 6. 6.2 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS 6.2 ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 2. 3/8) # Items 2025 G28rap G28 rapid traverse rate 2026 G28crp G28 approach speed 2027 G28sft 2028 grmask 2029 grspc Reference point shift distance Grip mask amount Grid interval Details Set up a rapid traverse rate for dog type reference point return command. Set up the speed of approach to the reference point in the reference point return command. This speed is attained after the system stops with deceleration by dog detection. Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10В°/min) only when using the Z-phase type encoder (#1226 aux10 bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis reference point return type. The same unit is used for both the micron and sub-micron specifications. Set up the distance from the electrical zero-point detection position to the actual machine reference point during reference point return. Set up a distance where the grid point is ignored when near-point dog OFF signals are close to that grid point during reference point return. Setting range (unit) 1 to 999999 (mm/min) 1 to 60000 (mm/min) 0 to 65535 (Вµm) 0 to 65535 (Вµm) Even for the specifications in sub-microns, set up the value in units of Вµm. The grid mask is valid by one grid. Set up a detector grid interval. в€’32767 to 999 (mm) Generally, set up the value equal to the ball screw pitch. To reduce the grid interval, use its divisors. To use 0.001 mm as minimum setup units, set up the negative value. Example) Setup value в€’1 в†’ 1.000 mm (В°) в€’1 в†’ 0.001 mm (В°) II - 74 6. 6.2 # 2030 dir (в€’) (PR) Items Reference point direction (в€’) AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS Details Set which side of the near-point dog the reference point is at during reference point return. <For dog type reference point return> Setting range (unit) 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction Direction in which zero point is established as viewed from the near-point dog Negative direction Positive direction Near-point dog dir(-)=0 dir(-)=1 2031 noref 2032 nochk 2033 zp_no Axis without Specify the axis that does not have a reference point. 0: Normal controlled axis reference point Before automatic operation starts, reference point 1: Axis without return is not required. reference point 0: Reference point The absolute and incremental commands can be Whether return completion reference point executed even if dog type (or Z phase pulse system) is checked. reference point return is not completed. return is 1: Reference point completed not Specify whether to check that the reference point return completion return is completed. checked is not checked. 0: Dog type Z phase pulse The reference point return is performed with the Z phase pulse of the spindle encoder. Set the spindle 1 to 4: Spindle No. system reference point encoder No. to be used. return spindle encoder No. II - 75 6. 6.2 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ZERO POINT RETURN PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 2. 4/8) # 2037 2038 2039 2040 G53ofs #2_rfp #3_rfp #4_rfp Items Reference point #1 to #4 Details Setting range (unit) Set up the position of the first, second, third, and fourth В±999999.999 (mm) reference points from the zero point of the basic mechanical coordinates. Basic mechanical coordinates M Reference point #1 Reference point #2 Reference point #3 II - 76 Reference point #4 6. 6.3 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS 6.3 ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS (SETUP PARAM 2. 5/8) # 2049 type (PR) 2050 absdir 2051 check 2052 absg28 2053 absm02 2054 clpush 2055 pushf 2056 aproch Items Absolute position detection method Details Specify the absolute position zero point alignment method. 0: Not absolute position detection 1: Stopper method (push with mechanical stopper) 2: Origin point alignment method (align with marked point) 3: Dog-type (align with dog and proximity switch) 4: Reference point alignment method II (align to alignment mark) (Type that does not return grid after reference alignment) 9: Simple absolute position (Not absolute position detectionвЂљ but the position when the power is turned off is registered.) Automatic initial setting is valid only when the stopper method is selected. Base point Set the direction of the absolute position reference point (grid point immediately before) seen from the machine of Z reference point for when using reference point direction alignment. Check Set the tolerable range for the movement amount (deviation amount) when the power is turned OFF. 0: Not checked 1 to 99999.999mm: If the difference of the position when the power is turned OFF and turned ON again is larger than this valueвЂљ an alarm will be output. Not used. Not used. Current limit Set up the current limit value for the initial setting when (%) detecting an absolute position with a dog-less system. The setup value is the ratio of the current limit value to the rated value. Push speed Set the feedrate for the automatic initial setting during stopper method. Approach Set the approach distance for the automatic initial setting in the push method. Approach distance: After using stopper onceвЂљ the tool returns this distanceвЂљ and then use stopper again. When set to 0вЂљ the reference point coordinates set in #2037 G53ofs will be used as the approach start position. II - 77 Setting range (unit) 0 to 9 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction 0 to 99999.999 (mm) 0 to 100 (%) 1 to 999 (mm/min) 0 to 999.999 (mm) 6. 6.3 # 2057 nrefp 2058 nrefn 2059 zerbas AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS ABSOLUTE POSITION PARAMETERS Items Near zero point + Details Set the width where the near-reference-point signal is output. (Positive direction width) When set to 0вЂљ the width is equivalent to the grid width setting. Near zero Set the width where the near-reference-point signal is output. (Negative direction width) point в€’ When set to 0вЂљ the width is equivalent to the grid width setting. Specify the position to be the zero point coordinate Select zero during absolute position initial setting. point 0: Position that was stopped during stopper parameter method and reference Specify the coordinates of the alignment mark point position when using the reference point method. 1: Grid point just before stopper Specify the coordinates of the grid point just before the alignment mark. II - 78 Setting range (unit) 0 to 32.767 (mm) 0 to 32.767 (mm) 0/1 6. 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 6/8) # Items 2061 0T_1Bв€’ 2062 0T_1B+ 2063 0T_1B type 2064 rapid2 2065 G0tL2 2066 rapid3 2067 G0tL3 2068 G0fwdg G00 feed forward gain 2069 Rcoeff 2070 div_RT (PR) 2071 s_axis (For L system only) 2072 rslimt Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. 0 to 200 (%) Specify the feed forward gain applicable to acceleration/deceleration before G00 interpolation. The greater the set value, the shorter the positioning time during in-position checking. If machine vibration occurs, decrease the set value. -100.0 to +100.0 (%) The amount of arc radius error correction can be increased or decreased between -100% to +100% for each axis. Axis arc radius error correction efficient Specify the number of divisions of one turn of the Rotational axis division rotational axis for purpose of control. Example: When 36 is set, one turn is supposed to be count 36.000. Note 1: When 0 is set, the normal rotational axis (360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed. Note 2: If this parameter is changed when the absolute position detection specification is used, absolute position data is lost. Initialization must be performed again. Not used. Not used. II - 79 0 to 999 6. 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 7/8) # Items Details 2073 zrn_dog Origin dog Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in #1226 aux10 bit 5. Note 2: When this parameter is valid, do not set the same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the near-point dog signal (R157) is input. 2074 H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the OT (+) g signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in #1226 aux10 bit 5. Note 2: When this parameter is valid, do not set the same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the OT signal (R156) is input. 2075 H/W_OT- H/W OT- Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the OT (-) g signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter. Note 1: This parameter is valid when 1 is set in #1226 aux10 bit 5. Note 2: When this parameter is valid, do not set the same device number. If the same device number exists, an emergency stop occurs. However, no device number check is performed for an axis to which a signal that ignores the OT signal (R156) is input. 2076 index_x Not used. When an in-position check is performed for G0, this 2077 G0inps G0 in-position parameter is valid. (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the width parameter that the in-position width is wider is applied.) When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid. (Applicable only to SV024) II - 80 Setting range (unit) 00 to FF (HEX) 00 to FF (HEX) 00 to FF (HEX) 0 to 32767 (0.5Вµm) 6. 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 # Items 2078 G1inps G1 in-position width 2079 2080 2081 2082 2083 2084 chcomp chwid chclsp a_rstax rot_2 G60_ax Details Setting range (unit) When an in-position check is performed for G1, this 0 to 32767 (0.5Вµm) parameter is valid. (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the parameter that the in-position width is wider is applied.) When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid. (Applicable only to SV024) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. 0/1 Unidirection Select the unidirectional positioning with G00. al positioning Select the axis for carrying out the positioning per time operation when the positioning command is issued operation regardless of the unidirectional positioning command selection and modal. 0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to the command and modal. 1: When the positioning command (G00) is issued, carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of the command and modal. <Related parameters> #8209 G60 SHIFT: The final positioning direction and distance for the unidirectional positioning command is set for each axis. II - 81 6. 6.4 AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS AXIS SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 8/8) # 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094 2095 2096 2099 2102 Items exdcax syncnt bsax_sy bsax_pl plrapid plclamp plG0tL plG0t1 plG1tL plG1t1 crncsp igConr skip_tL 2103 skip_t1 Details Setting range (unit) Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. Not used. 1 to 4000 (ms) Skip time Set up a linear control time constant for variable constant linear speed skip acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F (acceleration and deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. Skip time Set up a primary-delay time constant for variable 1 to 5000 (ms) constant speed skip acceleration and deceleration. primary delay The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed acceleration with primary delay) or C3 (exponential acceleration and and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or deceleration deceleration mode вЂњ#2003 smgstвЂќ. by software When acceleration or deceleration by software is second stage selected, the second-step time constant is used. II - 82 7. 7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (1) Details for servo parameters For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is turned ON again, the parameter is validated. Refer to the following manual for details on the motor. MELDAS AC Servo MDS-B-SVJ2 Series Specification and Instruction Manual...................... BNP-B3937 ! CAUTION ! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to вЂњ0вЂќ. No. 2201 SV001 (PR) PC1 2202 SV002 (PR) PC2 Items Details Setting range Motor side gear Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767 ratio For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration (acceleration) ratio. Machine side 1 to 32767 Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the gear ratio electronic gears may overflow and cause an alarm. 2203 SV003 PGN1 Position loop gain 1 Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is вЂњ33вЂќ. The higher the setting value is, the more precisely the command can be followed and the shorter the positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger shock is applied to the machine during acceleration/deceleration. When using the SHG control, also set SV004 (PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC). 1 to 200 (rad/s) 2204 SV004 PGN2 Position loop gain 2 When using the SHG control, also set SV003 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). When not using the SHG control, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 to 999 (rad/s) 2205 SV005 VGN1 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 999 Set this according to the load inertia size. The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the control will be, however, vibration tends to occur. If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%. The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the value at the time when the vibration stops. 2206 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 2207 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. The standard setting is вЂњ1364вЂќ. During the SHG control, the standard setting is вЂњ1900вЂќ. Adjust the value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a time. Raise this value to improve contour tracking precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz). 1 to 9999 2208 SV008 VIA Speed loop lead compensation II - 83 7. No. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2209 SV009 IQA Current loop q axis lead compensation 1 to 20480 Set the gain of current loop. As this setting is determined by the motorвЂ™s electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for each type of motor. 1 to 20480 Set the standard values for all the parameters depending on each motor type. 2210 SV010 IDA Current loop d axis lead compensation 2211 SV011 IQG Current loop q axis gain 1 to 2560 2212 SV012 IDG Current loop d axis gain 1 to 2560 2213 SV013 ILMT Current limit value 2214 SV014 ILMTsp Current limit Set the current (torque) limit value in a special value in special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper control control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and directions.) Set to вЂњ500вЂќ when not using. 2215 SV015 FFC Acceleration rate feed forward gain Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit values for both + and - direction.) When the value is вЂњ500вЂќ (a standard setting), the maximum torque is determined by the specification of the motor. 0 to 500 (Stall [rated] current %) 0 to 500 (Stall [rated] current %) When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999 large, apply this parameter to the axis that is (%) delaying. The standard setting value is вЂњ0вЂќ. For the SHG control, set to вЂњ100вЂќ. To adjust a relative error in acceleration/ deceleration, increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time. II - 84 7. No. 2216 SV016 LMC1 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Lost motion compensation 1 Details Setting range Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at quadrant change is too large. This compensates the torque at quadrant change. This is valid only when the lost motion compensation (SV027 (SSF1/lmc)) is selected. Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=01 -1 to 200 Set the compensation amount based on the motor (%) torque before the quadrant change. The standard setting is вЂњ100вЂќ. Setting to вЂњ0вЂќ means the compensation amount is zero. Normally, use Type 2. Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10 -1 to 100 Set the compensation amount based on the stall (Stall [rated] (rated) current of the motor. current %) The standard setting is double of the friction torque. Setting to вЂњ0вЂќ means the compensation amount is zero. When you wish different compensation amount depending on the direction When SV041 (LMC2) is вЂњ0вЂќ, compensate with the value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and -directions. If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this and SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on other settings.) When вЂњ-1вЂќ is set, the compensation wonвЂ™t be performed in the direction of the command. II - 85 7. No. 2217 (PR) SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV017 Servo SPEC specification selection F E 7 abs 6 Details D C 5 vdir 4 A Setting range 9 8 3 mc 2 1 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Meaning when вЂњ0вЂќ is set Deceleration control stop dmk (SVJ2 standard) B 0 dmk Meaning when вЂњ1вЂќ is set Dynamic brake stop mc Contactor control output invalid Contactor control output valid HA053N to HA33N motor vdir Detector installation position standard (A, C) HA053N to HA33N motor Detector installation position 90 degrees (B, D) abs Incremental control Absolute position control (Note) Set to вЂњ0вЂќ for bits with no particular description. 2218 (PR) SV018 Ball screw PIT pitch Set the ball screw pitch. Set to вЂњ360вЂќ for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767 (mm/rev) 2219 (PR) SV019 Position RNG1 detector resolution For both parameters, set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor detector. 8 to 100 (kp/rev) Motor model name 2220 (PR) SV020 Speed RNG2 detector resolution HC*-E42/A42/A47, HC*R-E42/A42/A47 Setting value SV019 SV020 100 100 25 25 HC-SF, HC-RF 16 16 HA-FF, HC-MF 8 8 HA*N-E42/A42 HC*-E33/A33, HC*R-E33/A33 HA*N-E33/A33 2221 SV021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 300 OLT detection time Set to вЂњ60вЂќ as a standard. (For machine tool builder (s) constant adjustment.) 2222 SV022 Overload OLL detection level Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in 50 to 180 respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to вЂњ150вЂќ as a (Stall [rated] standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.) current %) II - 86 7. No. 2223 SV023 OD1 Items SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Details Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. error <Standard setting value> detection Rapid traverse rate width during (mm/min) servo ON OD1=OD2= /2 (mm) 60*PGN1 Setting range 0 to 32767 (mm) When вЂњ0вЂќ is set, the excessive error detection will not be performed. 2224 SV024 INP In-position detection width Set the in-position detection width. Set the accuracy required for the machine. The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer. The standard setting is вЂњ50вЂќ. II - 87 0 to 32767 (Вµm) 7. No. 2225 (PR) SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV025 MTYP F Motor/ Detector type Details D C E B pen 7 6 Setting range 9 8 A ent 5 4 3 2 1 0 mtyp bit Explanation Set the motor type. Set1 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x ting 2 x0 HA40N 3 mtyp x1 HA80N 4 x2 HA100N 5 x3 HA200N 6 x4 7 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF 0 Setting 9x x0 HC-MF43 x1 HC-MF73 x2 x3 x4 Ax Bx 7x 8x HA-FF43 HA-FF63 HA43N HA83N HA103N HA93N HA-FF053 HA-FF13 HA-FF23 HA-FF33 Cx HC52 or HC53 or HC-SF52 HC-SF53 HC102 or HC103 or HC-SF102 HC-SF103 HC152 or HC153 or HC-SF152 HC-SF153 HC202 or HC203 or HC-SF202 HC-SF203 HC352 or HC-SF353 HC-SF352 Dx HA053N HA13N HA23N HA33N Ex Fx HC103R or HC-RF103 HC153R or HC-RF153 HC203R or HC-RF203 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC HC-MF053 xD HC-MF13 xE HC-MF23 xF (To be continued to the next page) II - 88 7. No. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range (Continued from the previous page) bit Explanation Set the speed detector type. 8 Set to вЂњ2вЂќ. 9 ent A B Set the position detector type. C Set to вЂњ2вЂќ. D pen E F 2226 SV026 OD2 Excessive error detection width during servo OFF 2227 Servo function selection 1 SV027 SSF1 Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767 For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of (mm) SV023 (OD1). When вЂњ0вЂќ is set, the excessive error detection will not be performed. F E D C B A 9 8 aflt zrn2 ovs lmc 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 vfct bit Meaning when вЂњ0вЂќ is set 0 zup Vertical axis lift-up control stop 0 zup Meaning when вЂњ1вЂќ is set Vertical axis lift-up control start 1 2 3 Set the jitter compensation No. of compensation pulses with a vfct binary. 5 00: Jitter compensation invalid 01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse 10: Jitter compensation 2 pulses 11: Jitter compensation 3 pulses 6 7 Set the compensation amount with SV016 (LMC1) and SV041 8 lmc (LMC2). 9 00: Lost motion compensation stop 01: Lost motion compensation type 1 10: Lost motion compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited Set the compensation amount with SV031 (OVS1) and SV042 A ovs (OVS2). B 00: Overshooting compensation stop 01: Overshooting compensation type 1 10: Overshooting compensation type 2 11: Setting prohibited C D E zrn2 Set to вЂњ1вЂќ. F aflt Adoptive filter stops Adoptive filter starts 4 (Note) Set to вЂњ0вЂќ for bits with no particular description. 2228 SV028 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 2229 SV029 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 II - 89 7. No. Items SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Details Setting range 2230 SV030 IVC Voltage dead time compensation When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 200 non-energized time will be compensated. (%) Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated. When not using, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2231 SV031 OVS1 Overshooting compensation 1 Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This compensates the motor torque during positioning. This is valid only when the overshooting compensation SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. -1 to 100 (Stall [rated] current %) Type 1: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=01 Set the compensation amount based on the motorвЂ™s stall (rated) current. Increase by 1% and determine the amount that overshooting doesnвЂ™t occur. In Type 1, compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting wonвЂ™t be performed. Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit11, 10 (ovs)=10 Use this if you perform the overshooting compensation during the feed forward control during circular cutting. The setting method is the same in Type 1. When you wish different compensation amount depending on the direction When SV042 (OVS2) is вЂњ0вЂќ, compensate with the value of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and -directions. If you wish to change the compensation amount depending on the command direction, set this and SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the directions may be opposite depending on other settings.) When вЂњ-1вЂќ is set, the compensation wonвЂ™t be performed in the direction of the command. 2232 SV032 TOF Torque offset Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined axis. II - 90 -100 to 100 (Stall [rated] current %) 7. No. 2233 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV033 SSF2 Servo function selection 2 F E Details D C B Setting range 9 8 A afs 7 6 5 4 3 2 fhz2 1 0 nfd bit Meaning when вЂњ0вЂќ is set Meaning when вЂњ1вЂќ is set 0 Set the filter depth for Notch filter (SV038: FHz1). 1 The control is stabilized by making the filter shallower. 2 nfd Value 0 2 4 6 8 A C E Depth Infntly 3 -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2 (dB) deep DeepГ… Г† Shallow 4 Set the operation frequency of Notch filter 2. fhz2 5 00: No operation 01:2250Hz 10:1125Hz 11:750Hz 6 7 Set the vibration sensitivity of the adaptive filter. If the filter depth 8 is not deep enough (generally 70% or more) and the vibration 9 afs cannot be sufficiently eliminated, raise the value. A B C D E F (Note) Set to вЂњ0вЂќ for bits with no particular description. II - 91 7. No. 2234 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV034 SSF3 Servo function selection 3 F E 7 daf2 6 daf1 Details D C 5 dac2 4 dac1 B A 3 2 Setting range 9 8 1 0 mon bit Meaning when вЂњ0вЂќ is set Meaning when вЂњ1вЂќ is set NC servo monitor MAX current display data changeover Set1 MAX current 1 MAX current 2 ting Max. current command Max. current command mon 2 0 value when power is value for one second (%) turned ON (%) Max. current command Max. current FB value for 3 1 value for one second (%) one second (%) Max. current FB value Max. current FB value for 2 when power is turned ON one second (%) (%) 3 Load inertia rate (%) Adaptive filter operation Adaptive filter operation 4 frequency (Hz) gain (%) PN bus voltage (V) Regenerative operation 5 frequency monitor (The number of times/sec) Estimated max. torque Max. current FB value for 6 for one second (%) one second (%) Estimated max. torque Max. disturbance torque 7 for one second (%) for two seconds (%) 8 to F Setting prohibited 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F dac1 dac2 daf1 daf2 D/A output ch.1 overflow setting D/A output ch.2 overflow setting D/A output ch.1 no filter D/A output ch.2 no filter D/A output ch.1 clamp setting D/A output ch.2 clamp setting D/A output ch.1 filter setting D/A output ch.2 filter setting (Note) Set to вЂњ0вЂќ for bits with no particular description. II - 92 7. No. 2235 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV035 SSF4 Servo function selection 4 F cl2n E 7 6 bit Details D C clG1 5 4 Meaning when вЂњ0вЂќ is set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D B A Setting range 9 8 3 2 1 0 Meaning when вЂњ1вЂќ is set Collision detection method 1 Set the collision detection level during cutting feed (G1). clG1 The G1 collision detection level=SV060*clG1. When clG1=0, the collision detection method 1 during cutting feed E wonвЂ™t function. Collision detection method 2 Collision detection method 2 F cl2n valid invalid (Note) Set to вЂњ0вЂќ for bits with no particular description. II - 93 7. No. 2236 (PR) SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items SV036 PTYP F Regenerative resistor type Details D C E B amp 7 6 Setting range 9 8 A rtyp 5 4 3 2 1 0 emgx bit Explanation Always set to вЂњ0(0000)вЂќ. 0 1 2 3 Set the external emergency stop function. (Setting is prohibited for values with no description.) Set5 emgx Explanation ting 6 0 External emergency stop invalid 7 4 External emergency stop valid 4 8 9 A B C D E F Set the regenerative resistor type. SetExplanation ting rtyp Drive unit standard built-in resistor (SVJ2-01 0 doesnвЂ™t have a built-in resistor) 1 Setting prohibited 2 MR-RB032 3 MR-RB12 or GZG200W390HMK MR-RB32 or GZG200W1200HMK: 3 units 4 connected in parallel MR-RB30 or GZG200W390HMK: 3 units 5 connected in parallel MR-RB50 or GZG300W390HMK: 3 units 6 connected in parallel 7 to F Setting prohibited Always set to вЂњ0(0000)вЂќ. amp II - 94 7. No. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items 2237 SV037 JL Load inertia scale Details Set вЂњthe motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertiaвЂќ in respect to the motor inertia. SV037 (JL) = Jl+Jm Jm Setting range 0 to 5000 (%) *100 Jm: Motor inertia Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia 2238 SV038 FHz1 Notch filter frequency 1 Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration occurs. (Valid at 72 or more) When not using, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 to 3000 (Hz) 2239 SV039 LMCD Lost motion compensation timing Set this when the lost motion compensation timing doest not match. Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time. 0 to 2000 (ms) 2240 SV040 LMCT Non-sensitive Set the non-sensitive bad of the lost motion band in feed compensation and overshooting compensation forward control during the feed forward control. When вЂњ0вЂќ is set, the actual value that will be set is 2Вµm. Adjust by increasing by 1Вµm. 0 to 100 2241 SV041 LMC2 Lost motion compensation 2 Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set the lost motion compensation amount to be different depending on the command directions. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ as a standard. -1 to 200 (Stall [rated] current %) 2242 SV042 OVS2 Overshooting compensation 2 Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set the overshooting compensation amount to be different depending on the command directions. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ as a standard. -1 to 100 (Stall [rated] current %) 2243 SV043 OBS1 Disturbance observer filter frequency Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000 The standard setting is вЂњ300вЂќ. Lower the setting by (rad/s) 50 at a time if vibration occurs. To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2244 SV044 OBS2 Disturbance observer gain Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard 0 to 1000 setting is вЂњ100вЂќ to вЂњ300вЂќ. (%) To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL) and SV043 (OBS1). When not using, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2245 SV045 TRUB Frictional torque Set the frictional torque when using the collision detection function. 0 to 100 (Stall [rated] current %) Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 2246 SV046 (Вµm) 2247 SV047 EC Inductive voltage compensation gain Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to 0 to 200 вЂњ100вЂќ as a standard. (%) If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak, lower the gain. 2248 SV048 EMGrt Vertical axis Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis from 0 to 2000 drop prevention dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the brake (ms) time works when the emergency stop occurs. Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the value where the axis does not drop. II - 95 7. No. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2249 SV049 PGN1sp Position loop gain 1 in spindle synchronous control Set the position loop gain during the spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). Set the same value as the value of the spindle parameter, position loop gain in synchronous control. When performing the SHG control, set this with SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp). 1 to 200 (rad/s) 2250 PGN2sp Position loop gain 2 in spindle synchronous control Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 0 to 999 (SHGCsp) if you wish to perform the SHG control in (rad/s) the spindle synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). When not performing the SHG control, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2251 SV051 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 2252 SV052 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON in a special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper control, etc.). If вЂњ0вЂќ is set, excessive error detection wonвЂ™t be performed when servo ON during a special control. 0 to 32767 (mm) 2254 SV054 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 2255 SV055 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 to 5000 (ms) 2253 SV053 OD3 Excessive error detection width in special control 2256 SV056 EMGt Deceleration time constant at emergency stop Set the time constant used for the deceleration control at emergency stop. Set a length of time that takes from rapid traverse rate (rapid) to stopping. Normally, set the same value as the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant. 2257 SV057 SHGC SHG control gain When performing the SHG control, set this with S003 0 to 999 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). (rad/s) When not performing the SHG control, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2258 SV058 SHGCsp SHG control gain in spindle synchronous control Set this with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (PGN2sp) 0 to 999 if you wish to perform the SHG control in the spindle (rad/s) synchronous control (synchronous tapping, synchronous control with spindle/C axis). When not performing the SHG control, set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 2259 SV059 TCNV Collision detection torque estimating gain To use the collision detection function, set the torque 0 to 5000 estimating gain. In the case of MDS-B-SVJ2, the (%) value is the same as the load inertia ratio that includes the motor inertia. (=SV037:JL) If acceleration/deceleration is performed after setting SV034.mon=3 and SV060=0, the load inertia ratio will be displayed on the NC monitor screen. 2260 SV060 TLMT Collision When using the collision detection function, set the detection level collision detection level during the G0 feeding. If вЂњ0вЂќ is set, none of the collision detection function will work. II - 96 0 to 200 (Stall [rated] current %) 7. No. Items 2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. 2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No. 2263 SV063 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 output scale 2264 SV064 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 output scale 2265 SV065 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Details Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output channel. Setting range 0 to 102 When вЂњ0вЂќ is set, output is done with the standard -32768 to output unit. 32767 Set other than вЂњ0вЂќ when you wish to change the unit. Set the scale with a 1/256 unit. When вЂњ256вЂќ is set, (Unit: 1/256) the output unit will be the same as the standard output unit. Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. II - 97 0 7. SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (2) Initial setting value Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 PC1 SV002 PC2 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 VIA SV009 IQA SV010 IDA SV011 IQG SV012 IDG SV013 ILMT SV014 ILMTsp SV015 FFC SV016 LMC1 SV017 SPEC SV018 PIT SV019 RNG1 SV020 RNG2 SV021 OLT SV022 OLL SV023 OD1 SV024 INP SV025 MTYP SV026 OD2 SV027 SSF1 SV028 SV029 SV030 IVC SV031 OVS1 SV032 TOF HC 52 HC 102* HC 102 HC 152* HC 152 HC 202* HC 202 HC 352* 06 07 10 10 20 10 20 20 33 0 50 0 0 1364 8192 8192 512 512 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B0 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B1 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 50 0 0 1364 8192 8192 384 384 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B1 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B2 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 50 0 0 1364 8192 8192 384 384 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B2 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 115 0 0 1364 2048 2048 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B3 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 384 384 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B3 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 130 0 0 1364 2048 2048 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22B4 4000 0 0 0 0 0 II - 98 7. Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 JL SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 EC SV048 EMGrt SV049 PGN1sp SV050 PGN2sp SV051 SV052 SV053 OD3 SV054 SV055 SV056 EMGt SV057 SHGC SV058 SHGCsp SV059 TCNV SV060 TLMT SV061 DA1NO SV062 DA2NO SV063 DA1MPY SV064 DA2MPY SV065 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC 52 HC 102* HC 102 HC 152* HC 152 HC 202* HC 202 HC 352* 06 07 10 10 20 10 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 II - 99 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7. Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 PC1 SV002 PC2 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 VIA SV009 IQA SV010 IDA SV011 IQG SV012 IDG SV013 ILMT SV014 ILMTsp SV015 FFC SV016 LMC1 SV017 SPEC SV018 PIT SV019 RNG1 SV020 RNG2 SV021 OLT SV022 OLL SV023 OD1 SV024 INP SV025 MTYP SV026 OD2 SV027 SSF1 SV028 SV029 SV030 IVC SV031 OVS1 SV032 TOF SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC 53 HC 103 HC 153 HC 203* 06 10 20 20 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22C0 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22C1 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 80 0 0 1364 4096 4096 256 256 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22C2 4000 0 0 0 0 0 33 0 100 0 0 1364 2048 2048 200 200 500 500 0 0 0000 60 150 50 22C3 4000 0 0 0 0 0 II - 100 7. Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 JL SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 EC SV048 EMGrt SV049 PGN1sp SV050 PGN2sp SV051 SV052 SV053 OD3 SV054 SV055 SV056 EMGt SV057 SHGC SV058 SHGCsp SV059 TCNV SV060 TLMT SV061 DA1NO SV062 DA2NO SV063 DA1MPY SV064 DA2MPY SV065 SERVO PARAMETERS 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC 53 HC 103 HC 153 HC 203* 06 10 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 II - 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7. 7.2 SERVO PARAMETERS SUPPLEMENT 7.2 SUPPLEMENT 7.2.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS (1) MDS-B-SVJ2 (a) D/A output specifications Item No. of channels Output cycle Output precision Output voltage range Output scale setting Output pins Function Option Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Explanation 2ch 888Вµs (min. value) 8bit -10V to 0 to +10V В±1/256 to В±128 times CN3 connector MO1 = pin 4 MO2 = pin 14 GND = pin 1,11 Offset amount adjustment function Output clamp function Low path filter function Relay terminal: MR-J2CN3TM Connect from the CN3 connector using the SH21 cable as a lead-in wire. CN3 Connector Signal Pin Signal LG 11 LG 12 SG 13 MBR MO1 14 MO2 COM 15 MC 16 17 18 19 VDD 20 EMGX II - 102 7. 7.2 SERVO PARAMETERS SUPPLEMENT (b) Setting the output data Set the No. of the data to be outputted to each D/A output channel. # 2261 No. SV061 Abbrev DA1NO 2262 SV062 DA2NO No. Parameter name D/A output channel 1 data No. D/A output channel 2 data No. Output data 0 1 0V test output Speed feedback 2 Current feedback 3 Speed command 4 Current command 5 6 V-phase current value W-phase current-value 7 Estimated disturbance torque 8 Collision detection disturbance torque 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Position feedback (stroke) Position feedback (pulse) Position droop Position droop (x10) Position droop (x100) Feedrate (Fв€†T) Feedrate (Fв€†T x 10) Model position droop Model position droop (x10) Model position droop (x100) q-axis current cumulative value d-axis current cumulative value Motor load level Amplifier load level Regenerative load level PN bus wire voltage Speed cumulative item 26 Cycle counter 27 Excessive error detection amount 28 Collision detection estimated torque 29 30 31 to 99 100 Position command (stroke) Position command (pulse) 5V test output 101 Saw-tooth wave test output 102 Recutangular wave test output 103 to Setting prohibited II - 103 Standard Output output unit cycle For offset amount adjustment 1000rpm / 2V 888Вµs Stall (rated) 888Вµs 100% / 2V 1000rpm / 2V 888Вµs Stall (rated) 888Вµs 100% / 2V 10A / V 888Вµs 10A / V 888Вµs Stall (rated) 888Вµs 100% / 2V Stall (rated) 888Вµs 100% / 2V 100mm / V 3.55ms 10Вµm / V 3.55ms mm / V 3.55ms 100Вµm / V 3.55ms 10Вµm / V 3.55ms 10000(mm/min) / V 888Вµs 1000(mm/min) / V 888Вµs mm / V 3.55ms 100Вµm / V 3.55ms 10Вµm / V 3.55ms вЂ“ 888Вµs вЂ“ 888Вµs 100% / 5V 113.7ms 100% / 5V 113.7ms 100% / 5V 910.2ms 50V / V (1/50) 888Вµs вЂ“ 888Вµs 0-5V (Regardless 888Вµs of resolution) mm / V 3.55ms Stall (rated) 888Вµs 100% / 2V 100mm / V 3.55ms 10Вµm / V 3.55ms -5 to 5V Cycle: 113.7ms 0 to 5V Cycle: 227.5ms 888Вµs 888Вµs 7. 7.2 SERVO PARAMETERS SUPPLEMENT (c) Setting the output scale When вЂњ0вЂњ is set, the output will be made with the standard output unit. To change the output unit, set a value other than вЂњ0вЂќ. The scale is set with a 1/256 unit. When 256 is set, the unit will be the same as the standard output. # 2263 No. SV063 Abbrev DA1MPY 2264 SV064 DA2MPY Parameter name D/A output channel 1 output scale D/A output channel 2 output scale (Example 1) When SV061 = 5, SV063 = 2560 The V-phase current value will be output with 1 A/V unit to D/A output ch.1. (Example 2) When SV063 = 11, SV064 = 128 The position droop will be output with a 2mm/Vunit to D/A output ch.2. II - 104 7. 7.2 SERVO PARAMETERS SUPPLEMENT 7.2.2 ELECTRONIC GEARS The servo amplifier has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios calculated from multiple parameters as shown below. However, each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be less than 32767. If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No. 2301 will be output. If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications must be revised so that the electronic gears are within the specifications range. Reduced fraction of ELG1 ELG2 = RNG1 x PC2 PIT x PC1 x IUNIT (Reduced fraction) IUNIT = 2/NC command unit (Вµm) 1Вµm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1Вµm : IUNIT = 20 When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied. ELG1 в‰¤ 32767 ELG2 в‰¤ 32767 II - 105 7. 7.2 SERVO PARAMETERS SUPPLEMENT 7.2.3 LOST MOTION COMPENSATION When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the + direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, the command direction is CCW. This rotation direction can be set with the CNC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the В± will differ for some servo parameters according to this motor rotation direction. The servo parameters affected by CW/CCW are shown below. SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2) SV031 (OVS1), SV042 (OVS2) (When different values are set for SV016 and SV041) (When different values are set for SV031 and SV042) <Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction, the compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity. CW CCW A X: SV041 X: SV016 B Y: SV016 Y: SV041 C X: SV016 X: SV041 D Y: SV041 Y: SV016 +Y The Y axis command direction changes from the + to вЂ“ direction. D A -X C The X axis command direction changes from the + to вЂ“ direction. +X The X axis command direction changes from the вЂ“ to + direction. -Y B The Y axis command direction changes from the вЂ“ to + direction. (Note) The setting value for the parameter is вЂњ0вЂќ or вЂњ-1вЂќ, the compensation amount is determined as shown below. Setting value for SV016 Setting value for SV041 (Setting value for SV031) (Setting value for SV041) 0 Compensation amount in + direction Compensation amount in - direction 0 No compensation No compensation n 0 n n 0 m m m n m n m n -1 n No compensation -1 m No compensation m II - 106 8.1 8. 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.1 SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS For parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The setting is validated after the power is turned ON again. No. Items 3001 slimit 1 3002 2 3003 3 3004 4 3005 smax 1 3006 2 3007 3 3008 4 3009 ssift 1 3010 2 3011 3 3012 4 3013 stap 1 3014 2 3015 3 3016 4 3017 stapt 1 3018 2 3019 3 3020 4 Limit rotation speed Details Set spindle rotation speed for maximum motor rotation speed with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. (Set the spindle rotation speed for the S analog output 10V.) Setting range (Unit) 0 to 99999 (r/min) Maximum Set maximum spindle speed with gears 00, 01, rotation speed 10, 11. Set the value that is equal to or larger than "slimit" value. By comparing the S command value of gear 1 to 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically. Shift rotation speed Set spindle rotation speed for gear shifting with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. 0 to 32767 (r/min) (Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nicks when changing gears. Tap rotation speed Set maximum spindle rotation speed during tap cycle with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. 0 to 99999 (r/min) Tap time constant Set time constants for constant inclination synchronized tapping for gears 00, 01, 10, 11 (linear acceleration/deceleration pattern). 1 to 5000 (ms) II - 107 8.1 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Relationship between spindle limit rotation speed and maximum spindle rotation speed Output voltage (V) 10V Spindle rotation speed (r/min) 0 smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n) Limit rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting) Maximum rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting) Set "0" for any unused gears. Relation between the spindle limit rotation speed and the spindle tap time constant (for the constant inclination synchronized tapping) Spindle rotation speed (r/min) Spindle rotation speed (r/min) slimt(n) slimt(n) slimt2 slimt1 S command Time (ms) Time (ms) 0 stapt1 Execution time constant stapt2 stapt(n) stapt(n) II - 108 8.1 # Items 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Set the spindle orientation rotation speed. Set the rotation speed for when the spindle rotates at the constant rotation speed. Setting range (Unit) 3021 sori Orientation rotation speed 3022 sgear Encoder gear Set the gear ratio of the spindle to the encoder. ratio 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/4 3: 1/8 3023 smini Minimum rotation speed Set the minimum rotation speed of the spindle. If an S command instructs the rotation speed below this setting, the spindle rotates at the minimum rotation speed set with this parameter. 0 to 32767 (r/min) 3024 sout (PR) Spindle connection Set the type of the spindle to be connected. 0: No connection with the spindle 1: Serial connection (bus) 2 to 5: Analog output 0 to 5 3025 enc-on Spindle encoder 0 to 2 3026 cs_ori Selection of winding in orientation mode Set connection information of the spindle encoder. 0: No connection 1: Spindle connection (Spindle encoder connection check function valid.) 2: Serial connection of encoder 0: Perform orientation using the winding selected when the orientation command is issued. 1: Use winding L whenever the orientation command is issued. 3027 cs_syn Selection of winding in spindle synchronou s mode 3028 sprcmm L system tap Set the M code of the spindle forward run/reverse 0 to 999999 cycle spindle run command. forward run/ High-order three digits : reverse run M The spindle forward run command's M code command is set. Low-order three digits : The spindle reverse run command's M code is set. 0: The winding H/L is selected by the actual spindle rotation speed (calculated from commanded rotation speed) when spindle synchronous control starts. (The winding is not switched during synchronous control. The control is carried out with the winding selected at start.) If the actual spindle rotation speed is less than SP020, the winding L is selected, and if more than the value, the winding H is selected. 1: Use winding H whenever the spindle synchronous command is issued. II - 109 0 to 32767 (r/min) 0/1 0/1 8.1 # 3029 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items tapsel 3030 mbsel (PR) 3031 smcp_no (PR) Asynchronous tap gear selection Selection of magnetic bearings Amplifier I/F channel No. (spindle) Details Specify whether to use the tap spindle rotation speed or maximum spindle rotation speed for the gear that is selected when an asynchronous tap command is issued. 0: Tap spindle rotation speed 1: Maximum spindle rotation speed This parameter is valid only when the M-function synchronous tap cycle enable parameter (#1272 ext08 bit1) is ON. Select whether to use magnetic bearings. 0: Magnetic bearings invalid 1: Magnetic bearings valid Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting a spindle amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to "0000". Set "0000" when using an analog spindle. Using a 4-digit number, set the amplifier interface channel No. and which axis in that channel is to be used when connecting a magnetic bearing amplifier. High-order two digits : Amplifier interface channel No. Low-order two digits : Axis No. When using the conventional fixed layout, set all axes to "0000". Set the spindle rotation speed at which the step-2 acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be switched at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11. Setting range (Unit) 0/1 0/1 0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207 3032 mbmcp_no (PR) Amplifier I/F channel No. (magnetic bearing) 3037 tapt 21 3038 22 3039 23 3040 24 Synchronized 0 to 99999 tapping (r/min) Switching spindle rotation speed 2 Synchronized Set the time constant to reach Synchronized tapping 1 to 5000 (ms) tapping switching spindle rotation speed 2 (#3037 to #3040) at Switching time gear 00, 01, 10, or 11. constant 2 3041 tapt 21 3042 22 3043 23 3044 24 3045 tapt 31 3046 32 3047 33 3048 34 3049 spt 3050 sprlv 0000 0101 to 0107 0201 to 0207 Synchronized Set the time constant to reach the maximum rotation 1 to 5000 (ms) tapping spindle speed (#3005 to #3008) at gear 00, 01, 10, or Switching time 11. constant 3 Spindle synchronization acceleration/ deceleration time constant Spindle synchronization rotation speed attainment level Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for 0 to 9999 (ms) when the spindle synchronization command's rotation speed changes during spindle synchronous control. The spindle rotation speed synchronization complete 0 to 4095 (pulse) signal will turn ON when the difference of the (1 pulse = reference spindle and synchronous spindle actual 0.088В°) rotation speeds is less than the level set for the synchronous spindle rotation speed command value during spindle synchronous control. II - 110 8.1 # 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3051 spplv Spindle phase synchronization attainment level The spindle phase synchronization complete 0 to 4095 (pulse) signal will turn ON when the phase difference (1 pulse = 0.088В°) of the reference spindle and synchronous spindle is less than the set level during spindle phase synchronization control. 3052 spplr Spindle motor spindle relative polarity Set the spindle motor and spindle's relative polarity. Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation 0: Positive polarity 1: Negative polarity : Positive polarity Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation : Negative polarity 3053 sppst Spindle encoder Set the deviation amount from the spindle's Z -phase position reference position to the spindle encoder's Z phase. The deviation amount is obtained using the clockwise direction looking from the front of the spindle as the positive direction. 0 to 359999 (1/1000В°) 3054 sptc1 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 1 Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0 to 99999 (r/min) 3055 sptc2 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 2 Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0 to 99999 (r/min) 3056 sptc3 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 3 Set the spindle speed for changing the 3rd step's acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0 to 99999 (r/min) 3057 sptc4 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 4 Set the spindle speed for changing the 4th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0 to 99999 (r/min) 3058 sptc5 Spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 5 Set the spindle speed for changing the 5th step's acceleration/deceleration time constant. 0 to 99999 (r/min) II - 111 8.1 # Items 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Details Setting range (Unit) 3059 sptc6 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 6th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min) synchroniza- acceleration/deceleration time constant. tion multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 6 3060 sptc7 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 7th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min) synchroniza- acceleration/deceleration time constant. tion multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 7 3061 spdiv1 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 1 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (sptc1) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 0 to 127 3062 spdiv2 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 2 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 0 to 127 3063 spdiv3 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 3 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 0 to 127 3064 spdiv4 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 4 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 0 to 127 II - 112 8.1 # 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS SPINDLE BASE SPECIFICATIONS PARAMETERS Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3065 spdiv5 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 5 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 to 127 between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 3066 spdiv6 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 6 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 to 127 between the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 3067 spdiv7 Magnification for time constant changeover speed 7 Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 to 127 for the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) and higher as a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt). 3068 symtm1 Phase synchronization start confirmation time Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attained before phase synchronization control is started. When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms. 3069 symtm2 Phase synchronization end confirmation time Set the time to wait for phase synchronization 0 to 9999 (ms) control to end as the time for the rotation speed to reach the attainment range. When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100" or less is set, the time will be 100ms. 3070 syprt Phase synchronization speed Set the fluctuation amount to change the 0 to 100 (%) synchronous spindle rotation speed during phase synchronization control as the command speed and rate. When "0" is set, the amount will be 100%. 3071 (Not used.) 3072 (Not used.) II - 113 0 to 9999 (ms) 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The valid spindle parameters will differ according to the motor and amplifier type. Follow the correspondence table given below, and set the correct parameters. The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual .......... BNP-B3759 The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi. ! CAUTION ! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to вЂњ0вЂќ. No. Items Magnetic detector and motor builtin encoder orientationmode position loop gain Encoder orientation-mo de position loop gain 3201 SP001 PGM 3202 SP002 PGE 3203 SP003 3204 Orientation in-position width Orientation SP005 OSP mode changing speed limit value Orientation SP006 CSP mode deceleration rate SP007 OPST In-position shift amount for orientation 3205 (PR) 3206 3207 SP004 OINP 3208 SP008 3209 SP009 PGT 3210 SP010 PGS Synchronous tapping position loop gain Spindle synchronous position loop gain Setting range Details Standard setting As the set value is larger, the orientation time 0 to 1000 becomes shorter and servo rigidity is (0.1 1/s) increased. On the contrary, however, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 100 As the set value is larger, the orientation time 0 to 1000 becomes shorter and servo rigidity is (0.1 1/s) increased. On the contrary, however, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 100 Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output. 16 1 to 2880 (1/16В°) 0 Set the motor speed limit value to be used 0 to 32767 0 when the speed loop is changed to the (r/min) position loop in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value. As the set value is larger, the orientation time 1 to 1000 20 becomes shorter. On the contrary, however, the machine becomes likely to overshoot. Set the stop position for orientation. 0 to 4095 0 Set the value by dividing 360В° by 4096. Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 Set the spindle position loop gain in synchronous tapping mode. 1 to 100 (1/s) 15 Set the spindle position loop gain in spindle synchronization mode. 1 to 100 (1/s) 15 II - 114 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3211 to 3216 SP011 to SP016 3217 (PR) SP017 TSP 3218 (PR) Setting range Details Use not possible. Standard setting 0 0 Maximum motor Set the maximum motor speed of the speed spindle. 1 to 32767 (r/min) 6000 SP018 ZSP Motor zero speed 1 to 1000 (r/min) 50 3219 (PR) SP019 CSN1 Speed cushion 1 Set the time constant for a speed command from "0" to the maximum speed. (This parameter is invalid in position loop mode.) 0 to 32767 (10ms) 30 3220 (PR) SP020 SDTS Speed detection Set the motor speed so for which speed 0 to 32767 set value detection output is performed. (r/min) Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP). 600 3221 SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 10 Set the motor speed for which zero-speed output is performed. Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001. 0 to 120 (%) 3222 (PR) SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 1000 speed control mode. (1/s) When the gain is increased, response is improved but vibration and sound become larger. 63 3223 (PR) SP023 VGNI1 Speed loop gain integral term under speed control Set the speed loop integral gain in speed control mode. Usually, set a value in proportion to SP022 (VGNP1). 0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3224 SP024 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3225 (PR) SP025 GRA1 Spindle gear teeth count 1 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle corresponding to gear 000. 1 to 32767 1 3226 (PR) SP026 GRA2 Spindle gear teeth count 2 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle corresponding to gear 001. 1 to 32767 1 3227 (PR) SP027 GRA3 Spindle gear teeth count 3 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle corresponding to gear 010. 1 to 32767 1 3228 (PR) SP028 GRA4 Spindle gear teeth count 4 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle corresponding to gear 011. 1 to 32767 1 3229 (PR) SP029 GRB1 Motor shaft gear Set the number of gear teeth of the teeth count 1 motor shaft corresponding to gear 000. 1 to 32767 1 3230 (PR) SP030 GRB2 Motor shaft gear Set the number of gear teeth of the teeth count 2 motor shaft corresponding to gear 001. 1 to 32767 1 3231 (PR) SP031 GRB3 Motor shaft gear Set the number of gear teeth of the teeth count 3 motor shaft corresponding to gear 010. 1 to 32767 1 3232 (PR) SP032 GRB4 Motor shaft gear Set the number of gear teeth of the teeth count 4 motor shaft corresponding to gear 011. 1 to 32767 1 II - 115 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3233 SP033 SFNC1 (PR) Setting range Details Spindle function 1 Set the spindle function 1 in bit units. F poff E hzs D C ront B A 7 6 5 4 3 2 sftk 9 8 Standard setting 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 1 0 dflt 1a2m (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 1a2m 1 amplifier 2 motor function: Invalid 1 dflt Default motor: Main 2 sftk SF-TK card invalid 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A This is a fixed control bit. B C ront D E hzs F poff 3234 SP034 SFNC2 (PR) Spindle function 2 Meaning when set to 1 1 amplifier 2 motor function: Valid Default motor: Sub SF-TK card valid Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mts1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 mts1 Special motor constant Special motor constant invalid setting valid 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F II - 116 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3235 SP035 SFNC3 (PR) Setting range Details Spindle function3 Set the spindle function 3 in bit units. F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 hbsd 1 0 hwid (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 hwid H-coil wide-range 0 constant output invalid 1 2 hbsd H-coil base slide invalid 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 3236 SP036 SFNC4 (PR) Spindle function 4 Meaning when set to 1 H-coil wide-range constant output valid H-coil base slide valid Set the spindle function 4 in bit units. F E 7 6 D C B A 9 8 dslm dssm 5 4 3 2 1 0 enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 plg1 PLG of motor 1 valid 1 plg2 PLG of motor 2 valid 2 mag1 MAG of motor 1 valid 3 mag2 MAG of motor 2 valid 4 enc1 ENC of motor 1 valid 5 enc2 ENC of motor 2 valid 6 7 8 dssm Speedometer valid 9 dslm Load meter valid A B C D E F II - 117 Meaning when set to 1 PLG of motor 1 invalid PLG of motor 2 invalid MAG of motor 1 invalid MAG of motor 2 invalid ENC of motor 1 invalid ENC of motor 2 invalid Speedometer invalid Load meter invalid Standard setting 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3237 SP037 SFNC5 Spindle (PR) function 5 Setting range Details Set the spindle function 5 in bit units. F E D C B A 9 8 nstv 7 6 5 4 3 2 plgo 1 0 enco Standard setting 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 enco Encoder orientation invalid 1 2 plgo PLG orientation invalid 3 4 5 6 7 nstv No-signal detection type 8 (Always monitoring) Meaning when set to 1 Encoder orientation valid PLG orientation valid Monitoring only in position loop or orientation-mode 9 A B C D E F 3238 SP038 SFNC6 Spindle (PR) function 6 Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. F oplp E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 pftm 1 0 alty (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 alty Deceleration stop during 0 special alarm invalid 1 pftm Thread cutting position 2 data invalid 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E oplp Open loop operation F invalid II - 118 Meaning when set to 1 Deceleration stop during special alarm valid Thread cutting position data valid Open loop operation valid 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. No. 3239 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items SP039 ATYP Amplifier type Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0". This parameter corresponds to MDS-B-SPJ2. Parameter setting 0000 3240 (PR) SP040 MTYP Motor type Setting range Details 0001 SPJ2-02 0002 SPJ2-04 0003 SPJ2-075 0004 SPJ2-15 0005 0006 SPJ2-22 SPJ2-37 0007 SPJ2-55 0008 SPJ2-75 0009 SPJ2-110/110C Motor type Maximum speed Corresponding amplifier 1000 1001 SJ-P0.2A 1002 SJ-P0.4A 10000 r/min SPJ2-04 1003 SJ-P0.75A 10000 r/min SPJ2-075 1004 SJ-P1.5A 10000 r/min SPJ2-15 1005 SJ-P2.2A 8000 r/min SPJ2-22 1006 SJ-P3.7A 8000 r/min SPJ2-37 1007 SJ-PF5.5-01 8000 r/min SPJ2-55 1008 SJ-PF7.5-01 8000 r/min SPJ2-75 1009 SJ-PF11-01 6000 r/min SPJ2-110/110C II - 119 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 Amplifier type -- This is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit 0 is set to 0. Refer to the following standard motors, and set the applicable motor number. Paramete r setting Standard setting 10000 r/min SPJ2-02 8. No. 3241 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items SP041 PTYP Setting range Details Power When this unit is a signal connection axis with supply type power supply unit, set this parameter. Set "0" for this parameter for the unit which is not a signal connection axis. Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 Select a value from the following table according to the regenerative resistance being used. Setting value 0000 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 2A00 2B00 2C00 Regenerative resistance type вЂ“ Not connected FCUA-RB04 FCUA-RB075 FCUA-RB15 FCUA-RB22 FCUA-RB37 FCUA-RB55 FCUA-RB75/2 RвЂ“UNITвЂ“1 RвЂ“UNITвЂ“2 RвЂ“UNITвЂ“3 RвЂ“UNITвЂ“4 RвЂ“UNITвЂ“5 Resistance value (в„¦) Capacity (W) вЂ“ вЂ“ 200 100 60 40 25 20 30/15 30 15 15 10 10 вЂ“ вЂ“ 60 80 120 155 185 340 340/680 700 700 2100 2100 3100 (Note 1) This setting is used when using one FCUA-RB75/2 and when using two in parallel. 3242 (PR) 3243 (PR) 3244 (PR) SP042 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 SP043 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 SP044 TRANS NC communication frequency Set a frequency of data communication with NC. 0 to 32767 Standard: 0 Special: 1028 3245 SP045 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 3246 (PR) SP046 CSN2 Speed command dual cushion For an acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 to 1000 defined in SP019 (CSN1) , this parameter is used to provide smooth movement only at the start of acceleration/deceleration. As the value of this parameter is smaller, it moves smoother but the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer. To make this parameter invalid, set "0". 0 3247 (PR) SP047 SDTR Speed detection reset value Set the reset hysteresis width for a speed 0 to 1000 detection set value defined in SP020 (SDTS). (r/min) 30 II - 120 8. No. Items 3248 SP048 SUT (PR) Speed reach range 3249 SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 3250 SP050 TLM3 3251 SP051 TLM4 3252 SP052 TLM5 3253 SP053 TLM6 3254 SP054 TLM7 3255 SP055 SETM (PR) 3256 SP056 PYVR 3257 (PR) 3258 to 3262 3263 (PR) 3264 (PR) 3265 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 SP057 STOD SP058 to SP062 SP063 OLT Setting range Details Set the speed deviation rate with respect to 0 to 100 the commanded speed for output of the (%) speed reach signal. Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 010. Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 011. Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 100. Torque limit 5 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 101. Torque limit 6 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 110. Torque limit 7 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 111. Excessive Set the timer value until the excessive speed speed deviation alarm is output. deviation timer The value of this parameter should be longer than the acceleration/deceleration time. Variable Set the minimum value of the variable excitation excitation rate. (min value) Select a smaller value when gear noise is too high. However, a larger value is effective for impact response. Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. Not used. Set to "0". Overload alarm detection time SP064 OLL Overload alarm detection level SP065 VCGN1 Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain 3266 SP066 VCSN1 Change (PR) starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain 1 to 120 (%) 1 to 120 (%) 1 to 120 (%) 1 to 120 (%) 1 to 120 (%) 1 to 120 (%) 0 to 60 (s) Standard setting 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 12 0 to 100 (%) 50 0 0 0 0 Set the time constant for detection of the motor overload alarm. Set the detection level of the motor overload alarm. Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP). 0 to 1000 (s) 0 to 120 (%) 0 to 100 (%) 60 Set the speed for starting change of speed loop proportional gain. 0 to 32767 0 (r/min) Proportional gain SP022 SP022Г— (SP065/100) Speed SP066 II - 121 SP017 110 100 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items No. Setting range Details Standard setting 3267 SP067 VIGWA (PR) Change starting Set the speed for starting change of current 0 to speed of variable loop gain. 32767 current loop gain (r/min) 0 3268 SP068 VIGWB (PR) Change ending Set the speed for ending change of current 0 to speed of variable loop gain. 32767 current loop gain (r/min) 0 3269 SP069 VIGN (PR) Target value of variable current loop gain 0 Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component and excitation component) for a change ending speed defined in SP068 (VIGWB). When this parameter is set to "0", the magnification is 1. 0 to 32767 (1/16 -fold) Gain SP069Г—(1/16)-fold 1-fold Speed SP067 SP068 SP017 (TSP) Maximum motor speed 0 to 6000 6001 to 8000 8001 or more 3270 SP070 3271 (PR) 3272 (PR) 3273 (PR) 3274 (PR) 3275 SP071 VR2WA Fixed control constant SP072 VR2WB SP067 (VIGWA) SP068 (VIGWB) 0 5000 5000 0 8000 10000 SP017 SP069 (VIGN) 0 45 64 Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 SP073 VR2GN SP074 IGDEC SP075 R2KWS II - 122 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items Setting range Details Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 0 0 0 0 3276 SP076 3277 SP077 TDSL 3278 (PR) 3279 (PR) 3280 SP078 FPWM 3281 SP081 LMCA 3282 SP082 LMCB 3283 to 3286 SP083 to SP086 3287 (PR) SP087 DIQM Target value Set the minimum value of variable torque limit 0 to 150 of variable at deceleration. (%) torque limit magnification at deceleration 3288 (PR) SP088 DIQN Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. Standard setting SP079 ILMT SP080 Not used. Set to "0". Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration Set the speed for starting change of torque limit value at deceleration. 100% 75 0 to 32767 3000 (r/min) Torque limit Inversely proportional to speed SP087 Speed SP088 3289 to 3292 SP089 to SP092 3293 (PR) SP093 ORE 3294 (PR) 3295 (PR) SP094 SP017 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 0 0 0 SP095 VFAV Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 II - 123 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3296 SP096 EGAR (PR) Setting range Details Encoder gear Set the gear ratio between the spindle end ratio and the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting value Gear ratio (deceleration) 0 1 2 3 4 3297 SP097 SPECO Orientation (PR) specification 1:1 1 : 1/2 1 : 1/4 1 : 1/8 1 : 1/16 Setting value Gear ratio (Acceleration) вЂ“1 вЂ“2 вЂ“3 1:2 1:4 1:3 Set the orientation specifications in bit units. F E D C 7 6 5 fdir 4 B A 9 8 tlet Standard setting вЂ“3 to 4 0 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 3 2 1 0 pyfx dmin odi2 odi1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 odi1 Orientation rotation direction odi2 00: Previous (the direction in which the motor has so far rotated under speed control) 01: Forward rotation 1 10: Backward rotation 11: Prohibited (Same as setting value = 10) dmin Dummy in-position Dummy in-position valid 2 invalid pyfx Excitation min. (50%) Excitation min. (50%) 3 during orientation servo during orientation servo lock invalid lock valid 4 fdir Encoder detector Encoder detector 5 polarity: + polarity: вЂ“ 6 7 8 tlet Turret indexing invalid Turret indexing valid 9 A B C D E F 3298 (PR) SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional term in orientation mode 3299 (PR) SP099 VGOI 3300 (PR) SP100 VGOD Orientation mode speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop proportional gain in orientation mode. When the gain is increased, rigidity is improved in the orientation stop but vibration and sound become larger. 0 to 1000 (1/s) Orientation Set the speed loop integral gain in orientation 0 to 1000 mode speed mode. (0.1 1/s) loop gain integral term Set the a loop gain delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 orientation mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised. II - 124 60 15 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3301 SP101 DINP (PR) Orientation advance in-position width Details Setting range Standard setting When using the orientation in-position advance function, set the in-position width that is larger than the normal in-position width defined in SP004 (OINP). 1 to 2880 (1/16В°) 16 3302 SP102 OODR Excessive (PR) error value in orientation mode Set the excessive error width in orientation mode. 1 to 32767 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088В°) 3303 SP103 FTM (PR) Index positioning completion OFF time timer Set the time for forcedly turn OFF the index 1 to 10000 200 positioning completion signal (different from (ms) the orientation completion signal) after the leading edge of the indexing start signal. 3304 SP104 TLOR (PR) Torque limit value for orientation servo locking Set the torque limit value for orientation 1 to 120 in-position output. (%) If the external torque limit signal is input the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid. 3305 SP105 IQG0 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain magnifica- (torque component) at orientation tion 1 in completion. orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3306 SP106 IDG0 Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain magnifica- (excitation component) at orientation tion 2 in completion. orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3307 SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode 0 to 1000 corresponding to the gear 001. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 3308 SP108 CSP3 Deceleration rate 3 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode 0 to 1000 corresponding to the gear 010. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 3309 SP109 CSP4 (PR) Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode 0 to 1000 corresponding to the gear 011. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 100 3310 SP110 WCML Turret index (PR) command magnification The integer magnification (gear ratio 1 : N) 0 to 32767 0 for the index position command (0 to 359) is (fold) set. 3311 SP111 WDEL Turret index deceleration magnification The magnification for the orientation deceleration rate is set using 256 as 1. 3312 SP112 WCLP Turret index clamp speed The max. speed during indexing is set. This 0 to 32767 0 becomes the max. speed of the motor when (r/min) set to "0". II - 125 0 to 32767 0 (1/256 -fold) 8. No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting range Details Standard setting 3313 SP113 WINP (PR) Turret index in-position width The position error range is set in which an 0 to 32767 orientation (indexing) completed signal is (1/16В°) output during turret indexing. This becomes the same as SP004 (OINP) when set to "0". 0 3314 SP114 OPER Orientation pulse miss check value An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse miss 0 to 32767 value in the orientation stop exceed this (360В°/4096) setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 Г— SP004 (orientation in-position width) 0 3315 SP115 OSP2 Orientation changeover speed limit value 2 When the door interlock spindle speed 0 to 32767 clamp signal is ON, this setting is used (r/min) instead of OSP(SP005), CZRN(SP149) and TZRN(SP214). (Note that SP149 and SP214 are used only for the M65V.) 0 Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 Set the number of times to retry when an orientation or feedback error occurs. The warning (A9) is issued while retrying orientation, and an alarm (5C) is issued when the set number of times is exceeded. Not used. Set to вЂњ0вЂќ. 0 to 100 (time) 0 0 0 3316 SP116 OPYVR Fixed control constants 3317 SP117 ORUT 3318 SP118 ORCT 3319 SP119 to to 3376 SP176 Number of orientation retry times II - 126 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3377 SP177 SPECS Spindle (PR) synchronous specifications Setting range Details Set the spindle synchronous specifications in bit units. F E D odx8 C B A 9 8 7 6 5 fdir 4 3 pyfx 2 1 0 fclx 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 1 2 pyfx Normal excitation Position loop excitation 3 fixed (strong) 4 fdir Position detector Position detector 5 polarity (+) polarity (вЂ“) 6 7 8 9 A B C odx8 Magnification of Magnification of D excessive error width Г— excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid 8 times valid E F 3378 SP178 VGSP (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain proportional term Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle 0 to 1000 63 synchronization mode. (1/s) 3379 SP179 VGSI (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain integral term Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronization mode. 3380 SP180 VGSD (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 15 spindle synchronization mode. (0.1 When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is 1/s) exercised. 3381 SP181 VCGS (PR) Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain at spindle synchroniza-ti on Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) at spindle synchronization. II - 127 0 to 1000 60 (0.1 1/s) 0 to 100 (%) 100 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3382 SP182 VCSS (PR) Setting range Details Change Set the speed for starting change of speed 0 to 32767 (r/min) starting speed loop proportional gain at spindle of variable synchronization. speed loop proportional Proportional gain gain at SP178 spindle synchroniza-ti SP178Г— on (SP181/100) Speed SP182 Standard setting 0 SP017 3383 SP183 SYNV Sync matching speed at spindle synchronization For changeover from the speed loop to the 0 to 1000 position loop at spindle synchronization, set (r/min) a speed command error range for output of the sync speed matching signal. 20 3384 SP184 FFCS (PR) Acceleration rate feed forward gain at spindle synchronizati on Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain 0 to 1000 at spindle synchronization. (%) This parameter is used only with the SPJ2. 0 3385 SP185 SINP Spindle sync in-position width Set the position error range for output of the 1 to 2880 in-position signal at spindle (1/16В°) synchronization. 16 3386 SP186 SODR (PR) Excessive error width at spindle synchronizati on Set the excessive error width at spindle synchronization. 1 to 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) 32767 3387 SP187 IQGS (PR) Current loop gain magnification1 at spindle synchronization Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) at spindle synchronization. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3388 SP188 IDGS (PR) Current loop gain magnification 2 at spindle synchronization Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) at spindle synchronization. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3389 SP189 to to 3392 SP192 II - 128 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items 3393 SP193 SPECT Synchronous (PR) tapping specifications Setting range Details Set the synchronous tapping specifications in 0000 to FFFF bit units. HEX setting F E D zrtn ptyp od8x 7 6 5 fdir C B A 9 8 4 cdir 3 pyfx 2 1 0 fclx Standard setting 0000 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 1 2 pyfx Normal excitation Position loop excitation 3 fixed (strong) 4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (вЂ“) fdir Position detector Position detector 5 polarity (+) polarity (вЂ“) 6 7 8 9 A B C od8x Magnification of Magnification of D excessive error width Г— excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid 8 times valid ptyp Position control switch Position control switch E type: After zero point type: After deceleration return stop zrtn Zero point return Zero point return F direction: CCW direction: CW 3394 SP194 VGTP Synchronous Set the speed loop proportional gain in (PR) tapping speed synchronous tapping mode. loop gain proportional term 0 to 1000 63 (1/s) 3395 SP195 VGTI Synchronous Set the speed loop integral gain in (PR) tapping speed synchronous tapping mode. loop gain integral term 0 to1000 60 (0.1 1/s) 3396 SP196 VGTD Synchronous (PR) tapping speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to1000 15 synchronous tapping mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised. 3397 SP197 Not used. Set to "0". 3398 SP198 VCGT Target value of (PR) variable speed loop proportional gain at synchronous tapping 0 to 100 Set the magnification of speed loop (%) proportional gain with respect to SP194 (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) at synchronous tapping. II - 129 0 0 100 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Items Setting range Details 3399 SP199 VCST Change starting Set the speed for starting change of speed (PR) speed of loop proportional gain at synchronous variable speed tapping. loop proportional Proportional gain gain at SP194 synchronous tapping SP194Г— (SP198/100) 0 to 32767 Standard setting 0 (r/min) Speed SP199 SP017 Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for 0 to 1000 0 3400 SP200 FFC1 Synchronous tapping selection of gear 000 at synchronous tapping. (%) (PR) acceleration feed This parameter should be used when an error forward gain of relative position to Z-axis servo is large. (gear 1) Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for 0 to 1000 0 3401 SP201 FFC2 Synchronous tapping selection of gear 001 at synchronous tapping. (%) (PR) acceleration feed forward gain (gear 2) Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for 0 to 1000 0 3402 SP202 FFC3 Synchronous tapping selection of gear 010 at synchronous tapping. (%) (PR) acceleration feed forward gain (gear 3) Set the acceleration feed-forward gain for 0 to 1000 0 3403 SP203 FFC4 Synchronous tapping selection of gear 011 at synchronous tapping. (%) (PR) acceleration feed forward gain (gear 4) 3404 SP204 to to 3413 SP213 Not used. Set to "0". 3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronous tapping zero point return speed This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) 0 to 500 bitE is set to "0". (r/min) Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop. 50 3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronous tapping zero point return deceleration rate This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) 1 to bitE is set to "0". 10000 Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the (pulse) target stop point during synchronous tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value. 1 3416 SP216 TPST Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) 0 to 4095 0 bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronous tapping zero point position. 1 to 2880 16 Set the position error range in which (1/16В°) in-position signal is output during synchronize tapping. 3417 SP217 TINP Synchronous tapping in-position width II - 130 0 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting range Details Items Standard setting 3418 (PR) SP218 TODR Excessive error width at synchronous tapping Set the excessive error width at synchronous tapping. 1 to 32767 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) 3419 (PR) SP219 IQGT Current loop gain magnification 1 at synchronous tapping Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) during synchronous tapping. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3420 (PR) SP220 IDGT Current loop gain magnification 2 at synchronous tapping Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) during synchronous tapping. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3421 to 3424 SP221 to SP224 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3425 SP225 OXKPH Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 3426 SP226 OXKPL 3427 SP227 OXVKP 3428 SP228 OXVKI 3429 SP229 OXSFT 3430 SP230 3431 SP231 3432 SP232 3433 (PR) SP233 JL 0 to 5000 (%) 0 Fixed control constant Disturbance Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load observer inertia and motor inertia. general inertia scale Setting Motor inertia + load inertia value = Motor inertia Г— 100 (Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.) II - 131 8. No. Items 3434 SP234 OBS1 (PR) 3435 SP235 OBS2 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting range Details Disturbanc Set the frequency of the low path filter for 0 to 1000 e observer when the disturbance observer is valid. (1/s) low path Setting (1/s) = 2ПЂf filter f: Approx. 1.5 times the disturbance frequency frequency Disturbanc Set the gain for the disturbance observer. 0 to 500 (%) e observer gain 3436 SP236 to to 3452 SP252 Not used. Set to "0". 0 Standard setting 0 0 0 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data number Set the output data number for channel 1 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 When the setting value is "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS". 0 3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number Set the output data number for channel 2 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 When the setting value is "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ". 0 3455 SP255 DA1MPY DA output channel 1 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 1 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is (setting (1/256-fold) value)/256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ". 0 3456 SP256 DA2MPY DA output channel 2 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 2 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is (setting (1/256-fold) value)/256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPESIFICATIONS ". 0 II - 132 8. No. Items 3457 SP257 RPM (PR) to to SP320 BSD 3520 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Details Motor constant (H coil) Setting range This parameter is valid only in the following 0000 to two conditional cases: FFFF HEX setting (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor. (b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor. Standard setting 0000 (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. 3521 SP321 RPML (PR) to to SP384 BSDL 3584 (PR) Motor constant (L coil) This parameter is valid only in the following 0000 to FFFF conditional case: HEX setting (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor. (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. II - 133 0000 8. 8.3 SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual .......... BNP-B3759 MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ............................... BNP-C3000 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi. ! CAUTION ! Do not make remarkable adjustments or changes of the parameters as the operation may become unstable. ! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to вЂњ0вЂќ. No. Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3201 SP001 PGM Magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain As the set value is larger, the orientation time 0 to 1000 becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. (0.1 1/s) However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 100 3202 SP002 PGE Encoder orientation position loop gain As the set value is larger, the orientation time 0 to 1000 becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. (0.1 1/s) However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 100 3203 SP003 PGC0 C-axis non-cutting position loop gain Set the position loop gain in C-axis non-cutting 1 to 100 mode. (1/s) During non-cutting (rapid traverse, etc.) with the C axis control, this position loop gain setting is valid. 15 3204 SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output. 16 3205 SP005 OSP (PR) Orientation mode changing speed limit value Set the motor speed limit value to be used when 0 to 32767 the speed loop is changed to the position loop in (r/min) orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value. 3206 SP006 CSP Orientation As the set value is larger, the orientation time mode becomes shorter. However, the machine deceleration becomes likely to overshoot. rate 1 to 2880 (1/16 В°) 1 to 1000 0 20 3207 SP007 OPST In-position Set the stop position for orientation. shift amount (i) Motor built-in encoder, encoder: for Set the value by dividing 360В° by 4096. orientation (ii) Magnetic sensor: Divide вЂ“5В° to +5В° by 1024 and put 0В° for 0. (i) 0 to 4095 0 3208 SP008 0 Not used. Set to "0". II - 134 (ii) вЂ“512 to512 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3209 SP009 PGT Synchroni- Set the spindle position loop gain in zed synchronized tapping mode. tapping Position loop gain 1 to 100 (1/s) 15 3210 SP010 PGS Spindle synchronous position loop gain Set the spindle position loop gain in spindle synchronization mode. 1 to 100 (1/s) 15 Use not possible. 0 0 Set the maximum motor speed of the spindle. 1 to 32767 (r/min) 6000 1 to 1000 (r/min) 50 3211 SP011 to to 3216 SP016 3217 SP017 TSP (PR) Maximum motor speed 3218 SP018 ZSP (PR) Motor zero Set the motor speed for which zero-speed speed output is performed. 3219 SP019 CSN1 (PR) Speed cushion 1 Set the time constant for a speed command from 1 to 32767 "0" to the maximum speed. (10ms) (This parameter is invalid in position loop mode.) 30 3220 SP020 SDTS (PR) Speed detection set value Set the motor speed so for which speed detection output is performed. Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP). 0 to 32767 (r/min) 600 3221 SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001. 0 to 120 (%) 10 3222 SP022 VGNP1 Speed (PR) loop gain proportional term under speed control Set the speed loop proportional gain in speed control mode. When the gain is increased, response is improved but vibration and sound become larger. 0 to 1000 (1/s) 3223 SP023 VGNI1 Speed (PR) loop gain integral term under speed control Set the speed loop integral gain in speed control 0 to 1000 mode. (0.1 1/s) Usually, set a value in proportion to SP022 (VGNP1). 60 3224 SP024 Use not possible. 0 0 63 3225 SP025 GRA1 (PR) Spindle Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle gear teeth corresponding to gear 000. count 1 1 to 32767 1 3226 SP026 GRA2 (PR) Spindle Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle gear teeth corresponding to gear 001. count 2 1 to 32767 1 3227 SP027 GRA3 (PR) Spindle Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle gear teeth corresponding to gear 010. count 3 1 to 32767 1 II - 135 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3228 SP028 GRA4 (PR) Spindle Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle gear teeth corresponding to gear 011. count 4 1 to 32767 1 3229 SP029 GRB1 (PR) Motor Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 shaft gear corresponding to gear 000. teeth count 1 1 3230 SP030 GRB2 (PR) Motor Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 shaft gear corresponding to gear 001. teeth count 2 1 3231 SP031 GRB3 (PR) Motor Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 shaft gear corresponding to gear 010. teeth count 3 1 3232 SP032 GRB4 (PR) Motor Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 shaft gear corresponding to gear 011. teeth count 4 1 3233 SP033 SFNC1 Spindle (PR) function 1 Set the spindle function 1 in bit units. F poff E hzs 7 6 pyst pyoff D C ront B A 9 8 pycal pychg 5 4 3 2 sftk 1 0 dflt 1a2m (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 1 amplifier 0 1a2m 1 amplifier 2 motor function: Invalid 2 motor function: Valid 1 dflt Default motor: Main Default motor: Sub 2 sftk SF-TK card invalid SF-TK card valid 3 4 5 6 pyoff This is used by Mitsubishi. 7 pyst Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 8 pychg pycal (Conventional High-speed rate specifications) deceleration method 9 valid for minimum excitation rate A This is used by Mitsubishi. B Set to "0" unless particularly designated. C ront Normal ready ON High-speed ready ON This is used by Mitsubishi. D Set to "0" unless particularly designated. hzs Gate OFF by high-cycle Gate OFF by high-cycle E zero speed invalid zero speed valid poff Contactor hold at NC Contactor hold at NC F power OFF invalid power OFF valid (Note) When SPH is used, bit 0 and bit 1 will be invalid. II - 136 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details 3234 SP034 SFNC2 Spindle Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. (PR) function 2 F E D C B A 9 7 6 5 4 8 Standard setting 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 3 2 1 0 mkc2 mkch invm mts1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 mts1 Special motor constant invalid invm A general-purpose 1 motor FV control invalid 2 mkch Winding switch function invalid mkc2 Coil changeover function 2 invalid 3 Meaning when set to 1 Special motor constant setting valid A general-purpose motor FV control valid Winding switch function valid Coil changeover function 2 valid (Turns ON simultaneously with bit 2) 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F (Note) bit3 mkc2 must be handled on the NC side. 3235 SP035 SFNC3 Spindle Set the spindle function 3 in bit units. (PR) function 3 F E D C B A 9 7 6 5 4 8 3 2 1 0 lbsd hbsd lwid hwid (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 hwid H-coil wide-range 0 constant output invalid lwid L-coil wide-range 1 constant output invalid 2 hbsd H-coil base slide invalid 3 lbsd L-coil base slide invalid 4 5 6 7 (Used with SPJ.) 8 9 A B C D E F II - 137 Meaning when set to 1 H-coil wide-range constant output valid L-coil wide-range constant output valid H-coil base slide valid L-coil base slide valid 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3236 SP036 SFNC4 Spindle (PR) function 4 Setting range Details Set the spindle function 4 in bit units. F E 7 6 D C B A 9 8 dslm dssm Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 5 4 3 2 1 0 enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 plg1 PLG of motor 1 valid 1 plg2 PLG of motor 2 valid 2 mag1 MAG of motor 1 valid 3 mag2 MAG of motor 2 valid 4 enc1 ENC of motor 1 valid 5 enc2 ENC of motor 2 valid 6 7 8 dssm Speedometer output valid 9 dslm Load meter output valid Meaning when set to 1 PLG of motor 1 invalid PLG of motor 2 invalid MAG of motor 1 invalid MAG of motor 2 invalid ENC of motor 1 invalid ENC of motor 2 invalid Speedometer output invalid Load meter output invalid A B C D E F 3237 SP037 SFNC5 Spindle (PR) function 5 Set the spindle function 5 in bit units. F E splg dplg 7 6 D C B A 9 8 noplg nsno nosg 5 4 3 2 1 0 plgo mago enco (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 enco Encoder orientation invalid mago Magnetic sensor 1 orientation invalid 2 plgo PLG orientation invalid 3 4 5 6 7 nosg No-signal detection type 8 (Always monitoring) 9 A B C D E F No-signal detection valid Constant monitor of noplg PLG-Z phase no-signal invalid nsno dplg splg Meaning when set to 1 Encoder orientation valid Magnetic sensor orientation valid PLG orientation valid Monitoring only in position loop or orientation-mode No-signal detection invalid Constant monitor of PLG-Z phase no-signal valid This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. (Note) For bit0 to 2, do not set two bits or more to "1" at the same time. II - 138 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3238 SP038 SFNC6 Spindle (PR) function 6 Setting range Details Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. F oplp E lmx D C B A 9 8 iqsv XFzs dcsn lmnp pl80 sdt2 7 6 5 vfbs orm adin 4 tdn 3 2 plg2 pftm 1 0 alty (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. For MDS-C1-SP/SPH bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 alty Deceleration stop during Deceleration stop during 0 special alarm invalid special alarm valid 1 pftm Encoder feedback serial Encoder feedback serial 2 communication invalid communication valid plg2 Semi-closed pulse Semi-closed pulse 3 output signal Г—2 invalid output signal Г—2 valid 4 adin Interpolation during Interpolation during 5 thread cutting invalid thread cutting valid orm Orientation start memo Orientation start memo 6 invalid valid vfbs This is used by Mitsubishi. 7 Set to "0" unless particularly designated. sdt2 (Follows SFNC6-bitC Set output 2 to 2nd 8 setting) speed detection output pl80 MHE90K detector's 180 180 wave PLG other 9 wave PLG than MHE90K A lmnp This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. dcsn Dual cushion during Dual cushion during B acceleration/ acceleration/ deceleration valid deceleration invalid C XFzs Set output 2 to MP scale Set output 2 to zero low (L) speed mode speed output D iqsv This is used by Mitsubishi. E lmx Set to "0" unless particularly designated oplp Open loop operation Open loop operation F invalid valid For MDS-B-SP/SPH bit Name Meaning when set to 0 alty Deceleration stop during 0 special alarm invalid 1 pftm Encoder feedback serial 2 communication invalid plg2 Semi-closed pulse 3 output signal Г—2 invalid 4 tdn Fixed control bit 5 adin orm Orientation start memo 6 invalid 7 vfbs 8 sdt2 9 pl80 A lmnp Fixed control bit B dcsn C XFzs D iqsv E lmx oplp Open loop operation F invalid II - 139 Meaning when set to 1 Deceleration stop during special alarm valid Encoder feedback serial communication valid Semi-closed pulse output signal Г—2 valid Orientation start memo valid Open loop operation valid 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3239 SP039 ATYP Amplifier (PR) type Details Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0" Parameter setting Amplifier type 0000 0001 0002 SP-075 SP-15 0003 SP-22 0004 SP-37 0005 SP-55 0006 SP-75 0007 SP-110 0008 SP-150 0009 SP-185 000A SP-220 000B SP-260 000C SP-300 000D SP (H)-370 000E SP (H)-450 000F SP-04 0010 SP-550 II - 140 Setting range 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3240 SP040 MTYP Motor type (PR) Setting range Details This parameter is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit0 is set to "0". Set the appropriate motor number from the standard motors listed below. Parameter setting 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E 001F Motor type Maximum speed Corre-spo nding amplifier SJ-2.2A SJ-3.7A SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A SJ-11A SJ-15A SJ-18.5A SJ-22A SJ-26A SJ-30A 10000 r/min 10000 r/min 8000 r/min 8000 r/min 6000 r/min 6000 r/min 6000 r/min 4500 r/min 4500 r/min 4500 r/min SP-22 SP-37 SP-55 SP-75 SP-110 SP-150 SP-185 SP-220 SP-260 SP-300 SJ-N0.75A SJ-N1.5A SJ-N2.2A SJ-N3.7A SJ-N5.5A SJ-N7.5A 10000 r/min 10000 r/min 10000 r/min 10000 r/min 8000 r/min 8000 r/min SP-075 SP-15 SP-22 SP-37 SP-55 SP-75 SJ-J2.2A SJ-J3.7A SJ-J5.5A SJ-J7.5A 10000 r/min 10000 r/min 8000 r/min 8000 r/min SP-22 SP-37 SP-55 SP-75 II - 141 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3241 SP041 PTYP (PR) Setting range Details Power Power supply type F E D C supply type B A amp 7 6 9 8 1 0 rtyp 5 4 3 2 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 ptyp bit Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary. To validate the external emergency stop function, add 40h. Set3 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x ting ptyp Not 4 CV-300 x0 used 5 CV-110 CR-10 x1 6 CV-220 CR-15 x2 7 CR-22 x3 CV-37 CR-37 x4 CV-150 CV-450 CV-550 x5 CV-260 CR-55 x6 CV-55 CV-370 x7 CR-75 x8 CV-75 CV-185 CR-90 x9 0 1 2 8 Set the regenerative resistor type when MDS-A-CR is used. SetRegenerative resistor Resistance 9 Capacity rtyp ting model name value A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration) B 1 GZG200W260HMJ 80W 26в„¦ 2 150W GZG300W130HMJГ—2 26в„¦ 3 MR-RB30 300W 13в„¦ 4 MR-RB50 500W 13в„¦ 5 350W GZG200W200HMJГ—3 6.7в„¦ 6 500W GZG300W200HMJГ—3 6.7в„¦ 7 R-UNIT-1 700W 30в„¦ 8 R-UNIT-2 700W 15в„¦ 9 R-UNIT-3 2100W 15в„¦ A to D No setting E Large capacity + ready ON high-speed sequence F Ready ON high-speed sequence C Always set to вЂњ0вЂќ. D amp E F 3242 SP042 CRNG (PR) C-axis detector range This parameter is used to set the C-axis detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. "2" is used by Mitsubishi for testing. 0 to 7 0 3243 SP043 TRNG (PR) Synchronous tapping, spindle synchronous detector range This parameter is used to set the synchronous 0 to 7 tapping or spindle synchronous detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. 0 II - 142 8. 8.3 No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Details Setting range Standard setting 3244 SP044 TRANS (PR) NC communication frequency Set a frequency of data communication with NC. 3245 SP045 CSNT Dual cushion timer Set the cycle to add the increment values in the 0 to 1000 dual cushion process. (ms) When this setting value is increased, the dual cushion will increase, and the changes in the speed during acceleration/deceleration will become gradual. 0 3246 SP046 CSN2 (PR) Speed command dual cushion For an acceleration/deceleration time constant 0 to 1000 defined in SP019 (CSN1) , this parameter is used to provide smooth movement only at the start of acceleration/deceleration. As the value of this parameter is smaller, it moves smoother but the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer. To make this parameter invalid, set "0". 0 3247 SP047 SDTR (PR) Speed Set the reset hysteresis width for a speed detection detection set value defined in SP020 (SDTS). reset value 0 to 1000 (r/min) 30 3247 SP047 SDTR (PR) Speed Set the reset hysteresis width for a speed detection detection set value defined in SP020 (SDTS). reset value 0 to 1000 (r/min) 30 3248 SP048 SUT (PR) Speed reach range Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the 0 to 100 commanded speed for output of the speed (%) reach signal. 15 3249 SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 010. 1 to 120 (%) 20 3250 SP050 TLM3 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 011. 1 to 120 (%) 30 3251 SP051 TLM4 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 100. 1 to 120 (%) 40 3252 SP052 TLM5 Torque limit 5 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 101. 1 to 120 (%) 50 3253 SP053 TLM6 Torque limit 6 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 110. 1 to 120 (%) 60 3254 SP054 TLM7 Torque limit 7 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 111. 1 to 120 (%) 70 II - 143 0 to 32767 Standard: 0 Special: 1028 8. 8.3 No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting range Details 3255 SP055 SETM (PR) Excessive speed deviation timer Set the timer value until the excessive speed deviation alarm is output. The value of this parameter should be longer than the acceleration/deceleration time. 3256 SP056 PYVR Variable excitation (min value) Set the minimum value of the variable 0 to 100 excitation rate. (%) Select a smaller value when gear noise is too high. However, a larger value is effective for impact response. 3257 SP057 STOD (PR) Constant в†’ Set the value for judging when changing from a 0 to 50 constant to excessive speed command. (r/min) excessive judgment value 0 3258 SP058 SDT2 (PR) Fixed control constant Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 3259 SP059 MKT (PR) Winding changeover base shut-off timer Set the base shut-off time for contactor 50 to switching at winding changeover. 10000 Note that the contactor may be damaged with (ms) burning if the value of this parameter is too small. 3260 SP060 MKT2 (PR) Current limit Set the current limit time to be taken after timer after completion of contactor switching at winding winding changeover. changeover 0 to 10000 500 (ms) 3261 SP061 MKIL (PR) Current limit Set the current limit value during a period value after defined in SP060 (MKT2) after completion of winding contactor switching at winding changeover. changeover 0 to 120 (%) 75 0 0 3262 SP062 Not used. Set to "0". II - 144 0 to 60 (s) Standard setting 0 12 50 150 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details 3263 SP063 OLT (PR) Overload alarm detection time 3264 SP064 OLL (PR) Overload alarm Set the detection level of the motor overload 0 to 120 detection level alarm. (%) 3265 SP065 VCGN1 Target value of (PR) variable speed loop proportional gain Set the time constant for detection of the motor overload alarm. Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP). 0 to 100 (%) 60 110 100 0 to 32767 0 (r/min) 3266 SP066 VCSN1 Change Set the speed when the speed loop (PR) starting speed proportional gain change starts. of variable speed loop Proportional gain proportional SP022 gain SP022Г— (SP065/100) 0 to 1000 (s) Standard setting Speed SP066 SP017 3267 SP067 VIGWA Change Set the speed where the current loop gain (PR) starting speed change starts. of variable current loop gain 0 to 32767 0 (r/min) 3268 SP068 VIGWB Change (PR) ending speed of variable current loop gain Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends. 0 to 32767 0 (r/min) 3269 SP069 VIGN (PR) Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component and excitation component) for a change ending speed defined in SP068 (VIGWB). When this parameter is set to "0", the magnification is 1. 0 to 32767 0 Target value of variable current loop gain SP069Г—(1/16)-fold 1-fold Speed SP067 SP068 SP017 (TSP) Maximum motor speed 0 to 6000 6001 to 8000 8001 or more SP067 (VIGWA) SP068 (VIGWB) 0 5000 5000 0 8000 10000 II - 145 SP017 SP069 (VIGN) 0 45 64 (1/16-fold) 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3270 SP070 FHz Machine resonance suppressio n filter frequency When machine vibration occurs in speed and 0 to 3000 position control, set the frequency of the (Hz) required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used. 0 3271 (PR) 3272 (PR) 3273 (PR) 3274 (PR) 3275 Fixed control constant Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 SP071 VR2WA SP072 VR2WB 0 SP073 VR2GN SP074 IGDEC SP075 R2KWS F E D 7 6 5 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C B A 9 8 r2ini 4 3 2 1 0 r2am r2lm r2dn no51 r2ch Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 r2ch This is used by Mitsubishi. no51 Set to "0" unless particularly designated. r2dm r2lm r2am r2ini This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated 9 A B C D E F 3276 SP076 FONS Machine resonance suppressio n filter operation speed When the vibration increases in motor stop 0 to 32767 0 (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine (r/min) vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds. 3277 SP077 TDSL (PR) Fixed control constant Set by Mitsubishi. Set "14" unless designated in particular. 3278 SP078 FPWM (PR) 3279 SP079 ILMT (PR) 3280 SP080 Fixed control constant Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 Use not possible. 0 0 II - 146 14 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3281 SP081 LMCA Fixed control constant Setting range Details Standard setting This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 Use not possible. 0 0 Set the minimum value of variable torque limit at deceleration. 0 to 150 (%) 75 3282 SP082 LMCB 3283 SP083 3284 SP084 to to 3286 SP086 3287 SP087 DIQM (PR) Target value of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration 3288 SP088 DIQN (PR) Speed for starting Set the speed where the torque limit value at 0 to 32767 3000 (r/min) change of deceleration starts to change. variable torque Torque limit limit magnificaInversely proportional tion at to speed 100% deceleration SP087 SP088 SP017 3289 SP089 Use not possible. 0 0 3290 SP090 Use not possible. 0 0 3291 SP091 OFSN Motor PLG Set the PLG offset value for the forward forward rotation rotation. offset compensa- Normally set to "0". tion вЂ“2048 to 0 2047 (вЂ“1mv) 3292 SP092 OFSI Motor PLG Set the PLG offset value for the reverse reverse rotation rotation. offset compensa- Normally set to "0". tion вЂ“2048 to 0 2047 (вЂ“1mv) 3293 SP093 ORE (PR) Tolerable pulse check error Set this when detecting the pulse detector's 0 to 32767 0 pulse mistakes. (Valid only for full close control.) 3294 SP094 LMAV Load meter (PR) output filter Set the filter time constant of load meter 0 to 32767 0 output. (2ms) When "0" is set, a filter time constant is set to 100ms. 3295 SP095 VFAV (PR) Set by Mitsubishi. Set "0" unless designated in particular. Fixed control constant II - 147 0 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3296 SP096 EGAR (PR) Encoder gear ratio Set the gear ratio between the spindle end and the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting value Gear ratio (deceleration) 0 1 2 3 4 Setting value Gear ratio (acceleration) вЂ“1 вЂ“2 вЂ“3 1:2 1:4 1:3 1:1 1 : 1/2 1 : 1/4 1 : 1/8 1 : 1/16 Set the orientation specifications in bit units. F E ostp orze D C ksft gchg 7 6 vg8x mdir 5 fdir B A ips2 9 zdir 8 4 3 2 1 0 osc1 pyfx dmin odi2 odi1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 odi1 Orientation rotation direction odi2 00: Previous (the direction in which the motor has so far rotated under speed control) 01: Forward rotation 1 10: Backward rotation 11: Prohibited (Same as setting value = 10) dmin Orientation in-position Orientation in-position 2 advance invalid advance valid pyfx Excitation min. (50%) Excitation min. (50%) 3 during orientation servo during orientation servo lock invalid lock valid Indexing speed clamp 4 osc1 Indexing speed clamp invalid valid fdir Encoder detector Encoder detector 5 polarity: + polarity: вЂ“ mdir Magnetic sensor Magnetic sensor 6 polarity: + polarity: вЂ“ vg8x Speed gain *1/8 during Speed gain *1/8 during 7 torque limit valid torque limit invalid 8 zdir This is used by Mitsubishi. 9 Set to "0" unless particularly designated. A ips2 2nd in-position invalid 2nd in-position valid B C gchg Gain changeover during Gain changeover during orientation invalid orientation valid ksft Orientation virtual target Orientation virtual target D shift invalid shift valid E orze This is used by Mitsubishi. F ostp Set to "0" unless particularly designated. In-position advance (bit 2) 0 (Invalid) Second in-position 3297 SP097 SPECO Orientation (PR) specification Setting range Details 0 (invalid) 1 (valid) In-position signal in OINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal=0 Control output 4/ bit F=1 In-position signal in OINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal=0 Control output 4/ bit F=0 1 (Valid) In-position signal in DINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal in OINP width = 0 Control output 4/ bit F=1 II - 148 Standard setting вЂ“3 to 4 0 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 8. 8.3 No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Details Setting range Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 1000 orientation mode. (1/s) When the gain is increased, rigidity is improved in the orientation stop but vibration and sound become larger. Standard setting 3298 SP098 VGOP (PR) Speed loop gain proportional term in orientation mode 3299 SP099 VGOI (PR) Orientation Set the speed loop integral gain in orientation mode speed mode. loop gain integral term 0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3300 SP100 VGOD (PR) Orientation mode speed loop gain delay advance term Set a loop gain delay advance gain in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s) 15 3301 SP101 DINP (PR) Orientation advance in-position width When using the orientation in-position advance 1 to 2880 function, set the in-position width that is larger (1/16В°) than the normal in-position width defined in SP004 (OINP). 16 3302 SP102 OODR (PR) Excessive error value in orientation mode Set the excessive error width in orientation mode. 3303 SP103 FTM (PR) Index positioning completion OFF time timer Set the time for forcedly turn OFF the index 0 to 10000 200 positioning completion signal (different from the (ms) orientation completion signal) after the leading edge of the indexing start signal. 3304 SP104 TLOR (PR) Torque limit value for orientation servo locking Set the torque limit value for orientation 0 to 120 in-position output. (%) If the external torque limit signal is input, the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid. 3305 SP105 IQG0 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain (torque component) at orientation completion. magnification 1 in orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3306 SP106 IDG0 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain (excitation component) at orientation magnificacompletion. tion 2 in orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3307 SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 001. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 to 1000 0 3308 SP108 CSP3 Deceleration rate 3 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 010. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 to 1000 0 II - 149 63 0 to 32767 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088В°) 100 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3309 SP109 CSP4 Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode 3310 SP110 to to 3313 SP113 Setting range Details Standard setting Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode 0 to 1000 corresponding to the gear 011. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 Use not possible. 0 3314 SP114 OPER Orientation pulse miss check value An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse miss 0 to 32767 value at the orientation stop exceeds this (360В°/4096) setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 Г— SP004 (orientation in-position width) 0 3315 SP115 OSP2 Orientation motor speed clamp value 2 When the orientation clamp speed is 0 to 32767 changed by the control input, this parameter (r/min) setting will be used instead of SP005: OSP. Indexing speed clamp valid This parameter is used when (SP097: SPEC0-bit4 = 1). 0 3316 SP116 OPYVR Minimum excitation value after changeover (2nd minimum excitation rate) Minimum excitation rate when position control input or external input is selected. 0 to 100 (%) 0 3317 SP117 ORUT This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 Set the number of times to retry when an orientation or feedback error occurs. The warning (A9) is issued while retrying orientation, and an alarm (5C) is issued when the set number of times is exceeded. 0 to 100 (time) 0 3318 SP118 ORCT Number of orientation retry times 3319 SP119 MPGH Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the position gain orientation position loop gain for the H H winding winding. compensaH winding orientation position loop gain tion magnifi= SP001 (or SP002) Г— SP119/256 cation When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002. 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 3320 SP120 MPGL Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the position gain orientation position loop gain for the L L winding winding. compensaL winding orientation position loop gain tion magnifi= SP001 (or SP002) Г— SP120/256 cation When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002. 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 II - 150 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3321 SP121 MPCSH Orientation deceleration rate H winding compensation magnification Setting range Details Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the H winding. Standard setting 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 Orientation deceleration rate for the H winding = SP006 Г— SP121/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006. 3322 SP122 MPCSL Orientation deceleration rate L winding compensation magnification Set the compensation magnification of the orientation deceleration rate for the L winding. Orientation deceleration rate for the L winding = SP006 Г— SP122/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP006. 3323 SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor output peak value This parameter is used for adjustment of 1 to 10000 orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the output peak value of the magnetic sensor. If a gap between the sensor and the magnetizing element is small, increase the value of this parameter. If it is large, decrease the value of this parameter. 3324 SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor linear zone width This parameter is used for adjustment of 1 to 10000 orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the linear zone width of the magnetic sensor. If the radius of the mounted magnetizing element is large, decrease the value of this parameter. If it is small, increase the value of this parameter. 3325 SP125 MGD2 3326 SP126 to to 3328 SP128 Magnetic sensor switching point Standard magnetizin g element: 542 Small magnetizin g element: 500 Standard magnetizin g element: 768 Small magnetizin g element: 440 This parameter is used for adjustment of 1 to 10000 orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. Set the distance dimension from the target stop point at switching from position feedback to magnetic sensor output. Normally, set a value that is approx. 1/2 of the value defined in SP124. Standard magnetizin g element: 384 Small magnetizin g element: 220 Use not possible. 0 II - 151 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details 3329 SP129 SPECC C-axis (PR) specifications 0000 Set the C-axis specifications in bit units. F E D C B zrtn ptyp fb9x zrtd zrn2 7 vg8x 6 5 fdir 4 A 3 2 phos rtrn Standard setting 9 zdir 8 ztyp 1 adin 0 fclx (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 0 (Gear 1 : 1 only) adin Interpolation A/D Interpolation A/D 1 compensation invalid compensation valid rtrn Position monitor during Position monitor during 2 ready OFF invalid ready OFF valid Vx4 synchronization 3 phos Normal (no compensation) compensation valid 4 fdir Position detector Position detector polarity 5 polarity (+) (вЂ“) 6 vg8x Speed gain Г— 1/8 during Speed gain Г— 1/8 during 7 torque limit valid torque limit invalid ztyp Z-phase type: Normal 8 Z-phase type: Start up only start up zdir Z-phase rising polarity 9 Z-phase rising polarity (вЂ“) (+) A B zrn2 This is used by Mitsubishi. C zrtd Set to "0" unless particularly designated. fb9x Speed feedback Speed feedback D Standard (PLG) 90,000 pulse detector ptyp Position control switch Position control switch type: E type: After zero point After deceleration stop return zrtn Zero point return Zero point return direction: F direction: CCW CW 3330 SP130 PGC1 3331 SP131 PGC2 3332 SP132 PGC3 3333 SP133 PGC4 3334 SP134 VGCP0 (PR) First position loop gain for cutting on C-axis Second position loop gain for cutting on C-axis Third position loop gain for cutting on C-axis Stop position loop gain for cutting on C-axis C-axis non-cuttin g speed loop gain proportion al item Set the position loop gain when the first gain is 1 to 100 selected for C axis cutting. (1/s) 15 Set the position loop gain when the second gain 1 to 100 is selected for C axis cutting. (1/s) 15 Set the position loop gain when the third gain is 1 to 100 selected for C-axis cutting. (1/s) 15 Set the position loop gain for stopping when carrying out C-axis cutting. 1 to 100 (1/s) 15 Set the speed loop proportional gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 II - 152 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3335 SP135 VGCI0 (PR) Details 60 Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 5000 C-axis non-cutting mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised. 15 Set the speed loop proportional gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 Set the speed loop integral gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 Set the speed loop delay advance gain when 0 to 5000 the first gain is selected for curing on the (0.1 1/s) C-axis. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 Set the speed loop proportional gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 Set the speed loop integral gain when the second gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3342 SP142 VGCD2 Second speed loop (PR) gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis Set the speed loop delay advance gain when 0 to 5000 the second gain is selected for C-axis (0.1 1/s) cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 3343 SP143 VGCP3 Third speed (PR) loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis Set the speed loop proportional gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3344 SP144 VGCI3 (PR) Set the speed loop integral gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3337 SP137 VGCP1 (PR) 3338 SP138 VGCI1 (PR) 3339 SP139 VGCD1 (PR) 3340 SP140 VGCP2 (PR) 3341 SP141 VGCI2 (PR) Set the speed loop integral gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. Second speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis Standard setting 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 3336 SP136 VGCD0 (PR) C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain integral item C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain delay advance item First speed loop gain proportional item for C-axis cutting First speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis First speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis Second speed loop gain proportional item for cutting on C-axis Setting range Third speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis II - 153 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Details Setting range Set the speed loop delay advance gain 0 to 5000 when the third gain is selected for C-axis (0.1 1/s) cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. Standard setting 3345 SP145 VGCD3 (PR) Third speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis 3346 SP146 VGCP4 (PR) Speed loop Set the speed loop proportional gain when gain propor- C-axis cutting is stopped. tional item for stop of cutting on C-axis 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3347 SP147 VGCI4 (PR) Speed loop gain integral item for stop of cutting on C-axis Set the speed loop integral gain when C-axis cutting is stopped. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3348 SP148 VGCD4 (PR) Speed loop gain delay advance item for stop of cutting on C-axis Set the speed loop delay advance gain 0 to 5000 when C-axis cutting is stopped. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 3349 SP149 CZRN C-axis zero point return speed This parameter is valid when SP129 1 to 500 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". (r/min) Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop. 50 3350 SP150 CPDT C-axis zero point return deceleration point This parameter is valid when SP129 1 to 10000 (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during C-axis zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point, set the smaller value. 1 3351 SP151 CPSTL C-axis zero point return shift amount (low byte) This parameter is valid when SPECC (SP129) bitE is set to "0". Set the C-axis zero point position. 3352 SP152 CPSTH C-axis zero point return shift amount (high byte) HEX setting H: 0000 00000000 L: 0000 to FFFFFFFF (1/1000В°) 3353 SP153 CINP C-axis in-position width Set the position error range in which the in-position signal is output on the C-axis. 0000 to 03E8 FFFF (1/1000В°) HEX setting II - 154 15 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3354 SP154 CODRL (PR) Excessive error width on C-axis (low byte) Setting range Details Standard setting Set the excessive error width on the C-axis. HEX setting H: 0001 00000000 L: D4C0 to FFFFFFFF (1/1000В°) 3355 SP155 CODRH Excessive (PR) error width on C-axis (high byte) 3356 SP156 OVSH C-axis overshoot compensation 3357 SP157 to to 3358 SP158 Set this to prevent overshooting when 0 to 1000 shifting from movement to stopping with (0.1%) C-axis control. (Set this referring to the load meter display when overshooting occurred.) 0 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 0 to 100 (%) 50 3359 SP159 CPY0 C-axis non-cutting variable excitation ratio Set the minimum value of variable excitation ratio for non-cutting on the C-axis . 3360 SP160 CPY1 C-axis cutting variable excitation ratio Set the minimum variable excitation ratio for 0 to 100 (%) 100 cutting on the C-axis. 3361 SP161 IQGC0 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification of current loop gain 1 to 1000 gain magnifi- (torque component) for C-axis non-cutting. (%) cation 1 for non-cutting on C-axis 100 3362 SP162 IDGC0 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification of current loop gain gain magnifi- (excitation component) for C-axis cation 2 for non-cutting. non-cutting on C-axis 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3363 SP163 IQGC1 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification of current loop gain gain magnifi- (torque component) for C-axis cutting. cation 1 for cutting on C-axis 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3364 SP164 IDGC1 (PR) Current loop Set the magnification of current loop gain gain magnifi- (excitation component) for C-axis cutting. cation 2 for cutting on C-axis 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3365 SP165 PG2C C-axis Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 position loop high-gain control is carried out for control of (1/s) gain 2 the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0". II - 155 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3366 SP166 PG3C C-axis position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when high-gain 0 to 999 control is carried out for control of the C-axis. (1/s) This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0". 0 3367 SP167 PGU (PR) Position loop gain for increased spindle holding force Set the position loop gain for when the disturbance observer is valid. 0 to 100 (1/s) 15 3368 SP168 VGUP (PR) Speed loop gain proportional item for increased spindle holding force Set the speed loop gain proportional item for when the disturbance observer is valid. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3369 SP169 VGUI (PR) Speed loop gain integral item for increased spindle holding force Set the speed loop gain integral item for when 0 to 5000 60 the disturbance observer is valid. (0.1 1/s) 3370 SP170 VGUD (PR) Speed loop Set the speed loop gain delay advance item gain delay for when the disturbance observer is valid. advance item for increased spindle holding force 3371 SP171 to to 3376 SP176 Not used. Set to "0". II - 156 0 to 5000 15 (0.1 1/s) 0 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3377 SP177 SPECS Spindle (PR) synchronous specifications Setting range Details 0000 to FFFF HEX 8 setting phos Set the spindle synchronous specifications in bit units. F E D Odx8 C B A 9 7 6 5 fdir 4 3 pyfx 2 rtrn 1 adin bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 fclx Closed loop adin Interpolation A/D 1 compensation invalid rtrn Position monitor during 2 ready OFF invalid pyfx Normal excitation 3 Standard setting 0000 0 fclx Meaning when set to 1 Semi-closed loop Interpolation A/D compensation valid Position monitor during ready OFF valid Position loop excitation fixed (strong) 4 5 fdir Position detector direction (positive direction) Position detector direction (negative direction) odx8 Magnification of excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid Magnification of excessive error width Г— 8 times valid 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F (Used with SPJ) 3378 SP178 VGSP (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain proportional term Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle 0 to 1000 synchronous mode. (1/s) 63 3379 SP179 VGSI (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain integral term Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronous mode. 0 to 1000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3380 SP180 VGSD (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 spindle synchronous mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 3381 SP181 VCGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in spindle synchronous mode. 100 II - 157 0 to 100 (%) 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3382 SP182 VCSS (PR) Setting range Details Spindle Set the speed when the speed loop synchronous proportional gain change starts in the Change spindle synchronous mode. starting speed of variable Proportional gain speed loop SP178 proportional gain SP178Г— (SP181/100) 0 to 32767 (r/min) Standard setting 0 Speed SP182 SP017 3383 SP183 SYNV Spindle synchronous Sync matching speed For changeover from the speed loop to the 0 to 1000 position loop in the spindle synchronous (r/min) mode, set a speed command error range for output of the synchronous speed matching signal. 20 3384 SP184 FFCS (PR) Spindle synchronous Acceleration rate feed forward gain Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain in 0 to 1000 the spindle synchronous mode. (%) This parameter is used only with the SPJ2. 0 3385 SP185 SINP Spindle synchronous In-position width Set the position error range for output of the 1 to 2880 in-position signal in the spindle synchronous (1/16В°) mode. 16 3386 SP186 SODR (PR) Spindle synchronous Excessive error width Set the excessive error width in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 32767 ( pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) 32767 3387 SP187 IQGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification1 Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3388 SP188 IDGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification 2 Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3389 SP189 PG2S Spindle synchronous Position loop gain 2 Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is carried out in the spindle (1/s) synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0". 0 3390 SP190 PG3S Spindle synchronous Position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is carried out in the spindle (1/s) synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0". 0 II - 158 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details 3391 SP191 Use not possible. 3392 SP192 Not used. Set to "0". 3393 SP193 SPECT Synchronized (PR) tapping specifications Set the synchronized tapping specifications in bit units. F E D zrtn ptyp od8x 7 6 5 fdir C B A 9 8 phos 4 cdir 3 pyfx 2 1 adin 0 fclx Standard setting 0 0 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 0 (Gear 1 : 1 only) adin Interpolation A/D Interpolation A/D 1 compensation invalid compensation valid rtrn Position monitor during Position monitor during 2 ready OFF invalid ready OFF valid pyfx Normal excitation Position loop excitation 3 fixed (strong) 4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (вЂ“) fdir Position detector Position detector 5 polarity (+) polarity (вЂ“) 6 7 phos Normal Synchronized tapping 8 (no compensation) position compensation valid 9 A B C od8x Magnification of Magnification of D excessive error width Г— excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid 8 times valid ptyp Position control switch Position control switch E type: After zero point type: After deceleration return stop zrtn Zero point return Zero point return F direction: CCW direction: CW 3394 SP194 VGTP (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain proportional term Set the speed loop proportional gain in synchronized tapping mode. 0 to 1000 63 (1/s) 3395 SP195 VGTI (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain integral term Set the speed loop integral gain in synchronized tapping mode. 0 to1000 60 (0.1 1/s) 3396 SP196 VGTD (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 15 synchronized tapping mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 3397 SP197 This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. II - 159 0 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Setting range Details 3398 SP198 VCGT Synchronized (PR) tapping target value of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the magnification of speed loop 0 to 100 proportional gain with respect to SP194 (%) (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in synchronized tapping mode. 3399 SP199 VCST Synchronized (PR) tapping change starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the speed where the speed loop proportional gain change starts during synchronized tapping. Standard setting 100 0 to 32767 0 (r/min) Proportional gain SP194 SP194Г— (SP198/100) Speed SP199 SP017 3400 SP200 FFC1 (PR) Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 1) Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 000 during synchronized tapping. This parameter should be used when an error of relative position to Z-axis servo is large. 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3401 SP201 FFC2 (PR) Synchronized Set the acceleration feed forward gain tapping acceleration for selection of gear 001 during feed forward gain synchronized tapping. (gear 2) 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3402 SP202 FFC3 (PR) Synchronized Set the acceleration feed forward gain tapping acceleration for selection of gear 010 during feed forward gain synchronized tapping. (gear 3) 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3403 SP203 FFC4 (PR) Synchronized Set the acceleration feed forward gain tapping acceleration for selection of gear 011 during feed forward gain synchronized tapping. (gear 4) 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3404 SP204 to to 3413 SP213 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronized tapping zero point return speed This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop. 0 to 500 (r/min) 50 3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronized tapping zero point return deceleration rate This parameter is valid when SP193 0 to 10000 1 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". (pulse) Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during synchronized tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value. II - 160 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Details Setting range 3416 SP216 TPST Synchronized tapping zero point return shift amount This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronized tapping zero point position. 3417 SP217 TINP Synchronized tapping in-position width Set the position error range for output of the 1 to 2880 in-position during synchronized tapping. (1/16В°) 16 3418 SP218 TODR (PR) Synchronized tapping excessive error width Set the excessive error width during synchronized tapping. 1 to 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) 32767 3419 SP219 IQGT (PR) Synchronized Set the magnification of current loop gain tapping current (torque component) during synchronized loop gain tapping. magnification 1 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3420 SP220 IDGT (PR) Synchronized Set the magnification of current loop gain tapping current (excitation component) during loop gain synchronized tapping. magnification 2 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3421 SP221 PG2T Synchronized tapping position loop gain 2 Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is applied during (1/s) synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0". 0 3422 SP222 PG3T Synchronized tapping position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is applied during (1/s) synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0". 0 3423 SP223 SPDV Speed monitor Set the spindle limit speed in the door open 0 to 800 speed state. (r/min) (Invalid when 0 is set.) If the spindle end speed exceeds this setting value when the door is open, the speed monitor error (5E) will occur. 0 3424 SP224 SPDF Speed monitor Set the time (continuous) to detect alarms. 0 to 2813 time (Detected instantly when 0 is set.) (3.5ms) 0 II - 161 0 to 4095 Standard setting 0 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items Details Setting range Standard setting If gain changeover is valid (SP097: 0 to 2560 SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the (1/256-fold) magnification of each gain changed to after in-position. 0 Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (L coil) 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 3427 SP227 OXVKP Speed loop proportional gain magnification after orientation gain changeover 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 3425 SP225 OXKPH Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (H coil) 3426 SP226 OXKPL 3428 SP228 OXVKI Speed loop cumulative gain magnification after orientation gain changeover If gain changeover is valid (SP097: 0 to 2560 SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the (1/256-fold) magnification of each gain changed to after in-position. 0 3429 SP229 OXSFT Orientation virtual target shift amount Set the amount to shift the target position when orientation virtual target position is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitD=1). 0 3430 SP230 to to 3432 SP232 Use not possible. II - 162 0 to 2048 (360В°/4096) 8. 8.3 No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Items 3433 SP233 JL (PR) Setting range Details Disturbance Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load observer general inertia and motor inertia. inertia scale Standard setting 0 to 5000 (%) 0 Disturbance observer low path filter frequency Set the frequency of the low path filter for 0 to 1000 when the disturbance observer is valid. (1/s) 0 Disturbance observer gain Set the gain for the disturbance observer. Setting Motor inertia + load inertia Г—100 value = Motor inertia (Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.) 3434 SP234 OBS1 (PR) 3435 SP235 OBS2 (PR) Setting (1/s) = 2ПЂf f: Approx. 1.5 times the disturbance frequency 0 to 500 (%) 0 3436 SP236 OBS3 This is used by Mitsubishi. 0 Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 3437 SP237 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3438 SP238 to to 3441 SP241 Use not possible. 0 0 3442 SP242 Vavx 0 This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 3443 SP243 UTTM 0 0 3444 SP244 OPLP 0 0 3445 SP245 PGHS 0 0 3446 SP246 TEST 0 0 0 0 3447 SP247 to to 3448 SP248 Use not possible. 3449 SP249 SM0 Speed meter speed Set the motor rotation speed when the 0 to 32767 speed meter 10V is output. (r/min) When set to "0", this parameter becomes the same as SP017 (TSP). 0 3450 SP250 LM0 Load meter voltage Set the voltage when the load meter 120% is output. When set to "0", this becomes 10V. 0 to 10 (V) 0 Use not possible. 0 0 3451 SP251 to to 3452 SP252 II - 163 8. 8.3 No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Details Setting range Standard setting 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data number Set the output data number for channel 1 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 When set to "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number Set the output data number for channel 2 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 When set to "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3455 SP255 DA1MPY DA output channel 1 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 1 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is the setting (1/256-fold) value divided by 256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3456 SP256 DA2MPY DA output channel 2 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 2 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is the setting (1/256-fold) value divided by 256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3457 (PR) to 3520 (PR) SP257 RPM to SP320 BSD This parameter is valid only in the following two conditional cases: Motor constant (H coil) 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor. (b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor. (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. 3521 (PR) to 3584 (PR) SP321 RPML to SP384 BSDL Motor constant (L coil) This parameter is valid only in the following conditional case: (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor. (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. II - 164 0000 to 0000 FFFF HEX setting 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ............................... BNP-C3000 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The "fixed control constants" and "fixed control bits" in this section are set by Mitsubishi. ! CAUTION ! Do not make remarkable adjustments or changes of the parameters as the operation may become unstable. ! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to вЂњ0вЂќ. No. Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3201 SP001 PGM Magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain As the set value is larger, the orientation 0 to 2000 time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is (0.1 1/s) increased. However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 100 3202 SP002 PGE Encoder As the set value is larger, the orientation 0 to 2000 orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is (0.1 1/s) position loop gain increased. However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 100 3203 SP003 PGC0 C-axis non-cutting Set the position loop gain in C-axis position loop gain non-cutting mode. During non-cutting (rapid traverse, etc.) with the C axis control, this position loop gain setting is valid. 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 3204 SP004 OINP Orientation in-position width 1 to 2880 (1/16 В°) 16 Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output. 3205 SP005 OSP (PR) Orientation mode Set the motor speed limit value to be used 0 to 32767 changing speed when the speed loop is changed to the (r/min) limit value position loop in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value. 0 3206 SP006 CSP Orientation mode As the set value is larger, the orientation deceleration rate time becomes shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to overshoot. 20 1 to 1000 3207 SP007 OPST In-position shift amount for orientation Set the stop position for orientation. (i) Motor built-in encoder, encoder: Set the value by dividing 360В° by 4096. (ii) Magnetic sensor: Divide вЂ“5В° to +5В° by 1024 and put 0В° for 0. (i) 0 to 4095 0 3208 SP008 Not used. Set to "0". 0 II - 165 (ii) вЂ“512 to 512 0 8. No. Items SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting range Details Standard setting 3209 SP009 PGT Synchronized Set the spindle position loop gain in tapping synchronized tapping mode. Position loop gain 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 3210 SP010 PGS Spindle synchronous position loop gain Set the spindle position loop gain in spindle synchronization mode. 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 Use not possible. 0 0 1 to 32767 (r/min) 6000 3211 SP011 to to 3216 SP016 3217 SP017 TSP (PR) Maximum motor speed Set the maximum motor speed of the spindle. 3218 SP018 ZSP (PR) Motor zero speed Set the motor speed for which zero-speed 1 to 1000 output is performed. (r/min) 50 3219 SP019 CSN1 (PR) Speed cushion 1 Set the time constant for a speed 1 to 32767 command from "0" to the maximum speed. (10ms) (This parameter is invalid in position loop mode.) 30 3220 SP020 SDTS (PR) Speed detection set value Set the motor speed so for which speed 0 to 32767 detection output is performed. (r/min) Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP). 600 3221 SP021 TLM1 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit rate for torque limit signal 001. 0 to 120 (%) 10 3222 SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop (PR) gain proportional term under speed control Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 1000 speed control mode. (1/s) When the gain is increased, response is improved but vibration and sound become larger. 63 3223 SP023 VGNI1 (PR) Set the speed loop integral gain in speed 0 to 1000 control mode. (0.1 1/s) Usually, set a value in proportion to SP022 (VGNP1). 60 Use not possible. 0 Speed loop gain integral term under speed control 3224 SP024 0 3225 SP025 GRA1 (PR) Spindle gear teeth count 1 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle 1 to 32767 corresponding to gear 000. 1 3226 SP026 GRA2 (PR) Spindle gear teeth count 2 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle 1 to 32767 corresponding to gear 001. 1 3227 SP027 GRA3 (PR) Spindle gear teeth count 3 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle 1 to 32767 corresponding to gear 010. 1 3228 SP028 GRA4 (PR) Spindle gear teeth count 4 Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle 1 to 32767 corresponding to gear 011. 1 3229 SP029 GRB1 (PR) Motor shaft gear teeth count 1 Set the number of gear teeth of the motor 1 to 32767 shaft corresponding to gear 000. 1 3230 SP030 GRB2 (PR) Motor shaft gear teeth count 2 Set the number of gear teeth of the motor 1 to 32767 shaft corresponding to gear 001. 1 II - 166 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3231 SP031 GRB3 (PR) Motor shaft Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 gear teeth corresponding to gear 010. count 3 1 3232 SP032 GRB4 (PR) Motor shaft Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 gear teeth corresponding to gear 011. count 4 1 3233 SP033 SFNC1 Spindle (PR) function 1 Set the spindle function 1 in bit units. F poff E 7 6 pyst pyoff D C ront B A 5 4 3 2 9 8 pycal pychg 1 0 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A This is used by Mitsubishi. B Set to "0" unless particularly designated. C ront Normal ready ON High-speed ready ON This is used by Mitsubishi. D Set to "0" unless particularly designated. E poff Contactor hold at NC Contactor hold at NC F power OFF invalid power OFF valid II - 167 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3234 SP034 SFNC2 Spindle (PR) function 2 Setting range Details Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. F E D C 7 6 5 4 B A 9 8 Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 3 2 1 0 mkc2 mkch Mk3c mts1 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 mts1 Special motor constant invalid 1 Mk3c 3-step coil changeover function invalid 2 mkch Winding switch function invalid mkc2 Coil changeover function 2 invalid 3 Meaning when set to 1 Special motor constant setting valid 3-step coil changeover function valid Winding switch function valid Coil changeover function 2 valid (Turns ON simultaneously with bit 2) 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F (Note) bit3 mkc2 must be handled on the NC side. 3235 SP035 SFNC3 Spindle (PR) function 3 Set the spindle function 3 in bit units. F E D C B 7 6 5 4 3 A 9 8 2 1 0 mwid lwid hwid (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 hwid H coil output character0 istics change invalid lwid L coil output character1 istics change invalid M coil output character2 mwid istics change invalid 3 4 5 6 7 (Used with SPJ.) 8 9 A B C D E F II - 168 Meaning when set to 1 H coil output characteristics change valid L coil output characteristics change valid M coil output characteristics change valid 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details 3236 SP036 Not used. Set to "0". 3237 (PR) SP037 SFNC5 Spindle function 5 Set the spindle function 5 in bit units. F E D C B A 7 6 5 4 3 2 plgo 9 8 nsno nosg 1 Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0 enco (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 enco Encoder orientation invalid 1 2 plgo PLG orientation invalid 3 4 5 6 7 nosg No-signal detection type 8 (Always monitoring) 9 No-signal detection valid nsno Meaning when set to 1 Encoder orientation valid PLG orientation valid Monitoring only in position loop or orientation-mode No-signal detection invalid A B C D E F (Note) For bit0 to 2, do not set two bits or more to "1" at the same time. 3238 (PR) SP038 SFNC6 Spindle function 6 Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. F E 7 6 hzrn orm D C XFzs 5 4 tdn B A 3 2 plg2 pftm 9 8 pl80 sdt2 1 0 alty (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 alty Deceleration stop during 0 special alarm invalid 1 pftm Encoder feedback serial 2 communication invalid plg2 Semi-closed pulse 3 output signal Г—2 invalid 4 tdn Fixed control bit 5 orm Orientation start memo 6 invalid 7 hzrn Fixed control bit 8 sdt2 9 pl80 A B C XFzs Fixed control bit D E F II - 169 Meaning when set to 1 Deceleration stop during special alarm valid Encoder feedback serial communication valid Semi-closed pulse output signal Г—2 valid Orientation start memo valid 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3239 SP039 ATYP (PR) Setting range Details Amplifier type Set the amplifier type. Set each amplifier type or "0" Parameter setting Amplifier type 0000 вЂ“вЂ“ 0001 0002 вЂ“вЂ“ вЂ“вЂ“ 0003 вЂ“вЂ“ 0004 вЂ“вЂ“ 0005 вЂ“вЂ“ 0006 Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 вЂ“вЂ“ 0007 SPM-110 0008 SPM-150 0009 SPM-185 000A SPM-220 000B SPM-260 000C SPM-300 000D (SPM-370) 000E (SPM-450) 000F вЂ“вЂ“ 0010 вЂ“вЂ“ (Note) (SPM-370) and (SPM-450) are used with MDS-B-SPM. 3240 SP040 MTYP (PR) Motor type F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 motr 1 0 bit Name Details motr Set the motor type. 0 Set "0" when using a special motor. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F II - 170 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3241 SP041 PTYP (PR) Power supply type Setting range Details Power supply type F E D C B A amp 7 6 9 8 1 0 rtyp 5 4 3 2 0000 to FFFF HEX setting Standard setting 0000 ptyp bit Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary. To validate the external emergency stop function, add 40h. Set3 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x ting ptyp Not 4 CV-300 x0 used 5 CV-110 CR-10 x1 6 CV-220 CR-15 x2 7 CR-22 x3 CR-37 x4 CV-37 CV-150 CV-450 CV-550 x5 CV-260 CR-55 x6 CV-55 CV-370 x7 CR-75 x8 CV-75 CV-185 CR-90 x9 0 1 2 8 Set the regenerative resistor type when MDS-A-CR is used. SetRegenerative resistor Resistance 9 Capacity rtyp ting model name value A 0 MDS-C1-CV (Setting when using power supply regeneration) B 1 GZG200W260HMJ 80W 26в„¦ 2 150W GZG300W130HMJГ—2 26в„¦ 3 MR-RB30 300W 13в„¦ 4 MR-RB50 500W 13в„¦ 5 350W GZG200W200HMJГ—3 6.7в„¦ 6 500W GZG300W200HMJГ—3 6.7в„¦ 7 R-UNIT-1 700W 30в„¦ 8 R-UNIT-2 700W 15в„¦ 9 R-UNIT-3 2100W 15в„¦ A to D No setting E Large capacity + ready ON high-speed sequence F Ready ON high-speed sequence C Always set to вЂњ0вЂќ. D amp E F 3242 SP042 CRNG (PR) C-axis detector This parameter is used to set the C-axis range detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. "2" is used by Mitsubishi for testing. 3243 SP043 TRNG (PR) Synchronous tapping, spindle synchronous detector range 3244 SP044 TRANS NC communi(PR) cation frequency 0 to 7 0 This parameter is used to set the 0 to 7 synchronous tapping or spindle synchronous detector range. Set "0" for this parameter. 0 Set a frequency of data communication with NC. II - 171 0 to 32767 Standard: 0 Special: 1028 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3245 SP045 CSNT Dual cushion timer Set the cycle to add the increment values in 0 to 1000 the dual cushion process. (ms) When this setting value is increased, the dual cushion will increase, and the changes in the speed during acceleration/deceleration will become gradual. 0 3246 SP046 CSN2 Speed (PR) command dual cushion For an acceleration/deceleration time constant defined in SP019 (CSN1) , this parameter is used to provide smooth movement only at the start of acceleration/deceleration. As the value of this parameter is smaller, it moves smoother but the acceleration/deceleration time becomes longer. To make this parameter invalid, set "0". 0 3247 SP047 SDTR Speed (PR) detection reset value Set the reset hysteresis width for a speed 0 to 1000 detection set value defined in SP020 (SDTS). (r/min) 30 3248 SP048 SUT (PR) Speed reach range Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the commanded speed for output of the speed reach signal. 0 to 100 (%) 15 3249 SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 010. 1 to 120 (%) 20 3250 SP050 TLM3 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 011. 1 to 120 (%) 30 3251 SP051 TLM4 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 100. 1 to 120 (%) 40 3252 SP052 TLM5 Torque limit 5 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 101. 1 to 120 (%) 50 3253 SP053 TLM6 Torque limit 6 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 110. 1 to 120 (%) 60 3254 SP054 TLM7 Torque limit 7 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit signal 111. 1 to 120 (%) 70 0 to 1000 3255 SP055 SETM Excessive Set the timer value until the excessive speed 0 to 60 (s) 12 (PR) speed deviation deviation alarm is output. timer The value of this parameter should be longer than the acceleration/deceleration time. 3256 SP056 Use not possible. 0 3257 SP057 STOD Constant в†’ Set the value for judging when changing from 0 to 50 (PR) a constant to excessive speed command. (r/min) excessive judgment value II - 172 0 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3258 SP058 SDT2 (PR) 2nd speed detection speed Set the speed for turning the 2nd speed 0 to 32767 0 detection ON. (r/min) (This is valid only when SP038: SFNC6-bit8 is set to "1".) If the speed drops below this set speed, the 2nd speed detection will turn ON. When the speed reaches this set speed +15r/min or more, the 2nd speed detection will turn OFF. If SP034: SFNC2-bit1 is set to "1", this will be the medium-speed and high-speed coil changeover speed. The speed detection reset width follows the SP047 (speed detection reset width) setting. 3259 SP059 MKT (PR) Winding changeover base shut-off timer Set the base shut-off time for contactor 50 to switching at winding changeover. 10000 Note that the contactor may be damaged with (ms) burning if the value of this parameter is too small. 3260 SP060 MKT2 (PR) Current limit timer after winding changeover Set the current limit time to be taken after completion of contactor switching at winding changeover. 3261 SP061 MKIL (PR) Current limit value after winding changeover Set the current limit value during a period 0 to 120 defined in SP060 (MKT2) after completion of (%) contactor switching at winding changeover. 75 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 0 to 1000 (s) 60 3262 SP062 0 to 10000 500 (ms) 3263 SP063 OLT (PR) Overload Set the time constant for detection of the alarm motor overload alarm. detection time 3264 SP064 OLL (PR) Overload Set the detection level of the motor overload 0 to 180 alarm alarm. (%) detection level 3265 SP065 VCGN1 Target value (PR) of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP). II - 173 150 0 to 100 (%) 110 100 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 0 to 32767 (r/min) 0 Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts. 0 to 32767 (r/min) 0 3268 SP068 VIGWB Change Set the speed where the current loop gain (PR) ending speed change ends. of variable current loop gain 0 to 32767 (r/min) 0 3269 SP069 VIGN (PR) 0 to 32767 0 3266 SP066 VCSN1 Change (PR) starting speed of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the speed when the speed loop proportional gain change starts. Proportional gain SP022 SP022Г— (SP065/100) Speed SP066 3267 SP067 VIGWA Change (PR) starting speed of variable current loop gain Target value of variable current loop gain SP017 Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component and excitation component) for a change ending speed defined in SP068 (VIGWB). When this parameter is set to "0", the magnification is 1. (1/16-fold) Gain SP069Г—(1/16)-fold 1-fold Speed SP067 SP068 SP017 (TSP) Maximum motor speed 0 to 6000 6001 to 8000 8001 or more 3270 SP070 FHz 3271 SP071 to to 3275 SP075 Machine resonance suppression filter frequency SP067 (VIGWA) SP068 (VIGWB) 0 5000 5000 0 8000 10000 SP017 SP069 (VIGN) 0 45 64 When machine vibration occurs in speed and 0 to 3000 position control, set the frequency of the (Hz) required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used. 0 Use not possible. 0 II - 174 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3276 SP076 FONS Machine resonance suppression filter operation speed 3277 SP077 TDSL (PR) Setting range Details Standard setting When the vibration increases in motor stop 0 to 32767 0 (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine (r/min) vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds. Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "14" unless designated in particular. 14 3278 SP078 FPWM Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. (PR) constant Set "1" unless designated in particular. 1 1 3279 SP079 0 0 3280 SP080 SWTD Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 0 3281 SP081 to to 3286 SP086 0 0 Use not possible. Use not possible. 3287 SP087 DIQM (PR) Target value of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration Set the minimum value of variable torque limit 0 to 150 at deceleration. (%) 3288 SP088 DIQN (PR) Speed for starting change of variable torque limit magnification at deceleration Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration starts to change. 100% 75 0 to 32767 3000 (r/min) Torque limit Inversely proportional to speed SP087 Speed SP088 3289 SP089 to to 3292 SP092 3293 SP093 ORE (PR) Tolerable pulse check error 3294 SP094 LMAV Load meter (PR) output filter 3295 SP095 VFAV (PR) SP017 Use not possible. 0 0 Set this when detecting the pulse detector's pulse mistakes. (Valid only for full close control.) 0 to 32767 0 Set the filter time constant of load meter 0 to 32767 0 output. (2ms) When "0" is set, a filter time constant is set to 100ms. Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set "0" unless designated in particular. II - 175 0 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3296 SP096 EGAR (PR) Encoder gear ratio Setting range Details Set the gear ratio between the spindle end and 0 to 4 the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting value Gear ratio (deceleration) 0 1 2 3 4 1:1 1:2 1:4 1:8 1 : 16 Standard setting 0 (Note) Use a combination so that the encoder end is slower than the spindle end. Set the orientation specifications in bit units. F E ostp orze D C ksft gchg B A ips2 7 vg8x 5 fdir 3 2 1 0 dmin odi2 odi1 6 4 osc1 9 8 (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 0 odi1 Orientation rotation direction odi2 00: Previous (the direction in which the motor has so far rotated under speed control) 01: Forward rotation 1 10: Backward rotation 11: Prohibited (Same as setting value = 10) dmin Orientation in-position Orientation in-position 2 advance invalid advance valid 3 Indexing speed clamp 4 osc1 Indexing speed clamp invalid valid fdir Encoder detector Encoder detector 5 polarity: + polarity: вЂ“ 6 vg8x Speed gain *1/8 during Speed gain *1/8 during 7 torque limit valid torque limit invalid 8 9 A ips2 2nd in-position invalid 2nd in-position valid B C gchg Gain changeover during Gain changeover during orientation invalid orientation valid ksft Orientation virtual target Orientation virtual target D shift invalid shift valid E orze This is used by Mitsubishi. F ostp Set to "0" unless particularly designated. In-position advance (bit 2) 0 (Invalid) Second in-position 3297 SP097 SPECO Orientation (PR) specification 0 (invalid) 1 (valid) In-position signal in OINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal=0 Control output 4/ bit F=1 In-position signal in OINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal=0 Control output 4/ bit F=0 1 (Valid) In-position signal in DINP width=1 Control output 4/ bit 4=1 Second in-position signal in OINP width = 0 Control output 4/ bit F=1 II - 176 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Details Setting range Standard setting 3298 (PR) SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain proportional term in orientation mode Set the speed loop proportional gain in orientation mode. When the gain is increased, rigidity is improved in the orientation stop but vibration and sound become larger. 0 to 2000 (1/s) 63 3299 (PR) SP099 VGOI Set the speed loop integral gain in orientation mode. 0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3300 (PR) SP100 VGOD Orientation mode speed loop gain delay advance term Set a loop gain delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 orientation mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 3301 (PR) SP101 DINP When using the orientation in-position advance function, set the in-position width that is larger than the normal in-position width defined in SP004 (OINP). 16 3302 (PR) SP102 OODR Excessive error Set the excessive error width in orientation value in mode. orientation mode 3303 (PR) SP103 FTM Index positioning completion OFF time timer Set the time for forcedly turn OFF the index 0 to 10000 200 positioning completion signal (different from (ms) the orientation completion signal) after the leading edge of the indexing start signal. 3304 (PR) SP104 TLOR Torque limit value for orientation servo locking Set the torque limit value for orientation 0 to 120 in-position output. (%) If the external torque limit signal is input, the torque limit value set by this parameter is made invalid. 3305 (PR) SP105 IQG0 Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain magnifica- (torque component) at orientation tion 1 in completion. orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3306 (PR) SP106 IDG0 Current loop Set the magnification for current loop gain gain magnifica- (excitation component) at orientation tion 2 in completion. orientation mode 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3307 SP107 CSP2 Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 001. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 to 1000 0 3308 SP108 CSP3 Deceleration rate 3 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 010. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 to 1000 0 3309 SP109 CSP4 Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode corresponding to the gear 011. When this parameter is set to "0", same as SP006 (CSP). 0 to 1000 0 Orientation mode speed loop gain integral term Orientation advance in-position width II - 177 1 to 2880 (1/16В°) 0 to 32767 32767 (1/4 pulse) (1 pulse= 0.088В°) 100 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3310 to 3313 SP110 to SP003 3314 SP114 OPER 3315 SP115 OSP2 3316 Setting range Details Standard setting Use not possible. 0 Orientation pulse miss check value An alarm "5C" will occur if the pulse 0 to 32767 miss value at the orientation stop (360В°/4096) exceeds this setting value. (Note that this is invalid when set to "0".) In this parameter, set the value to fulfill the following conditions. SP114 setting value > 1.5 Г— SP004 (orientation in-position width) 0 Orientation motor speed clamp value 2 When the orientation clamp speed is changed by the control input, this parameter setting will be used instead of SP005: OSP. Indexing speed clamp valid This parameter is used when (SP097: SPEC0-bit4 = 1). 0 to 32767 (r/min) 0 SP116 Use not possible. 0 0 3317 SP117 ORUT Set by Mitsubishi. 0 Set "0" unless designated in particular. 0 3318 SP118 ORCT Number of Set the number of times to retry when 0 to 100 orientation retry an orientation or feedback error occurs. (time) times The warning (A9) is issued while retrying orientation, and an alarm (5C) is issued when the set number of times is exceeded. 0 3319 SP119 MPGH Orientation position gain H winding compensation magnification 0 Set the compensation magnification of 0 to 2560 the orientation position loop gain for the (1/256-fold) H winding. H winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) Г— SP119/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002. 3320 SP120 MPGL Orientation position gain L winding compensation magnification Set the compensation magnification of 0 to 2560 the orientation position loop gain for the (1/256-fold) L winding. L winding orientation position loop gain = SP001 (or SP002) Г— SP120/256 When set to "0", will become the same as SP001 or SP002. II - 178 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3321 SP121 MPCSH Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the 0 to 2560 deceleration orientation deceleration rate for the H winding. (1/256-fol rate H d) winding Orientation deceleration rate for the H compensa- winding tion magnifi= SP006 Г— SP121/256 cation When set to "0", will become the same as SP006. 0 3322 SP122 MPCSL 0 3323 to 3325 SP123 to SP125 3326 SP126 MPGH Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the 0 to 2560 deceleration orientation deceleration rate for the L winding. (1/256-fol rate L d) winding Orientation deceleration rate for the L compensa- winding tion magnifi= SP006 Г— SP122/256 cation When set to "0", will become the same as SP006. Use not possible. 0 0 0 to 2560 (1/256fold) 0 3327 SP127 MPCSM Orientation Set this to set the orientation deceleration rate 0 to 2560 deceleration for the coil motor to the M coil's unique value. (1/256rate M coil fold) compensation 0 3328 SP128 OXKPM Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (M coil) 0 Orientation Set this to set the orientation position loop position gain gain for the coil changeover motor to the M M coil com- coil's unique value. pensation Set the M coil gain magnification to be used after in-position when gain changeover is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation. II - 179 0 to 2560 (1/256fold) 8. No. 3329 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items SP129 SPECC Setting range Details C-axis specifications 0000 Set the C-axis specifications in bit units. F E D C B zrtn ptyp fb9x zrtd zrn2 7 vg8x 6 5 fdir 4 A 3 2 phos rtrn Standard setting 9 zdir 8 ztyp 1 0 fclx (Note) Always set "0" for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 0 (Gear 1 : 1 only) 1 rtrn Position monitor during Position monitor during 2 ready OFF invalid ready OFF valid Vx4 synchronization 3 phos Normal (no compensation) compensation valid 4 fdir Position detector Position detector 5 polarity (+) polarity (вЂ“) 6 vg8x Speed gain Г— 1/8 during Speed gain Г— 1/8 during 7 torque limit valid torque limit invalid ztyp Z-phase type: Normal Z-phase type: Start up 8 start up only zdir Z-phase rising polarity Z-phase rising polarity 9 (+) (вЂ“) A B zrn2 This is used by Mitsubishi. C zrtd Set to "0" unless particularly designated. D E F 3330 SP130 PGC1 fb9x ptyp zrtn Speed feedback Standard (PLG) Position control switch type: After zero point return Zero point return direction: CCW Speed feedback 90,000 pulse detector Position control switch type: After deceleration stop Zero point return direction: CW First Set the position loop gain when the first gain is 1 to 200 position loop selected for C axis cutting. (1/s) gain for cutting on C-axis II - 180 15 8. No. 3331 3332 3333 3334 (PR) 3335 (PR) 3336 (PR) 3337 (PR) 3338 (PR) 3339 (PR) SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting range Standard setting Items Details Second position loop gain for cutting on C-axis SP132 PGC3 Third position loop gain for cutting on C-axis SP133 PGC4 Stop position loop gain for cutting on C-axis SP134 VGCP0в€— C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain proportional item SP135 VGCI0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain integral item SP136 VGCD0 C-axis non-cutting speed loop gain delay advance item SP137 VGCP1 First speed loop gain proportional item for C-axis cutting SP138 VGCI1 First speed loop gain integral item for cutting on C-axis SP139 VGCD1 First speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis Set the position loop gain when the second gain is selected for C axis cutting. Set the position loop gain when the third gain is selected for C-axis cutting. Set the position loop gain for stopping when carrying out C-axis cutting. Set the speed loop proportional gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 1 to 200 (1/s) 15 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 Set the speed loop integral gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 Set the speed loop delay advance 0 to 5000 gain in C-axis non-cutting mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is exercised. 15 Set the speed loop proportional gain 0 to 5000 when the first gain is selected for (1/s) C-axis cutting. 63 Set the speed loop integral gain when the first gain is selected for C-axis cutting. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 Set the speed loop delay advance 0 to 5000 gain when the first gain is selected (0.1 1/s) for curing on the C-axis. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. Second speed Set the speed loop proportional gain 0 to 5000 loop gain when the second gain is selected for (1/s) proportional item C-axis cutting. for cutting on C-axis 15 SP131 PGC2 3340 (PR) SP140 VGCP2 3341 (PR) SP141 VGCI2 Second speed Set the speed loop integral gain 0 to 5000 loop gain integral when the second gain is selected for (0.1 1/s) item for cutting C-axis cutting. on C-axis 60 3342 (PR) SP142 VGCD2 Second speed loop gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis 15 Set the speed loop delay advance 0 to 5000 gain when the second gain is (0.1 1/s) selected for C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. II - 181 63 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Details Setting range Standard setting 3343 SP143 VGCP3 Third speed loop Set the speed loop proportional gain (PR) gain proportional when the third gain is selected for item for cutting C-axis cutting. on C-axis 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3344 SP144 VGCI3 (PR) 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 Set the speed loop delay advance gain 0 to 5000 when the third gain is selected for (0.1 1/s) C-axis cutting. When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 Third speed loop Set the speed loop integral gain when gain integral item the third gain is selected for C-axis for cutting on cutting. C-axis 3345 SP145 VGCD3 Third speed loop (PR) gain delay advance item for cutting on C-axis 3346 SP146 VGCP4 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop proportional gain (PR) proporwhen C-axis cutting is stopped. tional item for stop of cutting on C-axis 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3347 SP147 VGCI4 (PR) 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 60 Set the speed loop delay advance gain 0 to 5000 when C-axis cutting is stopped. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain when integral item for C-axis cutting is stopped. stop of cutting on C-axis 3348 SP148 VGCD4 Speed loop gain (PR) delay advance item for stop of cutting on C-axis 3349 SP149 CZRN C-axis zero point This parameter is valid when SP129 return speed (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop. 3350 SP150 CPDT C-axis zero point This parameter is valid when SP129 1 to 10000 return (SPECC) bitE is set to "0". deceleration point Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during C-axis zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point, set the smaller value. 3351 SP151 CPSTL C-axis zero point This parameter is valid when SPECC return shift (SP129) bitE is set to "0". amount Set the C-axis zero point position. (low byte) 3352 SP152 CPSTH C-axis zero point return shift amount (high byte) 3353 SP153 CINP C-axis in-position Set the position error range in which width the in-position signal is output on the C-axis. II - 182 1 to 500 (r/min) 50 1 HEX setting H: 0000 00000000 to L: 0000 FFFFFFFF (1/1000В°) 0000 to FFFF (1/1000В°) HEX setting 03E8 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3354 SP154 CODRL Excessive error (PR) width on C-axis (low byte) Set the excessive error width on the C-axis. 3355 SP155 CODRH Excessive error (PR) width on C-axis (high byte) 3356 SP156 OVSH Setting range Details C-axis overshoot Set this to prevent overshooting when compensashifting from movement to stopping tion with C-axis control. (Set this referring to the load meter display when overshooting occurred.) Standard setting HEX setting H: 0001 00000000 to L: D4C0 FFFFFFFF (1/1000В°) 0 to 1000 (0.1%) 0 3357 SP157 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3358 SP158 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3359 SP159 Use not possible. 0 0 3360 SP160 Use not possible. 0 0 3361 SP161 IQGC0 (PR) Current loop gain Set the magnification of current loop magnifigain (torque component) for C-axis cation 1 for non-cutting. non-cutting on C-axis 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3362 SP162 IDGC0 (PR) Current loop gain Set the magnification of current loop 1 to 1000 magnifigain (excitation component) for C-axis (%) cation 2 for non-cutting. non-cutting on C-axis 100 3363 SP163 IQGC1 (PR) Current loop gain Set the magnification of current loop magnifigain (torque component) for C-axis cation 1 for cutting. cutting on C-axis 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3364 SP164 IDGC1 (PR) Current loop gain Set the magnification of current loop 1 to 1000 magnifigain (excitation component) for C-axis (%) cation 2 for cutting. cutting on C-axis 100 3365 SP165 PG2C C-axis position loop gain 2 Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is carried out for (1/s) control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0". 0 3366 SP166 PG3C C-axis position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is carried out for (1/s) control of the C-axis. This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control. When this function is not used, assign "0". 0 II - 183 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3367 SP167 PGU (PR) Position loop gain for increased spindle holding force Set the position loop gain for when the disturbance observer is valid. 0 to 100 (1/s) 15 3368 SP168 VGUP (PR) Speed loop gain proportional item for increased spindle holding force Set the speed loop gain proportional item for when the disturbance observer is valid. 0 to 5000 (1/s) 63 3369 SP169 VGUI (PR) Speed loop gain integral item for increased spindle holding force Set the speed loop gain integral item for when 0 to 5000 the disturbance observer is valid. (0.1 1/s) 60 3370 SP170 VGUD (PR) Speed loop gain delay advance item for increased spindle holding force Set the speed loop gain delay advance item for when the disturbance observer is valid. 0 to 5000 (0.1 1/s) 15 3371 SP171 to to 3376 SP176 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3377 SP177 SPECS Spindle (PR) synchronous specifications Set the spindle synchronous specifications in 0000 to FFFF bit units. HEX F E D C B A 9 8 setting odx8 phos 7 6 5 fdir 4 3 mach bit Name Meaning when set to 0 0 fclx Closed loop 1 2 mach Automatic coil change3 over during spindle synchronization invalid 4 fdir Position detector direc5 tion (positive direction) 6 7 8 9 A B C odx8 Magnification of D excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid E F (Used with SPJ) II - 184 2 1 0 fclx Meaning when set to 1 Semi-closed loop Automatic coil changeover during spindle synchronization valid Position detector direction (negative direction) Magnification of excessive error width Г— 8 times valid 0000 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3378 SP178 VGSP (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain proportional term Set the speed loop proportional gain in spindle synchronous mode. 0 to 2000 (1/s) 63 3379 SP179 VGSI (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain integral term Set the speed loop integral gain in spindle synchronous mode. 0 to 2000 (0.1 1/s) 60 3380 SP180 VGSD (PR) Spindle synchronous speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 spindle synchronous mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 15 3381 SP181 VCGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Target value of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the magnification of speed loop proportional gain with respect to SP178 (VGSP) at the maximum speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in spindle synchronous mode. 100 3382 SP182 VCSS (PR) 0 to 32767 0 Spindle Set the speed when the speed loop (r/min) synchronous proportional gain change starts in the spindle Change synchronous mode. starting speed of variable Proportional gain speed loop SP178 proportional gain SP178Г— (SP181/100) 0 to 100 (%) Speed SP182 SP017 3383 SP183 SYNV Spindle synchronous Sync matching speed For changeover from the speed loop to the position loop in the spindle synchronous mode, set a speed command error range for output of the synchronous speed matching signal. 3384 SP184 FFCS (PR) Spindle synchronous Acceleration rate feed forward gain Set the acceleration rate feed forward gain in 0 to 1000 the spindle synchronous mode. (%) This parameter is used only with the SPJ2. 0 3385 SP185 SINP Spindle synchronous In-position width Set the position error range for output of the in-position signal in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 2880 (1/16В°) 16 3386 SP186 SODR (PR) Spindle synchronous Excessive error width Set the excessive error width in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 32767 32767 ( pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) II - 185 0 to 1000 (r/min) 20 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3387 SP187 IQGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification1 Set the magnification of current loop gain (torque component) in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 1000 100 (%) 3388 SP188 IDGS (PR) Spindle synchronous Current loop gain magnification 2 Set the magnification of current loop gain (excitation component) in the spindle synchronous mode. 1 to 1000 100 (%) 3389 SP189 PG2S Spindle synchronous Position loop gain 2 Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 high-gain control is carried out in the spindle (1/s) synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0". 0 3390 SP190 PG3S Spindle synchronous Position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when high-gain 0 to 999 control is carried out in the spindle (1/s) synchronous mode. When this parameter function is not used, set to "0". 0 3391 SP191 Use not possible. 0 3392 SP192 Not used. Set to "0". 3393 SP193 SPECT Synchronized (PR) tapping specifications Set the synchronized tapping specifications in 0000 to FFFF bit units. HEX F E D C B A 9 8 zrtn ptyp od8x phos setting 7 6 5 fdir 0 4 cdir 3 pyfx 2 rtrn 1 0 fclx bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop 0 (Gear 1 : 1 only) 1 rtrn Position monitor during Position monitor during 2 ready OFF invalid ready OFF valid 3 4 cdir Command polarity (+) Command polarity (вЂ“) fdir Position detector Position detector 5 polarity (+) polarity (вЂ“) 6 7 phos Normal Synchronized tapping (no compensation) position command 8 compensation (for synchronization with high-gain servo) 9 A B C od8x Magnification of Magnification of D excessive error width Г— excessive error width Г— 8 times invalid 8 times valid ptyp Position control switch Position control switch E type: After zero point type: After deceleration return stop zrtn Zero point return Zero point return F direction: CCW direction: CW II - 186 0000 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3394 SP194 VGTP (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain proportional term Set the speed loop proportional gain in synchronized tapping mode. 0 to 2000 63 (1/s) 3395 SP195 VGTI (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain integral term Set the speed loop integral gain in synchronized tapping mode. 0 to2000 60 (0.1 1/s) 3396 SP196 VGTD (PR) Synchronized tapping speed loop gain delay advance term Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 15 synchronized tapping mode. (0.1 1/s) When this parameter is set to "0", PI control is applied. 3397 SP197 Use not possible. 0 3398 SP198 VCGT (PR) Synchronized tapping target value of variable speed loop proportional gain Set the magnification of speed loop 0 to 100 proportional gain with respect to SP194 (%) (VGTP) at the maximum motor speed defined in SP017 (TSP) in synchronized tapping mode. 3399 SP199 VCST (PR) Synchronized Set the speed where the speed loop tapping proportional gain change starts during change synchronized tapping. starting speed of variable Proportional gain speed loop SP194 proportional gain SP194Г— (SP198/100) Speed SP199 II - 187 SP017 0 100 0 0 to 32767 (r/min) 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3400 SP200 FFC1 (PR) Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 1) Set the acceleration feed forward gain for 0 to 1000 selection of gear 000 during synchronized (%) tapping. This parameter should be used when an error of relative position to Z-axis servo is large. 0 3401 SP201 FFC2 (PR) Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 2) Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 001 during synchronized tapping. 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3402 SP202 FFC3 (PR) Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 3) Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 010 during synchronized tapping. 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3403 SP203 FFC4 (PR) Synchronized tapping acceleration feed forward gain (gear 4) Set the acceleration feed forward gain for selection of gear 011 during synchronized tapping. 0 to 1000 (%) 0 3404 SP204 Fixed control constant This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 3405 SP205 3406 SP206 GCK Reverse run When the motor moves (including movement 0/1/2 detection error with external force), the motor overrun alarm detection width (3E) will be detected even if the speed command is 0 (including position control stop command) during servo ON (gate ON). Set the movement amount to be detected as an alarm. 0: Detect with 10В° motor movement amount (Recommended setting) 1: Detect with 20В° motor movement amount 2: Detect with 40В° motor movement amount II - 188 0 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3407 SP207 GDL Sequential mode startup timing Setting range Details To carry out spindle synchronization or C-axis 0/1/2 control in the both-chuck state with no movement immediately after the power is turned ON, set this parameter so that the reverse run detection function will function correctly. Set so that servo ON timing for the opposing spindle has the combination of (1) and (2) shown in the drawing below. 0: Servo turns ON simultaneously with servo ON command, and servo ON status is returned immediately. 1: Gate turns ON at pattern (1) shown below, and servo ON status is returned two seconds later. 2: Gate turns ON at pattern (2) shown below, and servo ON status is returned two seconds later. Servo ON command Standard setting 0 Servo ON Gate ON Servo ON (1) 700ms 300ms Servo ON (2) Servo ON status Gate ON 700ms 300ms 2s 3408 SP208 W2 This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 3409 SP209 to to 3413 SP213 Not used. Set to "0". 0 0 3414 SP214 TZRN Synchronized tapping zero point return speed This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) bitE is set to "0". Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop. 3415 SP215 TPDT Synchronized tapping zero point return deceleration rate This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) 0 to 10000 1 bitE is set to "0". (pulse) Set the deceleration rate where the machine starts to decelerate when it returns to the target stop point during synchronized tapping zero point return. When the machine tends to overshoot at the stop point set a smaller value. 3416 SP216 TPST Synchronized tapping zero point return shift amount This parameter is valid when SP193 (SPECT) 0 to 4095 bitE is set to "0". Set the synchronized tapping zero point position. 3417 SP217 TINP Synchronized tapping in-position width Set the position error range for output of the in-position during synchronized tapping. II - 189 0 1 to 2880 16 (1/16В°) 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Details Setting range Standard setting 3418 SP218 TODR (PR) Synchronized Set the excessive error width during tapping synchronized tapping. excessive error width 1 to 32767 (pulse) (1 pulse =0.088В°) 32767 3419 SP219 IQGT (PR) Synchronized Set the magnification of current loop gain tapping current (torque component) during synchronized loop gain tapping. magnification 1 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3420 SP220 IDGT (PR) Synchronized Set the magnification of current loop gain tapping current (excitation component) during loop gain synchronized tapping. magnification 2 1 to 1000 (%) 100 3421 SP221 PG2T Synchronized tapping position loop gain 2 Set the second position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0". 0 to 999 (1/s) 0 3422 SP222 PG3T Synchronized tapping position loop gain 3 Set the third position loop gain when high-gain control is applied during synchronized tapping. When this parameter is not used, set to "0". 0 to 999 (1/s) 0 3423 SP223 SPDV Speed monitor Set the spindle limit speed in the door speed open state. (Invalid when 0 is set.) If the spindle end speed exceeds this setting value when the door is open, the speed monitor error (5E) will occur. 0 to 800 (r/min) 0 3424 SP224 SPDF Speed monitor Set the time (continuous) to detect alarms. 0 to 2813 time (Detected instantly when 0 is set.) (3.5ms) 0 3425 SP225 OXKPH Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (H coil) If gain changeover is valid (SP097: 0 to 2560 SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the (1/256-fold) magnification of each gain changed to after in-position. 0 3426 SP226 OXKPL Position loop gain magnification after orientation gain changeover (L coil) 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 3427 SP227 OXVKP Speed loop proportional gain magnification after orientation gain changeover 0 to 2560 (1/256-fold) 0 II - 190 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Speed loop cumulative gain magnification after orientation gain changeover Setting range Details Standard setting If gain changeover is valid (SP097: 0 to 2560 SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the (1/256-fold) magnification of each gain changed to after in-position. 0 3429 SP229 OXSFT Orientation virtual target shift amount Set the amount to shift the target position when orientation virtual target position is valid (SP097: SPEC0-bitD=1). 0 to 2048 (360В°/4096) 0 3430 SP230 to to 3432 SP232 Use not possible. 0 to 5000 (%) 0 0 to 1000 (1/s) 0 3428 SP228 OXVKI 3433 SP233 JL (PR) Disturbance observer general inertia scale Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load inertia and motor inertia. Setting Motor inertia + load inertia Г—100 value = Motor inertia (Normally, set "100" or more. When less than "50" is set, the setting will be invalid.) To calculate speed loop gain with general inertia scale: The effective proportional gain and effective cumulative gain during the speed control are changed at the set scale. 3434 SP234 OBS1 (PR) Disturbance observer low path filter frequency Set the frequency of the low path filter for when the disturbance observer is valid. 3435 SP235 OBS2 (PR) Disturbance observer gain Set the gain for the disturbance observer. 0 to 500 (%) 0 3436 SP236 OBS3 Fixed control constant This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 3437 SP237 KSCP Fixed control constant This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 3440 SP240 Use not possible. 0 0 3441 SP241 Use not possible. 0 0 3442 SP242 Vavx This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 0 0 Setting (1/s) = 2ПЂf f: Approx. 1.5 times the disturbance frequency 3438 SP238 SEZR 3439 SP239 SEZT 3443 SP243 UTTM II - 191 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items Setting range Details Standard setting 3444 SP244 OPLP Use not possible. 0 0 3445 SP245 PGHS This is used by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless particularly designated. 0 0 0 0 0 0 3446 SP246 TEST 3447 SP247 to to 3448 SP248 Use not possible. 3449 SP249 SM0 Speed meter speed Set the motor rotation speed when the 0 to 32767 speed meter 10V is output. (r/min) When set to "0", this parameter becomes the same as SP017 (TSP). 0 3450 SP250 LM0 Load meter voltage Set the voltage when the load meter 120% 0 to 10 is output. When set to "0", this becomes (V) 10V. 0 Use not possible. 0 3451 SP251 to to 3452 SP252 0 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data number Set the output data number for channel 1 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 When set to "0", the output is speedometer. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number Set the output data number for channel 2 вЂ“32768 to of the D/A output function. 32767 When set to "0", the output is load meter. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3455 SP255 DA1MPY DA output channel 1 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 1 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is the setting (1/256-fold) value divided by 256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 3456 SP256 DA2MPY DA output channel 2 magnification Set the data magnification for channel 2 of вЂ“32768 to the D/A output function. 32767 The output magnification is the setting (1/256-fold) value divided by 256. When set to "0", the output magnification becomes 1-fold, in the same manner as when "256" is set. Refer to "9.4 (1) For D/A output functions". 0 II - 192 8. No. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Items 3457 SP257 RPM (PR) to to SP320 BSD 3520 (PR) Motor constant (H coil) Details This parameter is valid only in the following two conditional cases: Setting range Standard setting 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 0000 to FFFF HEX setting 0000 (c) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 Set the motor constants when using a special motor, not described in the SP040 (MTYP) explanation and when not using the coil changeover motor. (d) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the H coil of the coil changeover motor. (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. 3521 SP321 RPML (PR) to to SP384 BSDL 3584 (PR) Motor constant (L coil) This parameter is valid only in the following conditional case: (b) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 Set the motor constant of the L coil of the coil changeover motor. (Note) It is not allowed for the user to change the setting. II - 193 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.5 SUPPLEMENT 8.5 SUPPLEMENT 8.5.1 D/A OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS (1) D/A output specifications Item No. of channels Output cycle Output precision Output voltage range Output scale setting Output pins Function Explanation 2ch 444Вµs (min. value) 8bit 0V to +5V (zero) to +10V, 0V to +10V during meter output 1/256 to В±128 tiems CN9 connector MO1 = 9 pin MO2 = 19 pin GND = 11pin Phase current feedback output function UвЂ“phase current FB : 7 pin D/A output connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Signal LG UIFB MO1 MDSвЂ“BвЂ“SPJ2 Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Signal VIFB MO2 MDSвЂ“C1вЂ“SP II - 194 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.5 SUPPLEMENT (2) Setting the output data Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel. # 3453 3454 No. No. SP253 SP254 Abbrev DA1NO DA2NO Parameter name D/A output channel 1 data No. D/A output channel 2 data No. ch1: Speed meter output 10V=max. speed (0=0V) ch2: Load meter output вЂ“ Current command Current feedback Speed feedback вЂ“ Position droop вЂ“ Feedrate (Fв€†T) 10V=120% load (0=0V) Standard setting value for output scale Standard Output (Setting values in SP255, output unit cycle SP256) 0 Depends on 3.55ms the max. speed 0 Rated 12%/V 3.55ms Rated 100% = 4096 Rated 100% = 4096 r/min 8 8 13 Rated 20%/V 3.55ms Rated 20%/V 3.55ms 500rpm/V 3.55ms 1В° = (64000/65536) 671 10В°/V 1В° = (64000/65536) 629 500rpm/V (When communicating by 3.5ms) 888Вµs 1В° = (64000/65536) 19 (18.64) 360В°/V 888Вµs 1В° = (64000/65536) 19 (18.64) 360В°/V 888Вµs HEX Bit correspondence 3.55ms HEX Bit correspondence 3.55ms Output data Original data unit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 вЂ“ Position command вЂ“ Position feedback вЂ“ Control input 1 Control input 2 Control input 3 Control input 4 Control output 1 Control output 2 Control output 3 Control output 4 Saw-tooth wave 125 test output Rectangular wave 126 test output 2.5V(data0) test 127 output 0 (256) II - 195 888Вµs 444Вµs 0 (256) Cycle 227.5ms Cycle 1.7ms 0 (256) вЂ“ 444Вµs 444Вµs 8. SPINDLE PARAMETERS 8.5 SUPPLEMENT (3) Setting the output scale # 3455 3456 No. SP255 SP256 Abbrev DA1MPY DA2MPY Parameter name D/A output channel 1 magnification D/A output channel 2 magnification Usually, the standard setting value is set for the output scale (SV063, SV 064). When вЂњ0вЂќ is set, the output will be made as well as when вЂњ256вЂќ is set. DATA SP255 256 x 10 [V] 256 (8bit) x + 5 [V] (offset) = (Example) When outputting the position droop with 10В°/V. 640000 65536 x 671 256 x 10 256 + 5 = 5.999 [V] II - 196 Output voltage [V] 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and memorized relative position compensation. (1) Memorized pitch error compensation According to the specified parametersвЂљ this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch errorвЂљ etc. With the reference point defined as the baseвЂљ set the compensation amount in the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1. 1) The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system. Select the desired method with the #4000:Pinc. Machine position is compensated between division points n and n+1 as much as compensation amount between them by linear approximation. Fig. 1. 1 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position II - 197 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE (2) Memorized relative position compensation This methodвЂљ according to the parameters specified in advanceвЂљ compensates the relative position error between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand. For thisвЂљ as shown in Fig. 1. 2вЂљ specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis. The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate axis that is orthogonal to the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis. The section between division points n and n+1 is compensated smoothly by linear approximation. Actual machine position of compensation axis Actual machine position for which no compensation is made : Division points Command machine position along base axis Reference point n n+1 n+2 Command machine position Compensation amount between division points Compensation amount Fig. 1. 2 Relationship between base and compensation axes II - 198 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE (SETUP PARAM 5. 1/15) # 4000 (PR) Pinc Item Machine error offset increment method Details Specify whether to use the incremental amount method or absolute amount method when setting the machine error compensation data. Setting range 0: Absolute volume method 1: Incremental volume method Item Basic axis Details Specify the basic axis address for machine error compensation. 1) For pitch error compensationвЂљ set the name of the axis to be compensated. 2) For relative position compensationвЂљ set the name of the axis to be the base axis. Set the compensation axis address for machine error compensation. 1) For pitch error compensationвЂљ set the same axis name as #4001 cmpax. 2) For relative position compensationвЂљ set the name of the axis to be actually compensated. Set the compensation data No. corresponding to the reference point position. The reference point is actually the baseвЂљ so there is no compensation No. Set the number that is decremented by 1. Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest negative side. Setting range X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address Set the compensation data No. that is on the farthest positive side. 4101 to 5124 Set the compensation amountвЂ™s scale. 0 to 99 Set the interval to divide the basic axis. Each compensation data will be the compensation amount for each of these intervals. 1 to 9999999 <1st axis> # 4001 cmpax 4002 drcax Compensation axis 4003 rdvno Division point number at reference point position 4004 mdvno 4005 pdvno 4006 sc 4007 spcdv Division point number at the most negative side Division point number at the most positive side Compensation scale factor Division interval II - 199 X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address 4101 to 5124 4101 to 5124 9. <2nd axis> 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 <3rd axis> 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 <4th axis> 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 <5th axis> 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION 9.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE <6th axis> 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 <7th axis> 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 <8th axis> 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 <9th axis> 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 <10th axis> 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 Set the parameters corresponding to the 1st axisвЂ™ parameters 4001 to 4007 for each axis. A maximum of 3 axes can be controlledвЂљ but as the relative position is compensatedвЂљ settings for 10 axes can be made. (SETUP PARAM 5. 3/15) to (SETUP PARAM 5. 15/15) # 4101 y y y 5124 Item Details Set the compensation amount for each axis. II - 200 Setting range вЂ“128 to 127 The actual compensation amount will be the value obtained by multiplying the setting value with the compensation scale. 9. 9.2 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTING COMPENSATION DATA 9.2 SETTING COMPENSATION DATA Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system. "#4000:Pinc" 0: Absolute system 1: Incremental system (1) Absolute system Feed from the reference point to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 2. 1. The following is obtained at this time. Set it as the compensation amount. (Specified position вЂ“ Real machine position) Г— 2 (Unit of output) For exampleвЂљ assume that the feed from the reference point to the +100mm position is executed. AlsoвЂљ assume that the real machine position is 99.990mm. In this caseвЂљ the following value is defined as the compensation amount used at the +100mm position: (100000 вЂ“ 99990) Г— 2 = 20 pulses The resultant value is defined as the compensation amount. Assume that the real machine position resulting when feed to the вЂ“100mm position is executedвЂљ is вЂ“99.990mm. In this caseвЂљ the following value is defined as the compensation amount used at the вЂ“100mm position: (вЂ“100000 вЂ“ (вЂ“99990)) Г— 2 = вЂ“20 pulses -100 Compensation amount: 20 pulses (-10Вµm) +99.990 -99.990 Compensation amount: -20 pulses (10Вµm) +100 Fig. 2. 1 (2) Incremental system Fig. 2. 2 contains a machine position that is placed in the positive direction with respect to the reference point. Assume that feed from division nвЂ“1 to n (division interval) is executed. In this caseвЂљ the following value is defined as the compensation amount: (Division interval вЂ“ Actual movement distance) Г— 2 (Unit of output) II - 201 9. 9.2 MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION SETTING COMPENSATION DATA (3) Fig. 2. 3 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the reference point. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this caseвЂљ the following value is defined as the compensation amount: (Division interval + Actual movement distance) Г— 2 (Unit of output) 1 n n+1 n: Division point compensation number 1: Division interval n-1 n 1 Fig. 2. 2 Unit Range Fig. 2. 3 : Unit of output : вЂ“128 to 127 (Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting. The actual unit of compensation pulses depends on the compensation scale factor. II - 202 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS 9.3 9.3 EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS (1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno": Compensation amount in incremental system #4101 (1) (3) (-3) (-2) (0) (3) Error #4102 3 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 2 1 Base axis machine coordinate -1 -2 -3 (3) Compensation amount in absolute system (-2) (0) (-2) (-1) (1) Division point number #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 Specified machine position в€’300.000 в€’200.000 в€’100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 Real machine position в€’299.999 в€’200.000 в€’100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 Compensation amount Increment al Absolute 2 6 в€’6 в€’4 0 6 в€’2 0 6 в€’4 в€’4 2 rdvno mdvno 4103 4101 pdvno 4106 If the setting range (mdvno to "pdvno") is exceededвЂљ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at mdvno or "pdvno". II - 203 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS 9.3 (2) When the range compensated is only the positive range: Compensation amount in incremental system (-2) (1) (0) (3) (1) Error 3 #4113 #4115 #4114 #4116 #4117 2 1 Base axis machine coordinate -1 -2 -3 (-2) (-1) Compensation amount in absolute system (-1) (2) (3) Division point number Compensati Incremen on tal amount Absolute #4113 в€’4 #4114 2 #4115 0 #4116 6 #4117 2 rdvno mdvno 4112 4113 в€’4 в€’2 в€’2 4 6 pdvno 4117 If the machine position exceeds "pdvno"вЂљ the compensation will be based on the compensation amount at "pdvno". If the machine position is negative in this caseвЂљ no compensation will be executed. II - 204 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS 9.3 (3) When the range compensated is only the negative range: Compensation amount in incremental system (-1) (1) (3) (1) (0) (-3) Error #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 3 2 1 Base axis machine coordinate -1 -2 -3 (3) (3) (2) (-1) Compensation amount in absolute system Division point number Compensati Incremen on amount tal Absolute (-2) (-1) #4125 #4127 6 #4128 2 #4129 0 #4130 в€’2 #4126 2 в€’6 rdvno 4130 mdvno 4125 в€’2 в€’4 в€’2 4 6 6 pdvno 4130 If the machine position exceeds "mdvno"вЂљ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at "mdvno". II - 205 9.3 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION EXAMPLE IN USING A LINEAR AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS (4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference point: Compensation amount in incremental system Error 3 #4135 (-1) (-1) #4137 #4136 (1) (3) #4138 #4140 #4139 2 1 Base axis machine coordinate -1 -2 -3 Compensation amount in absolute system (-1) (-2) (1) (2) Division point number Compensati Incremen on amount tal Absolute #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 в€’2 #4139 6 #4140 2 в€’2 в€’2 в€’4 2 4 rdvno 4134 mdvno 4136 pdvno 4140 In this caseвЂљ the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting rule applies also when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine positions and no reference point. II - 206 9. MACHINE ERROR COMPENSATION EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS 9.4 9.4 EXAMPLE IN USING A ROTATION AXIS AS THE BASE AXIS Compensation amount in incremental system (-2) (1) (0) (3) (1) (-3) Error 3 #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4128 #4127 2 1 360В° Base axis machine coordinate -1 -2 -3 (-2) (-1) (-1) Compensation amount in absolute system (2) (3) (0) Division point number Compensati Incremen on tal amount Absolute #4123 #4125 0 #4126 6 #4127 2 #4128 в€’4 #4124 2 в€’6 rdvno 4122 mdvno 4123 в€’4 в€’2 в€’2 4 6 0 pdvno 4128 In this caseвЂљ the sum of the compensation amounts set according to the incremental system is always "0". For the absolute systemвЂљ the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0". II - 207 10. 10.1 PLC CONSTANTS PLC TIMER 10. PLC CONSTANTS 10.1 PLC TIMER (SETUP PARAM 6. 1/13) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 2/13) # 6000 PLC device T000 6015 6016 T015 T016 6095 6096 T095 T096 6103 T103 Item 10ms adding timer <10ms> 100ms adding timer <10ms> 100ms cumulative timer <100ms INC> Details Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid when parameter "#6449 bit0" in the following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0". Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid when parameter "#6449 bit0" in the following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0". Set the time for the timer used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid when parameter "#6449 bit0" in the following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0". Setting range 0 to 32767 (Г—10ms) 0 to 32767 (Г—100ms) 0 to 32767 (Г—100ms) (SETUP PARAM 6. 9/13) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 13/13) # 6600 PLC device R1200/bit0 R1250/bit0 Item PLC timer expansion 6999 R1224/bitF R1274/bitF 10ms adding timer <10ms> Details Set the time for the expanded PLC timer This is set for the timer coils: R1200 to R1224, and timer contacts: R1250 to R1274. A timer command can be issued to a contact other than the existing timer contacts (T0 to T103, Q0 to Q151). Setting range 0 to 32767 (Г—10ms) 10.2 PLC COUNTER (SETUP PARAM 6. 3/13) # 6200 PLC device C000 6223 C023 Item Counter Details Set the time for the counter used in the PLC program (ladder). (Note) This setting value is valid when parameter "#6449 bit1" in the following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0". II - 208 Setting range 0 to 32767 10. 10.3 PLC CONSTANTS PLC CONSTANTS 10.3 PLC CONSTANTS (SETUP PARAM 6. 4/13) # 6301 6348 PLC device Item R2800,2801 PLC constant R2894,2895 Details Set the value to be set in the data type R register used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayedвЂљ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen onceвЂљ and then select this screen again. Setting range вЂ“99999999 to 99999999 10.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT (SETUP PARAM 6. 5/13) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 6/13) # PLC device 6401 R2900-Low 6402 R2900-High Item Bit selection 6495 R2947-Low 6496 R2947-High Details This is the bit type parameter used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayedвЂљ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen onceвЂљ and then select this screen again. Some of the parameters following #6449 may be fixed according to the usage purpose. Refer to the PLC Program Development On-board Instruction Manual. Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON (SETUP PARAM 6. 6/13) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 8/13) # PLC device 6497 R4400-Low 6498 R4400-High Item Bit selection expansion Details This is the bit type parameter (expansion) used in the PLC program (ladder). Even if the data is set in the R register that corresponds to the PLC side when this parameter is displayedвЂљ the screen will not change. Enter a different screen onceвЂљ and then select this screen again. 6595 R4449-Low 6596 R4449-High II - 209 Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON 11. PLC CONSTANTS 11.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT Table: "Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496" Symbol 7 name #6449 0 R2924 1 R2924 2 R2925 3 R2925 4 R2926 L NC card Controller thermal alarm on #6450 H 6 Setting display unit thermal alarm on External Alarm/ alarm operator message change display #6451 L - - #6452 H - L - 5 4 3 2 Integrating Counter C timer T retention retention Full screen display of message - PLC GX-Developer development communienvironment cation on selection GOT communication connection Operator message on Onboard editing not possible Counter (fixed) retention 1 0 PLC counter program on PLC counter program on 1 0 R F Alarm system system message on - Onboard on Integrating timer (fixed) retention - #6453 - - - - Message language change code #6454 5 R2926 6 R2927 7 R2927 8 R2928 9 R2928 A R2929 B R2929 C R2930 D R2930 E R2931 F R2931 H #6455 L - - - - - - - - H - - - - - - - - #6456 #6457 L High-speed input specification 1 H High-speed input specification 2 L High-speed input specification 3 (Spare) H High-speed input specification 4 (Spare) L High-speed output specification 1 H High-speed output specification 2 L High-speed output specification 3 (Spare) H High-speed output specification 4 (Spare) #6458 #6459 #6460 #6461 #6462 #6463 #6464 II - 210 11. PLC CONSTANTS 11.4 SELECTING THE PLC BIT 0 Symbol name #6465 R2932 L 1 #6466 R2932 H - - - - - - - - 2 #6467 R2933 L - - - - - - - - 3 #6468 R2933 H 4 #6469 R2934 L - MC alarm 4 output off 5 #6470 R2934 H 6 #6471 R2935 L - - - - - - - - 7 #6472 R2935 H - - - - - - - - 8 #6473 R2936 L - 9 #6474 R2936 H A #6475 R2937 L B #6476 R2937 H C #6477 R2938 L D #6478 R2938 H E #6479 R2939 L F #6480 R2939 H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 - - - - - - - - Standard PLC parameter - (Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0. (Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi. II - 211 11. MACRO LIST 11. MACRO LIST (SETUP PARAM 7. 1/3) # 7001 to 7091 Item M [01] to M [10] 7002 to 7092 Details <Code> Set the M code used for calling out the macro with the M command. This is valid when #1195 Mmac is set to 1. <Type> Set the macro call out type. 0 M98 Pв€†в€†в€†в€†; and equivalent value call 1 G65 Pв€†в€†в€†в€†; and equivalent value call 2 G66 Pв€†в€†в€†в€†; and equivalent value call 3 G66.1 Pв€†в€†в€†в€†; and equivalent value call others 7003 to 7093 7102 7103 # 7201 to 7291 Item G [01] to G [10] 7202 to 7292 7203 to 7293 7302 7303 Tmac 7312 7313 1 to 99999999 Set the type and program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the #1170 M2name address command when #1198 M2mac is set to 1. <Type> 0 to 3 Same as the M call macro. <Program No.> 0 to 99999999 Same as the M call macro. (SETUP PARAM 7. 2/3) Details <Code> Set the G code to be used when calling the macro with a G command. Do not set a G code used in the system. <Type> Same as the M call Marco. <Program No.> Same as the M call Marco. Smac 0 to 3 M98 Pв€†в€†в€†в€†; and equivalent value call <Program No.> Set the No. of the program to be called out. M2mac Setting range (unit) 1 to 9999 Setting range (unit) 1 to 255 0 to 3 1 to 99999999 Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with an S command. This is valid when #1196 Smac is set to 1. <Type> 0 to 3 Same as the M call Marco. <Program No.> 1 to 99999999 Same as the M call Marco. Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with a T command. This is valid when #1197 Tmac is set to 1. <Type> 0 to 3 Same as the M call macro. <Program No.> 0 to 99999999 Same as the M call macro. II - 212 11. MACRO LIST (SETUP PARAM 7. 3/3) # 7401 Item ASCII [01] Valid 7402 Code 7403 Type 7404 Program No. Variable 7405 7411 ASCII [02] Valid 7412 Code 7413 Type 7414 Program No. Variable 7415 Details The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to 7405) are validated. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code. Set the macro call type. 0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1 Set the number of the program called with macro call. When the call type is "0", set the variable number set after the ASCII code. The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to 7415) are validated. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the ASCII code. Set the macro call type. 0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1 Set the number of the program called with macro call. When the call type is "0", set the variable number set after the ASCII code. II - 213 Setting range 0/1 L system: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T M system: A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q, R, S, T 0 to 3 0 to 99999999 100 to 149 0/1 L system: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T M system: A, B, F, H, I, K, M, Q, R, S, T 0 to 3 0 to 99999999 100 to 149 12. POSITION SWITCH 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION 12. POSITION SWITCH 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION The position switch (PSW) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance. When the machine reaches the imaginary dog positionвЂљ a signal is output to the PLC interface. The position switch thus works as an imaginary dog switch. (SETUP PARAM 8. 1/1) # 7500 Item High-speed switching of position switch Pcheck 75В…1 <axis> Axis name 75В…2 <dog1> Imaginary dog position 1 75В…3 <dog2> 75В…4 <check> Imaginary dog position 2 Selection of area check method Details Specify whether to perform position switch area checking at high speeds. 0: Do not perform position switch area checking at high speed (do it the same as before). 1: Perform position switch area checking at high speed. Specify the name of the axis for which a position switch is provided. When the machine enters the range between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, a signal is output to the PLC. Setting range (unit) 0/1 X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, or C axis address в€’99999.999 to 99999.999 (0.001mm) Device X 270 When position switch area checking at high speed is selected, specify the mode of area checking, i.e., whether to use the command type machine position or detector feedback position, for each position switch point. 0: Use the command type machine position as the machine position for position switch area checking. 1: Use the detector feedback position as the machine position for position switch area checking. Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 set in вЂњ#7500 Pcheck.вЂќ II - 214 0/1 12. POSITION SWITCH 12.1 OUTLINE OF FUNCTION Position switch numbers of PSW1 to PSW8 and signal devices PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 PSW4 PSW5 PSW6 PSW7 PSW8 <axis> <dog1> <dog2> Device #7501 #7511 #7521 #7531 #7541 #7551 #7561 #7571 #7502 #7512 #7522 #7532 #7542 #7552 #7562 #7572 #7503 #7513 #7523 #7533 #7543 #7553 #7563 #7573 X270 X271 X272 X273 X274 X275 X276 X277 Instead of the dog switch provided on the machine axisвЂљ the coordinate values indicating imaginary dog positions (dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axis of the axis name preset with axis are set with the position switches (PSW1 вЂ“ PSW8). When the machine reaches the positionвЂљ the signal is output to the device corresponding to the PLC interface. Example of settings of dog1 and dog2 and operation Setting of dog1 and dog2 dog1 < dog2 dog1 > dog2 dog1 = dog2 dog1, dog2 position dog1 dog2 dog2 dog1 dog1 = dog2 Operation A signal is output between dog1 and dog2. A signal is output between dog1 and dog2. If dog1 equals dog2вЂљ the dog1 position triggers a signal. II - 215 Basic machine coordinate system zero point Imaginary dog dog1 dog2 PSW width 12.2 12. POSITION SWITCH CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH Rotation axis Setting of dog1 and dog2 dog1 < dog2 dog1, dog2 position dog2 dog1 (Example) dog1 = 30.000 dog2 = 330.000 dog1 dog2 (Example) dog1 = -30.000 dog2 = 30.000 dog1 > dog2 dog1 dog2 (Example) dog1 = 330.000 dog2 = 30.000 пЈ¦dog1 в€’ dog2пЈ¦ в‰Ґ 360 dog2 dog1 (Example) dog1 = 30.000 dog2 = 390.000 Description A signal is output between dog1 and dog2. A signal is also output when dog1 is negative. A signal is output between dog2 and dog1. A signal is kept output when the difference between dog1 and dog2 exceeds 360 degrees. 12.2 CANCELING THE POSITION SWITCH To cancel the position switchвЂљ enter the number (#75 1) of the position switch to be canceled in # ( ) of the setting fieldвЂљ enter a slash "/" in DATA ( )вЂљ then press the INPUT key. This deletes the axis name for the specified position switchвЂљ thus invalidating the position switch. The data specified for <dog1> and <dog2> are still stored in memory. To validate the position switch againвЂљ thereforeвЂљ it is enough to specify the axis name only. II - 216 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be validated after the power is turned ON again. Details Default value No. Name Setting range 1 MSR (PR) Motor series Set the motor series. This is automatically judged 0000 to FFFF by the system when the default value (0000) is (hexadecimal) set. 2 RTY (PR) Regeneration option type Set the regenerative resistor type. Do not set values without a description. 0000 0 0 0 0 (Default value) Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7~F 3 PC1 (PR) 4 PC2 (PR) 5 PIT (PR) 6 INP Details Amplifier standard built-in resistor (10CT has no built-in resistor) Setting prohibited MR-RB032 (30W) MR-RB12 (100W) MR-RB32 (300W) MR-RB30 (300W) MR-RB50 (500W) Motor side gear ratio (machine rotation ratio) Set the No. of gear teeth on the motor side and the No. of gear teeth on the machine side as an integer reduced to its lowest terms. Set the total gear ratio if there are multiple gear Machine side levels. For rotation axes, set the No. of motor rotation gear ratio (motor rotation speed per machine rotation. ratio) 1 to 32767 1 1 to 32767 1 Feed pitch 1 to 32767 (В° or mm) 360 Set 360 (default value) for rotation axes. Set the feed lead for linear axes. In-position In-position is detected when the position droop detection width becomes this setting value or less. II - 217 1 to 32767 50 (1/1000В° or Вµm) 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. 7 Name ATU Auto-tuning Details Default value Setting range Set the adjustment of the auto-tuning. Do not set values without a description. 0 1 0 2 (Default setting value) Setting value Details Low response (low-rigidity loads, loads which easily vibrate) Standard setting value Standard setting value Standard setting value High response (high-rigidity loads, loads which do not easily vibrate) 1 2 3 4 5 Setting value 0 Details Standard Large friction amount (set the position loop gain slightly lower) 2 Setting value 0 Details Only auto-tuning PG2, VG2, VIC, and GD2. Only auto-tuning PG1, PG2, VG1, VG2, VIC, and GD2 (total gain). (Standard setting) No auto-tuning. 1 2 8 PG1 Position loop gain 1 9 10 EMGt Set the position loop gain for the model loop. Determine the tracking ability regarding the position commands. 4 to 1000 (1/s) (Not used.) Deceleration control time constant 70 0 Set the deceleration time from the clamp speed 0 to 32768 (ms) 500 (Aspeed1). For normal rapid traverse, set the same value as the acceleration/deceleration time constant. 11 (Not used.) 0 12 (Not used.) 0 100 13 MBR Vertical axis drop prevention time Input the time the servo OFF is delayed during 0 to 1000 (ms) servo OFF command. Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the minimum value where the axis does not drop. 14 NCH Notch filter No. Set the frequency of the machine resonance suppression filter. Do not set values without a description. Setting value Frequency (Hz) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No start 1125 563 375 282 225 188 161 II - 218 13. No. Name 15 16 JIT AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN Details (Not used.) Jitter compensation Default value Setting range 0 Set the No. of ignored jitter compensation pulses. Do not set values without a description. Setting value Number of ignore pulses 0 1 2 3 No start 1125 563 375 17 (Not used.) 0 18 (Not used.) 0 19 PG2 Position loop gain 2 Set the position loop gain of the actual loop. Determine the position responsiveness for external disturbance. 1 to 500 (1/s) 20 VG1 Speed loop gain 1 Set the speed loop gain of the model loop. Determine the tracking ability regarding the speed commands. 20 to 5000 (1/s) 1200 21 VG2 Speed loop gain 2 Set the speed loop gain of the actual loop. 20 to 8000 (1/s) 600 Determine the speed responsiveness for external disturbance. 22 VIC Speed integral Determine the characteristics of the speed compensation low-frequency region. 23 VDC Speed differential compensation PI control normally results from a default value of 0 to 1000 1000. Adjust the overshoot amount by lowering in increments of 20. 1000 24 DG2 Load inertia ratio Set the load inertia ratio for the motor inertia. 2.0 25 30 MTY (PR) 1 to 1000 (ms) 0.0 to 50.0 (fold) (Not used.) Motor type 25 20 0 Set the motor type. This is automatically judged by the system when the default value (0000) is set. II - 219 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal) 0000 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. 50 Name MD1 D/A output channel 1 data No. Details Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output channel 1. 0 0 0 0 (Default setting value) Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 51 MO1 D/A output channel 1 output offset 52 Default value Setting range Details Magnification Speed feedback (with sign) Current feedback (with sign) Speed feedback (without sign) Current feedback (without sign) Current command Maximum rotation speed = 8V Command Fв€†T 100000 [degrees/min] = 10V Position droop 1 (1/1) Position droop 2 (1/4) Position droop 3 (1/16) Position droop 4 (1/32) Position droop 5 (1/64) 2048 [pulse] = 10V Maximum current (torque) = 8V Maximum rotation speed = 8V Maximum current (torque) = 8V Maximum current (torque) = 8V 8192 [pulse] = 10V 32768 [pulse] = 10V 65536 [pulse] = 10V 131072 [pulse] = 10V Set this value when the zero level of D/A output channel 1 is not suitable. вЂ“999 to 999 (mV) 0 (Not used.) 0 53 MD2 D/A output channel 2 data No. Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output 0000 to FFFF channel 2. (hexadecimal) The descriptions are the same as "50 MD1". 0000 54 MO2 D/A output channel 2 output offset Set this value when the zero level of D/A output channel 2 is not suitable. 0 55 100 station (PR) No. of indexing stations вЂ“999 to 999 (mV) (Not used.) 0 Set the No. of stations. For linear axes, this value 2 to 360 is expressed by: No. of divisions = No. of stations вЂ“ 1. 2 II - 220 13. No. 101 Cont1 (PR) AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN Name Control parameter 1 Details Default value Setting range This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default values. bit Default value bit 0 1 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set High-speed zero point return after establishment of zero point. Dog-type return for each zero point return operation. Reference point return direction (+) Rotation direction determined by #2030 dir (вЂ“) Machine basic position becomes the origin point Reference point return direction (вЂ“) Rotation direction in the shortcut direction Electrical zero point becomes the origin point Coordinate zero point creation valid Rotation direction in #2030 dir (вЂ“) or in the shortcut direction Stopper direction is positioning direction Zero point established at power supply ON position Rotation direction in the random position command sign direction Stopper direction is in the sign direction of the stopper amount 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F II - 221 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. Name 102 Cont2 (PR) Details Control This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default parameter 2 values. bit Default value bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 103 EmgCont (PR) Default value Setting range Emergency stop control F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Error not corrected at servo OFF Linear axis Station assignment direction CW Uniform index DO channel standard assignment 2-wire detector communication Incremental detection Error corrected at servo OFF Rotation axis Station assignment direction CCW Non-uniform index DO channel reverse assignment 4-wire detector communication Absolute position detection This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default values. bit Default value bit 0 1 2 3 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set External emergency stop External emergency stop valid invalid (default value) Dynamic brake stop at Deceleration control stop at emergency stop emergency stop NC bus emergency stop input NC bus emergency stop input valid invalid NC bus emergency stop output NC bus emergency stop output valid invalid 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F II - 222 13. No. Name 104 tleng (PR) Linear axis stroke length 110 ZRNspeed Reference point return speed AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN Details Setting range Default value Set the movement stroke length for linear axes. This is meaningless when setting non-uniform assignments or commanding random positions. 0.001 to 99999.999 (mm) 100.000 Set the clamp value of the feedrate when a reference point return is carried out. The feedrate becomes the manual operation speed of the parameter group selected at that time, but it is clamped by this parameter setting value. 1 to 100000 (В°/min or mm/min) 1000 111 ZRNcreep Reference Set the approach speed to the reference point after 1 to 65535 point return dog detection during a reference point return. (В°/min or creep speed mm/min) 200 112 grid mask Grid mask Set the amount that the dog is artificially extended. 0 to 65536 0 Set 1/2 the grid spacing as a standard. (1/1000В° or Вµm) 113 grspc (PR) Grid spacing Divide the grid spacing that is the conventional 0 to 4 motor rotation movement amount into 2, 4, 8, or 16 (1/2n division) divisions. 114 ZRNshift Reference point shift amount Set the shift amount in a dog-type reference point return from the electric zero point determined on the grid to the reference point. 115 ST. ofset Station offset Set the distance (offset) from the reference point to вЂ“99999.999 to station 1. 99999.999 (В° or mm) 0.000 When movement of the machine coordinate zero point from the origin point is required during absolute position initializing, set that movement amount. вЂ“99999.999 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 0.000 117 Limit (+) Soft limit (+) Commands in the plus direction that exceed this вЂ“99999.999 to setting value are not possible. If the machine is in a 99999.999 position exceeding the setting value, commands in (mm) the minus direction are possible. The soft limit function will not operate if Limit (+) and Limit (вЂ“) are set to the same value. 1.000 118 Limit (вЂ“) Soft limit (вЂ“) Commands in the minus direction that exceed this вЂ“99999.999 to value are not possible. If the machine is in a 99999.999 position exceeding the setting value, commands in (mm) the plus direction are possible. 1.000 116 ABS Base Absolute (PR) position zero point II - 223 0 0 to 65536 0 (1/1000В° or Вµm) 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. Name 120 ABS type Absolute position detection parameter Details Default value Setting range This parameter is set as a hexadecimal. Set the default value for bits that have no description. bit Default value bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Dogless-type method initializing Mechanical stopper method initializing Electrical zero point direction (+) Dog-type method initializing Origin point alignment method initializing Electrical zero point direction (вЂ“) 123 ABS check Absolute position power OFF tolerable movement value Set the value for the tolerable amount of 0.000 to movement for a machine that moved during 99999.999 power OFF in an absolute position detection (В° or mm) system. The "Absolute position power OFF movement exceeded (ABS)" signal will turn ON if the machine moves more than this setting value during power OFF. The movement amount is not checked when this parameter is set to 0.000. 130 backlash Backlash Set the backlash compensation amount. compensatio n amount 0.000 0 to 9999 0 (1/1000В° or Вµm) 132 (Not used.) 0 133 (Not used.) 0 134 (Not used.) 0 135 (Not used.) 0 II - 224 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN < Operation parameter group 1 > No. Name Details Default value Setting range Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 when operation parameter group 1 is selected. (В°/min or This parameter is regarded as the clamp value mm/min) for the automatic operation speeds and manual operation speeds of all operation groups. A speed exceeding Aspeed1 cannot be commanded, even if set in the parameters. 5000 151 Mspeed1 Operation parameter group 1 Manual operation speed Set the feedrate during manual operation and JOG operation when operation parameter group 1 is selected. 2000 152 time1.1 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/ deceleration time constant 1 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) Aspeed 1(the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed)) when operation parameter group 1 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-character acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter. 100 153 time1.2 Operation parameter group 1 Acceleration/ deceleration time constant 2 Set this parameter when carrying out S-pattern 1 to 999 (ms) acceleration/ deceleration. When S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When "1" is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In the handle feed operation mode, this set value is regarded as the time constant for the linear acceleration/deceleration. 1 150 Aspeed1 Operation parameter group 1 Automatic operation speed II - 225 1 to 100000 (В°/min or mm/min) 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. Name Details Setting range Default value 154 TL1 Operation parameter group 1 Torque limit value Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) operation parameter group 1 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of each motor. Set the default value when torque limit is not especially required. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the torque limit value when positioning to the stopper starting coordinates. 500 155 OD1 Operation parameter group 1 Excessive error detection width Set the excessive error detection width when 0 to 32767 operation parameter group 1 is selected. An (В° or mm) alarm of excessive error (S03 0052) is detected when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. 100 156 just1 Operation parameter group 1 Set position output width The signal indicating that the machine position 0.000 to is at any one of the stations is the set position 99999.999 reached (JST) signal. During automatic (В° or mm) operation, the automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal is also output under the same conditions. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 1 is selected. These signals turn OFF when the machine position is separated from the station exceeding this value. 0.500 157 near1 Operation parameter group 1 Near set position output width The signal indicating that the machine position 0.000 to is near any one of the station positions is the 99999.999 near set position (NEAR) signal. (В° or mm) Set the tolerable value at which this signal is output when operation parameter group 1 is selected. This value is generally set wider than the set position output width. During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is "0". 1.000 II - 226 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN < Operation parameter group 2 > No. 158 Aspeed2 159 Mspeed2 160 time2.1 161 time2.2 Name Operation parameter group 2 Automatic operation speed Operation parameter group 2 Manual operation speed Operation parameter group 2 Acceleration/ deceleration time constant 1 Operation parameter group 2 Automatic operation speed Details Setting range Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 when operation parameter group 2 is selected. (В°/min or mm/min) Set the feedrate during manual operation and JOG operation when operation parameter group 2 is selected. 1 to 100000 (В°/min or mm/min) Default value 5000 2000 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) 100 the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 2 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-character acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter. Set this parameter when carrying out 1 to 9999 (ms) 1 S-character acceleration/deceleration. When S-character acceleration/deceleration is carried out, set the total time of the non-linear parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear acceleration/deceleration is carried out. For the handle feed operation mode, this becomes the linear acceleration/deceleration that is the acceleration/deceleration time constant. II - 227 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. 162 TL2 163 OD2 164 just2 165 near2 Name Details Operation parameter group 2 Manual operation speed Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 2 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the torque limit value during stopper operation. Operation Set the excessive error detection width when parameter operation parameter group 2 is selected. An group 2 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected Acceleration/ when the position droop becomes larger than deceleration this setting value. time constant In the stopper positioning operation mode, this 1 becomes the torque limit value excessive error detection width during stopper operation. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position parameter is at any one of the stations is the set position group 2 reached (JST) signal. During automatic operation, the automatic set position reached Automatic (JSTA) signal is also output under the same operation conditions. speed Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 2 is selected. These signals turn OFF when the machine position is separated from the station by more than this value. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position parameter is near any one of the station positions is the group 2 near set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are Manual output when operation parameter group 2 is operation selected. These values are generally set wider speed than the set position output width. During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is 0. II - 228 Setting range 1 to 500 (%) Default value 500 0 to 32767 (В° or mm) 100 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 0.500 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 1.000 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN < Operation parameter group 3 > No. Name 166 Aspeed3 167 Mspeed3 168 time3.1 169 time3.2 Operation parameter group 3 Automatic operation speed Operation parameter group 3 Manual operation speed Operation parameter group 3 Acceleratio n/decelerati on time constant 1 Details Setting range Set the feedrate during automatic operation when 1 to 100000 operation parameter group 3 is selected. (В°/min or mm/min) Set the feedrate during manual operation and 1 to 100000 JOG operation when operation parameter group 3 (В°/min or is selected. mm/min) Default value 5000 2000 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) 100 the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 3 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-character acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter. Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-character 1 to 9999 (ms) 1 parameter acceleration/deceleration. group 3 When S-character acceleration/deceleration is Acceleratio carried out, set the total time of the non-linear n/decelerati parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear on time acceleration/deceleration is carried out. constant 2 For the handle feed operation mode, this becomes the linear acceleration/deceleration that is the acceleration/deceleration time constant. II - 229 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. 170 TL3 171 OD3 172 just3 173 near3 Name Details Operation parameter group 3 Torque limit value Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 3 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. In the stopper positioning operation mode, this becomes the pressing torque limit value after completion of the positioning. Operation Set the excessive error detection width when parameter operation parameter group 3 is selected. An group 3 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected Excessive when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. error detection In the stopper positioning operation mode, this width becomes the excessive error detection width during pressing after completion of the positioning. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is parameter at any one of the stations is the set position group 3 reached (JST) signal. During automatic operation, Set position the automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal is also output under the same conditions. output width Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 3 is selected. These signals turn OFF when the machine position is separated from the station by more than this value. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is parameter near any one of the station positions is the near group 3 set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when Near set operation parameter group 3 is selected. These position values are generally set wider than the set output position output width. width During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is 0. II - 230 Setting range 1 to 500 (%) Default value 500 0 to 32767 (В° or mm) 100 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 0.500 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 1.000 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN < Operation parameter group 4 > No. Name 174 Aspeed4 175 Mspeed4 176 time4.1 177 time4.2 Operation parameter group 4 Automatic operation speed Operation parameter group 4 Manual operation speed Operation parameter group 4 Acceleratio n/decelerati on time constant 1 Details Setting range Set the feedrate during automatic operation when 1 to 100000 operation parameter group 4 is selected. (В°/min or mm/min) Set the feedrate during manual operation and 1 to 100000 JOG operation when operation parameter group 4 (В°/min or is selected. mm/min) Default value 5000 2000 Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) 100 the operation parameter group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed) when operation parameter group 4 is selected. When operating at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the inclination determined above. When this is set together with acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-character acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of the linear part in this parameter. Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-character 1 to 9999 (ms) 1 parameter acceleration/deceleration. group 4 When S-character acceleration/deceleration is Acceleratio carried out, set the total time of the non-linear n/decelerati parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear on time acceleration/deceleration is carried out. constant 2 For the handle feed operation mode, this becomes the linear acceleration/deceleration that is the acceleration/deceleration time constant. II - 231 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. 178 TL4 179 OD4 180 just4 181 near4 Name Details Operation parameter group 4 Torque limit value Set the motor output torque limit value when operation parameter group 4 is selected. At the default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications. In the stopper default setting mode in absolute position detection systems, this becomes the torque limit value during stopper operation. Operation Set the excessive error detection width when parameter operation parameter group 4 is selected. An group 4 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected Excessive when the position droop becomes larger than this setting value. error detection In the stopper default setting mode in absolute width position detection systems, this becomes the excessive error detection width during stopper operation. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is parameter at any one of the stations is the set position group 4 reached (JST) signal. During automatic operation, Set position the automatic set position reached (JSTA) signal is also output under the same conditions. output width Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when operation parameter group 4 is selected. These signals turn OFF when the machine position is separated from the station by more than this value. Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is parameter near any one of the station positions is the near group 4 set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable values at which these signals are output when Near set operation parameter group 4 is selected. These position values are generally set wider than the set output position output width. width During operations, this is related to special commands when the station selection is 0. II - 232 Setting range 1 to 500 (%) Default value 500 0 to 32767 (В° or mm) 100 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 0.500 0.000 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) 1.000 13. No. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN Name 190 stpos2 Station 2 coordinate value 191 stpos3 Station 3 coordinate value 192 stpos4 Station 4 coordinate value 193 stpos5 Station 5 coordinate value 194 stpos6 Station 6 coordinate value 195 stpos7 Station 7 coordinate value 196 stpos8 Station 8 coordinate value 197 stpos9 Station 9 coordinate value 200 PSWcheck PSW detection method Details Setting range Set the coordinate value of each station when non-uniform assignment is selected. The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at 0.000 (machine coordinate zero point). вЂ“99999.999 to 99999.999 (В° or mm) Default value 0.000 This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default values. bit Default value bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Meaning when "0" is set The position switch output is judged by the machine position of the command system. II - 233 Meaning when "1" is set The position switch output is judged by the machine FB position (actual position). 13. AUXILIARY AXIS PARAMETER SCREEN No. Name Details Default value Setting range When the machine position is in the region -99999.999 to between region settings 1 and 2, the position 99999.999 switch of each No. will turn ON. (В° or mm) Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than setting 2 (vice versa) does not affect the position switch operation. For rotation axes, the output turns ON at the region without including 0.000 degree. 0.000 Set the command stroke of the stopper operation during stopper positioning operations. 0.000 201 PSW1dog1 202 PSW1dog2 PSW1 area setting 1 PSW1 area setting 2 203 PSW2dog1 204 PSW2dog2 PSW2 area setting 1 PSW2 area setting 2 205 PSW3dog1 206 PSW3dog2 PSW3 area setting 1 PSW3 area setting 2 207 PSW4dog1 208 PSW4dog2 PSW4 area setting 1 PSW4 area setting 2 209 PSW5dog1 210 PSW5dog2 PSW5 area setting 1 PSW5 area setting 2 211 PSW6dog1 212 PSW6dog2 PSW6 area setting 1 PSW6 area setting 2 213 PSW7dog1 214 PSW7dog2 PSW7 area setting 1 PSW7 area setting 2 215 PSW8dog1 216 PSW8dog2 PSW8 area setting 1 PSW8 area setting 2 220 push Stopper amount 221 pushT1 Stopper Set the standby time from the stopper starting 0 to 9999 (ms) standby time coordinate positioning to the stopper operation start during stopper positioning operations. 0 222 pushT2 Stopper Set the time from the completion of the torque stopper operation to the changeover of the release time stopper torque during stopper positioning operations. 0 to 9999 (ms) 0 223 pushT3 Set position Set the time from the completion of the 0 to 9999 (ms) signal output stopper operation to the output of the delay time automatic set position reached (JSTA), set position reached (JST), and near set position (NEAR) signals during stopper positioning operations. 0 II - 234 0.000 to 359.999 (В° or mm) Revision History Sub No. Date A March 2003 Revision First edition created. Notice Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product. Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. п›™ 2003 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED